Category: Pandemic

  • MIL-OSI: April Consumer Chapter 7 Bankruptcy Filings Increase 16 Percent from Previous Year

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    NEW YORK, May 02, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — The 30,961 individual chapter 7 filings in April 2025 represented a 16 percent increase over the 26,781 filings recorded in April 2024, according to data provided by Epiq AACER, the leading provider of U.S. bankruptcy filing data.

    Total individual bankruptcy filings increased 10 percent in April 2025, to 47,323, up from the April 2024 individual filing total of 43,030. The 16,246 individual chapter 13 filings in April 2025 represented a slight increase from the 16,175 individual chapter 13 filings last April.

    “The 9 percent increase in total bankruptcy filings in April 2025, particularly the 16 percent surge in individual chapter 7 filings, reflects the mounting financial strain on households, elevated prices, and higher borrowing costs,” said Michael Hunter, Vice President of Epiq AACER. “While commercial filings have softened, the uptick in small business Subchapter V elections signals persistent distress among smaller businesses navigating an uncertain economic landscape.

    “April 2025’s data underscores a continued rise in individual bankruptcies, with 47,323 filings driven by economic pressures like inflation and geopolitical uncertainties,” Hunter said. “Although commercial Chapter 11 filings declined, the 4 percent growth in subchapter V filings highlights the ongoing challenges for small businesses seeking relief, pointing to a broader need for accessible restructuring options.”

    Total bankruptcy filings were 49,588 in April 2025, a 9 percent increase from the April 2024 total of 45,615. Conversely, total April commercial filings dipped 12 percent to 2,265 from the 2,585 total commercial filings the previous year. Commercial chapter 11 bankruptcy filings decreased 20 percent in April 2025, declining to 434 from the 542 filings registered in April 2024. Small business filings, however, captured as subchapter V elections within chapter 11, increased 4 percent in April 2025, to 218 from the 210 filings recorded in April 2024.

    “While filings still remain below pre-pandemic levels, elevated prices, higher borrowing costs and uncertain geopolitical events compound the economic challenges faced by families and businesses,” said ABI Executive Director Amy Quackenboss. “We look forward to providing Congress with the research, information and statistics to re-establish higher debt thresholds for financially distressed small businesses and consumers to access the fresh start of bankruptcy.”

    ABI has partnered with Epiq Bankruptcy to provide the most current bankruptcy filing data for analysts, researchers, and members of the news media. Epiq Bankruptcy is the leading provider of data, technology, and services for companies operating in the business of bankruptcy. Its Bankruptcy Analytics subscription service provides on-demand access to the industry’s most dynamic bankruptcy data, updated daily. Learn more at https://bankruptcy.epiqglobal.com/analytics.

    About Epiq
    Epiq, a technology and services leader, takes on large-scale and complex tasks for corporate legal departments, law firms, and business professionals by integrating people, process, technology, and data. Clients rely on Epiq to streamline legal and compliance, settlement, and business administration workflows to drive efficiency, minimize risk, and improve cost savings. With a presence in 19 countries, our values define who we are and how we partner with clients and communities. Learn how Epiq’s approximately 8,000 people worldwide create meaningful change at www.epiqglobal.com

    About ABI 
    ABI is the largest multi-disciplinary, nonpartisan organization dedicated to research and education on matters related to insolvency. ABI was founded in 1982 to provide Congress and the public with unbiased analysis of bankruptcy issues. The ABI membership includes nearly 10,000 attorneys, accountants, bankers, judges, professors, lenders, turnaround specialists and other bankruptcy professionals, providing a forum for the exchange of ideas and information. For additional information on ABI, visit www.abi.org. For additional conference information, visit http://www.abi.org/calendar-of-events.

    Press Contacts
    Carrie Trent
    Epiq, Senior Director of Corporate Communications and Public Relations
    Carrie.Trent@epiqglobal.com

    John Hartgen
    ABI, Public Affairs Officer
    jhartgen@abi.org

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Nations: 2 May 2025 Feature story OpenTeleRehab: a success story of inclusive telerehabilitation

    Source: World Health Organisation

    In 2022, the World Health Organization (WHO) and the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) introduced the Global standard for accessibility of telehealth services.

    Following the release, Humanity & Inclusion, an international non-governmental organization committed to inclusion and a non-state actor in official relations with WHO, upgraded its telerehabilitation platform OpenTeleRehab to align with these standards, making it one of the first known applications.

    Importance of accessibility in rehabilitation services

    Rehabilitation is an essential part of universal health coverage. An estimated 2.6 billion people currently live with a health condition that may benefit from rehabilitation services, but this need is largely unmet.

    With the COVID-19 pandemic precipitating the development of telehealth services, it provided a critical opportunity for rehabilitation service providers to think of ways they can optimize their reach and design services that meaningfully include and benefit everyone, such as persons with disabilities. 

    Key improvements in OpenTeleRehab

    Since its launch in 2021, OpenTeleRehab has reached over 1000 users worldwide. In its original design, the telerehabilitation platform included accessibility features, but significant refinements were needed to meet the WHO-ITU Global standard for accessibility of telehealth services.

    In February 2025, a software developer identified and tested several areas for improvements before release, such as:

    • Enhancing compatibility with assistive devices

    Telehealth platforms are often not compatible with assistive devices that persons with disabilities may use, such as screen readers and Braille keyboards. Compatibility with other devices is greatly improved by making sure that every part of the OpenTeleRehab interface is properly labeled and navigable. With this upgrade, mobile screen readers now function seamlessly and dynamic text scaling allows users to adjust font size without disrupting usability.

    • Improving visual accessibility

    The visual features of telehealth platforms can significantly improve accessibility for many persons with disabilities, especially those with a vision impairment. In the OpenTeleRehab upgrade, the platform’s color contrast was optimized and a high-contrast mode was introduced. Furthermore, the screen magnification was enhanced, allowing users to scale the interface without distortion.

    • Augmenting communication accessibility

    Features such as text-to-speech and captioning improve the communication accessibility of telehealth platforms for many persons with a sensory, learning or language difficulty. In OpenTeleRehab’s first release, the text-to-speech functionality was limited to exercise instructions. The upgrade provided an opportunity to extend this functionality to the entire patient mobile app. Automated multilingual captions were also added to improve accessibility for users who are deaf or hard of hearing.

    • Simplifying navigation and access to help

    Clear interfaces that are easy to navigate can enhance accessibility for all users. But more than an enjoyable aspect, it is an essential component of the digital experience for persons with disabilities, especially those with a learning difficulty, anxiety disorder, or mobility impairment.

    The OpenTeleRehab navigation was streamlined by restructuring content to reduce unnecessary scrolling and introducing “Next” and “Previous” buttons. These features benefit users with motor impairments. Additionally, a new Help/Contact section displaying therapist and clinic phone numbers was also added to improve user support.

    Illustration 1: Implementation of auto captions for online calls

    Illustration 2: Harmonized display when the font size is set to a maximum

    Illustration 3: Creation of an easily accessible “Help/Contact” button

    Key challenges in implementing accessibility standards

    Bringing OpenTeleRehab in line with the WHO-ITU accessibility standards was a process that was not without its challenges. The main challenges that had to be overcome during the platform upgrade included:

    • Snowball effect when fixing a dynamic digital environment

    Redesigning the user interface to meet accessibility requirements led to unexpected complications that had to be addressed. For example, increasing text size initially caused overlaps with other interface elements, which required extensive work to fix. Manual corrections also had to be performed to scale elements properly following changes. Content that is dynamically generated proved particularly difficult to trace, requiring additional customisation and meticulous adjustments.

    • Limited access to a range of test tools and assistive devices

    One significant drawback was the limited range of accessibility test tools available to the software developer, which frequently prioritized the requirements of users with a vision impairment over those with motor or cognitive impairments. Moreover, possibilities to conduct compatibility tests were hampered by the lack of access to some assistive technologies, such as Braille keyboards.

    • Identifying quality captioning services

    Selecting an accurate, multilingual, and open-source real-time captioning service proved to be another challenge. Many options that were trialled were either too slow, lacked language support, or were incompatible with specific web browsers.

    • Repeated testing

    The most resource-intensive aspect of the platform upgrade was undeniably the act of performing accessibility tests. Each change required evaluation with multiple assistive devices to ensure compatibility. Resolving issues that automated tools could not detect made the process time-consuming and labor-intensive.

    Key lessons learned

    Accessibility should be a core design principle, not an afterthought. Retrofitting accessibility provided far more challenging than designing it from the start.

    Martin Jacobs / Rehabilitation and innovation policy development officer, Humanity & Inclusion

    One of the key lessons learned was that accessibility should be a core design principle, not an afterthought. Retrofitting accessibility, even if limited to specific features, into an existing user interface proved to be far more challenging than designing it from the start. By integrating the WHO-ITU accessibility standards from the beginning, development teams can significantly reduce work while enhancing usability.

    Another crucial lesson was the importance of involving persons with disabilities in initial design, testing and feedback. Developers and testers, despite their best efforts, may not fully understand the real-world needs of users with disabilities. Engaging individuals with disabilities from the beginning of the development process can help identify critical accessibility issues, ensuring a more inclusive and user-friendly experience – for patients and health practitioners alike.

    By improving its accessibility, OpenTeleRehab has evolved into a more inclusive telerehabilitation solution. Humanity & Inclusion remains committed to further accessibility enhancements and sharing insights with the global community.

    “,”datePublished”:”2025-05-02T12:00:00.0000000+00:00″,”image”:”https://cdn.who.int/media/images/default-source/2021-dha-images/opentelerehab.png?sfvrsn=698d08ad_1″,”publisher”:{“@type”:”Organization”,”name”:”World Health Organization: WHO”,”logo”:{“@type”:”ImageObject”,”url”:”https://www.who.int/Images/SchemaOrg/schemaOrgLogo.jpg”,”width”:250,”height”:60}},”dateModified”:”2025-05-02T12:00:00.0000000+00:00″,”mainEntityOfPage”:”https://www.who.int/news/item/02-05-2025-opentelerehab-a-success-story-of-inclusive-telerehabilitation”,”@context”:”http://schema.org”,”@type”:”NewsArticle”};
    ]]>

    MIL OSI United Nations News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Rep. Dina Titus Warns of State Budget Crisis from DOGE Cuts and Trump Tariffs

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Congresswoman Dina Titus (1st District of Nevada)

    Congresswoman Dina Titus reiterated her warning about a budget crisis in Nevada after the Nevada Economic Forum today approved a forecast predicting a slowdown in revenues to fund vital state services. 

    “The combination of the Trump tariffs and the DOGE cuts to vital programs like Medicaid are putting Nevadans at risk,” Congresswoman Titus said. “We are being asked to fill the gaps left by federal cuts to services while the Trump tariffs are damaging our economy and shrinking state revenues.”

    The Nevada Economic Forum, which sets revenue projections for the Nevada Legislature to use in finalizing a 2025-27 biennial budget, approved a forecast projecting about $190 million less in revenues from major taxes than it projected in December 2024.

    “That means there will be even less money for education, social services, infrastructure ,and environmental protection,” Congresswoman Titus said. “It is more important than ever that Nevadans call on the Trump administration to reverse course on tariffs and oppose the draconian budget cuts by DOGE and the Republican Congress.”

    Congresswoman Titus recently addressed the Nevada Legislature and warned legislators about a “tsunami” of federal cuts coming to Nevada, which relies on federal funding for 27.7 percent of its state budget. In particular, she noted the state may lose $3 billion in federal funding for Medicaid, which provides health care coverage for 812,000 Nevadans. Congresswoman Titus also noted the loss of federal funds to support Nevada schools and nutrition programs.

    She said today that the Trump tariffs are already taking a toll on the state’s economy, citing a report this week that visitation to Southern Nevada in March plunged 7.8 percent from a year ago, one of the steepest year-over-year drops since the coronavirus pandemic.

    “Nevada is often the first state to suffer from economic downturns because of our reliance on tourism,” Congresswoman Titus said. “We must oppose federal policies that will mean job losses and cuts to services when Nevadans need them most. The future of our state is at stake.”

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Hoyer: In 100 Days, Trump Sent Our Economy Into a Tailspin

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Congressman Steny H Hoyer (MD-05)

    WASHINGTON, DC – Today, Congressman Steny H. Hoyer (MD-05) released the following statement on the worst quarterly GDP report since the COVID-19 pandemic:

    “Trump inherited an American economy that was the envy of the world. It only took him 100 days to send it into a tailspin.

    “Prices are going up. The stock market is trending down. Our economy is shrinking for the first time since the final months of the pandemic, as today’s GDP numbers demonstrate. And, most importantly, the American people are hurting.

    “We owe all of this to Trump’s tariffs – to the uncertainty he has sown in our economy. He calls this downturn ‘short-term pain.’ Americans recognize his disastrous economic agenda for what it is: an existential threat to their families, their businesses, and their livelihoods.”

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: CAHNR’s Class of 2025

    Source: US State of Connecticut

    On May 10 and 12, 2025, the College of Agriculture, Health and Natural Resources (CAHNR) and the Ratcliffe Hicks School of Agriculture will recognize graduates as they meet a major academic milestone.

    Learn about a few of the nearly 600 stellar students who will soon become CAHNR alumni.

    Bendy Al Zaatini, Allied Health Sciences

    Hometown: Waterbury, CT

    Why UConn? Throughout the chaos of the pandemic, I was positive that staying at home while simultaneously building my community at UConn Waterbury would be the right way to start my journey as an undergraduate student at the prestigious school. I was surprised by the number of resources that are available to students. There is always help when needed and many different pathways to achieve success.

    Why your major? I am an Allied Health Sciences major, and I was drawn to it because of the different career opportunities that fall under this major. My plan after graduation is to receive my second bachelor’s degree through CEIN, the accelerated nursing program with UConn, starting January 2026.

    Advice for incoming students? Stay busy, make your presence known, and make sure that everything you are involved in benefits you in different ways. Throughout your many involvements, never forget that you are a student first and prioritize your grades above all else.

    Benjamin Angus, Agricultural and Resource Economics

    Hometown: Avon, CT

    Why UConn? I have been a UConn fan my entire life, so for me it was a no brainer. Coming to Gampel as a kid or tailgating at Rentschler, UConn sports for me wasn’t a hobby, it was a lifestyle.

    Why your major? I am a double major in Environmental Science and Natural Resource Economics. I am eager to join the fight against climate change and am looking forward to wherever that takes me. It is the most pressing issue of our time. After graduation, I am exercising my Covid year and coming back to UConn to get my Masters in Applied Resource Economics. After that, who knows? Wherever the wind takes me.

    Advice for incoming students? When you sit down in class on the first day, talk to the person next to you. Learn their name, get their number, ask them their life story – just put yourself out there and I promise you will meet some incredible human beings. Also, bundle up on a clear winter night and walk to the top of Horsebarn Hill. No one ever looks at the stars in the winter, they are breathtaking.

    Matt Antunes, Plant Science and Landscape Architecture

    Hometown: Smithfield, RI

    Why UConn? UConn was a top ranked school in my choices for college, and I felt like I would get the best education for my major. I felt at home in my time at UConn with the friends and connections I made throughout my four years here.

    Why your major? Plant Science (Sustainable Plant and Soil Systems) – with a turfgrass concentration. I always had a love for turf from a young age. Beginning with just mowing my home lawn as a teenager to eventually building a small putting green, I found I was always around turfgrass systems in my summers. I plan on continuing my education here as a graduate student studying turfgrass pathology, and I plan on working in the golf course industry as an assistant superintendent and hopefully a superintendent down the road.

    Advice for incoming students? Go to a UConn sporting event (especially basketball even if you’re not into it). The energy and atmosphere are unmatched to any other sporting event I’ve been to in my lifetime.

    Jillian Bowen, Pathobiology and Veterinary Science

    Hometown: Trumbull, CT

    Why UConn? The academics were the main draw for me. As an R1 institution, I knew that UConn had a lot of research opportunities, and that really drew me in.

    Why your major? My major is Pathobiology, or disease biology. I attended an agricultural high school and was a member of Future Farmers of America, so I already had an interest in animal science, but the pandemic was definitely a big factor in stimulating my interest in infectious diseases. Pathobiology is a perfect combination of those interests! After graduation, I am planning to attend UConn’s Master of Public Health program with a concentration in epidemiology.

    Advice for incoming students? Variety is the spice of life, so don’t be afraid to try something completely different – learn how to breakdance! Join an improv group! Start a book club! The world is your oyster.

    John-Henry Burke, Natural Resources and the Environment

    Hometown: Suffield, CT

    Why UConn? I chose UConn because I thought it offered the best ‘bang for my buck.’ You get an incredibly large institution with a large number of resources and a diverse array of opportunities for a price that is much more affordable than other schools.

    Why your major? I’m an Environmental Science major with a concentration in Sustainable Systems and a minor in Political Science and a minor in Environmental Economics and Policy. I was drawn to environmental science after taking a class in high school where I learned about climate change, plastic pollution, species extinction, and other threats facing our planet. I’m going to law school in the fall, and I would like to ultimately go into environmental law to advance environmental policy and protect natural areas.

    Top UConn memories? One of the best parts of my UConn experience has been playing in the UConn Marching Band, where I served as Vice President. I’ve met so many amazing people through the band and accomplished a level of musicality I would’ve never imagined possible. Some notable UCMB performances were playing at a New England Patriots game and two Bowl games (Fenway and Myrtle Beach)!

    Christian Carmona, Plant Science and Landscape Architecture

    Hometown: Stamford, CT

    Why UConn? I chose UConn because it helped me the most financially and it was not as far away from my house as others were.

    Why your major? My major is Landscape Architecture, and what drew me to it was that it was a form of architecture I had never heard of before. I was eager to try it out, and it gave me the opportunity to be creative and design spaces for communities. I hope to continue my education and pursue a master’s in architecture.

    Advice for incoming students? Be open minded and ready to learn. You are here for a reason so stay focused on your goals and do not take anything for granted.

    Laura Centanni, Animal Science

    Hometown: Haworth, NJ

    Why UConn? I was leaning towards UConn due to the diversity of species in our barns on campus; however, what tipped the scales in the end was the mascot!

    Why your major? My major is Animal science. I have had a passion for animals and service for as long as I can remember, and I am pursuing my passion of becoming a veterinarian through animal science here at UConn. I have already received my first few acceptances to vet school! Wherever I choose, I know that UConn prepared me well.

    Advice for incoming students? Expand your comfort zone. Let it get so big that nothing is outside of it. UConn is one of the safest environments to explore that you will ever have, so take advantage of it!

    Jessica Harris, Allied Health Sciences

    Hometown: Mansfield, MA

    Why UConn? When it was time for me to look at colleges, I was excited to apply to UConn as is but I also discovered that CAHNR offered the major I was interested in, Allied Health Sciences, as part of the New England Regional Tuition Program. This made UConn such an easy choice for me because of its well-known academic excellence and affordability as an out of state school.

    Why your major? I applied into UConn as an AHS major, because it would allow me to do my prerequisite courses to apply to physical therapy school, but I soon learned that it was not the right path for me. Luckily, AHS is such an adaptable major, intended to cater to your career interests, that I was able to stay on track despite changing paths, and ended up finding exactly what I wanted to do: UConn’s CEIN program.

    Top UConn memories? Going to the UConn Dairy Bar, and 2023 when we won the Men’s National Basketball Championship for the first time in a while.

    Sungwan Kim, Kinesiology

    Hometown: Gyeongju, Republic of Korea

    Why UConn?UConn was my one and only choice because the research topics of my Ph.D. advisor, Dr. Neal Glaviano, perfectly align with my interests. Additionally, the collaborative research culture at UConn offers a unique opportunity to work with leading experts and engage in interdisciplinary projects, further enhancing my professional development.

    Why your major? I am completing my PhD in Exercise Science. Working clinically as a certified athletic trainer, I witnessed firsthand the significant impact that orthopedic conditions have on individuals’ lives. This experience motivated me to investigate how musculoskeletal injuries or pain affect physical and psychological well-being and to explore optimal treatment strategies for rehabilitation and recovery. After graduation, I will start my postdoctoral research fellowship at Boston Children’s Hospital and Harvard Medical School.

    Top UConn memories? One thing everyone should do during their time at UConn is take advantage of the Recreation Center. Whether it’s lifting weights, playing sports, or just taking a break after a long day, it’s a great place to stay active and recharge!

    Gramos Medjolli, Kinesiology

    Hometown: Korça, Albania

    Why UConn? I had heard a lot of great things about UConn from a few people I knew, and I learned what an excellent institution it is. In fact, UConn was the only university I applied to—it was UConn or nothing! I thought to myself, if it’s meant to be, it will be. And it was! At the time, I was living in Germany and already practicing as a physical therapist.

    Why your major? My grandpa always said, “The flowing water always stays fresh.” That’s why I decided to pursue the Doctor of Physical Therapy program at UConn, even after already being a licensed PT in Albania and Germany. I wanted to be the best version of myself in my profession because I love what I do. I truly believe physical therapy is one of the best jobs someone can have. If you’re not making someone else’s life better, then you’re wasting your time. I also want to advocate for the field of physical therapy and create things that will benefit the community.

    Advice for incoming students? Don’t stress too much in advance. He who suffers before it’s necessary will suffer more than necessary. You won’t remember how many hours you studied, but you will remember the beautiful moments and adventures you experienced.

    Yasmin Rosewell, Agricultural and Resource Economics

    Hometown: Las Vegas, NV

    Why UConn? I chose UConn because of its diverse and upbeat environment. The student body is heavily involved in the sports teams, clubs, and educational opportunities the school has to offer.

    Why your major? Economics of Sustainable Development and Management. I was drawn to this because I enjoyed the business aspects of the major, but the department was so involved in the students’ learning and offered great connections and opportunities to learn through different outlets. As an athlete, all of my professors within the department were extremely supportive and accommodating of my absences during the season, and that helped me succeed and learn the material without being overly stressed. After graduation, I plan to travel and then move to New York City and pursue a career in logistics.

    Advice for incoming students? Everyone on this campus is truly rooting for each other. The sense of comradery is one of a kind and the students and staff of UConn are encouraging, inclusive, and collaborative. So be bold. Don’t be afraid to be amazing. There is a place here for everyone and you will find yours. There are always people behind you and in your corner.

    Sydney Seldon, Natural Resources and the Environment

    Hometown: Harker Heights, TX

    Why UConn? I originally came to UConn to play on one of the athletic teams here but when that didn’t work out, I was launched into a time of self-discovery, which unleashed a deeper purpose and passion for spiritual formation and sustainability (both social and environmental).

    Why your major? My major is unique – Environmental Science and an Individualized Major in Sustainable Communities with a Minor in Sustainable Community Food Systems. After graduation, I’ll be joining staff with the Navigators, an international, interdenominational Christian ministry, and walking alongside students as they explore faith and spirituality.

    Advice for incoming students? Be courageous. College brings with it a host of new experiences and opportunities to grow so surrender to it. Allow yourself to be challenged and molded into not only a committed learner, but also a committed individual. Allow your conceptions about the world and yourself to be challenged. Find people who gracefully love you and push you to be the best version of yourself, so that out of that, you can contribute to being a positive influence in the world around you.

    Noah Sneed, Pathobiology and Veterinary Science, Animal Science

    Hometown: Natick, MA

    Why UConn? I chose UConn because of the opportunities for hands-on learning, as well as their extensive commitment to academia and research as an R1 university.

    Why your major? I came into college as an animal science major who was planning on going to veterinary school. I was drawn to it because I have always loved animals, and I was so excited to be able to get hands-on experience working with horses, pigs, sheep, chickens, and of course cows. I was drawn to pathobiology because I realized that further than just administering vaccinations, I was interested in how they worked and the process to make them. I was able to join a pathology research lab on campus, and it has been such an enriching experience. After graduation, I am taking two gap years before medical school. I will be working full time as an EMT in the Boston area, as well as completing a Post-Baccalaureate program at the Tufts Graduate School of Biomedical Sciences.

    Advice for incoming students? Everyone should go to a men’s and women’s basketball game at Gampel Pavilion and sit in the student section. I have never felt so much pride for my school before; it is truly an amazing experience.

    Mingda Sun, Nutritional Sciences

    Hometown: Farmington, CT

    Why UConn? I chose UConn because I am from Connecticut, and did not want to go to school too far away from home. I also chose UConn because it has a strong nutrition and pre-medical program, which were areas of study I wanted to pursue. Moreover, UConn is a large school with students of many different backgrounds, and I felt like it was a place where I could belong and find a community of friends.

    Why your major? I am a nutrition major with a minor in Spanish. I am passionate about how nutrition relates to health and the human body and have worked in numerous community health and public health initiatives as an undergraduate that are related to nutrition and disease prevention. Learning different languages is something I enjoy and believe is an important skill for connecting with patients and populations as a future health care professional. After graduation, I plan to attend medical school and become a doctor!

    Advice for incoming students? Do not be afraid to reach out for support, mentorship, or guidance when you need it. If you have an idea or a passion that you want to pursue, there are faculty and students at UConn who are willing to help you. Don’t be afraid to take the initiative for your own learning!

    Matt Syrotiak, Animal Science

    Hometown: Bethlehem, CT

    Why UConn? I spent a great deal of time here at UConn through 4-H activities and high school FFA competitions. It’s safe to say that the Storrs campus was familiar to me from early on, despite my family having never been and never attending college themselves. While it was the campus and familiarity that drew me to UConn, it was the community of students, faculty, and staff that made me stay.

    Why your major? My major is Animal Science, and I was drawn to it thanks to my involvement with the UConn Extension 4-H program where I worked on my dairy goat project. Through working with my goats, I gained a greater interest in the field, and it was reinforced by my time in agriscience classes throughout high school. UConn was the perfect fit to continue my work in animal science thanks to the proximity of the barns on campus and emphasis of hands-on class work. After graduation, I’ll serve as State 4-H Program Coordinator with UConn Extension, and create meaningful connections for 4-H youth, volunteers, and educators to increase the reach of the college and its community.

    Advice for incoming students? The connections that you gain through being a part of the UConn community are critical to future success whether its classmates, educators, or alumni. You never know when those people will make a new appearance in your life.

    Jonathan Vasquez Garcia, Nutritional Sciences

    Hometown: Willimantic, CT

    Why UConn? Ever since I was little, I was always part of various programs associated with UConn, and when I came to campus, I felt that this school was my calling.

    Why your major? I originally wanted to become a nurse. However, during my fall semester of sophomore year, I took my first nutrition class, where I gained valuable insight into the role of a registered dietitian. Ultimately, I changed my major to pursue a path aligned with my newfound passion for nutrition and sought out experiences that would deepen my understanding of the field. After graduation, I plan to pursue a master’s in clinical nutrition and complete my dietetic internship to become a registered dietitian. Eventually, I plan to work in a clinical setting to further gain foundational knowledge.

    Advice for incoming students? My advice is to have fun and take advantage of all the resources UConn has to offer. And you should diversify your social network; you never know who you will meet.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Dame Angela McLean’s speech at the Royal Institution

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Speech

    Dame Angela McLean’s speech at the Royal Institution

    This is a draft text of the speech ‘Discourse: The future of engineering biology’ delivered by Government Chief Scientific Adviser Professor Dame Angela McLean at The Royal Institution on 25 April 2025.

    I want to start by asking you all to think about how you got here tonight.

    I don’t mean in some philosophical sense; that kind of question is better left to other speakers. I mean literally: how did you make your way, here, to the Royal Institution?

    If you’re anything like me, you relied on Google Maps to show you the way (although I may be obliged to say “Other providers are available”). Perhaps you also used your phone to pay for the bus or Tube.

    If you’re joining us online – hello to you all! – you’ll be watching on a phone, tablet or laptop. So, one way or another, most of us made it here thanks to 1 of these devices.

    Now I want you to think about the battery in your phone. Chances are it’s a lithium-ion battery. And if you came in an electric car or bus, you would also have depended on a lithium-ion battery.

    The advantage of lithium-ion batteries compared to traditional alkaline batteries – the kind you may still put in the back of your TV remote – is that they can provide more energy and are rechargeable. People old enough to have depended entirely on alkaline batteries for many more devices besides the TV remote will remember the frustration when they ran out of power – and trying to cobble together another set of batteries to get them working again. Our phones may go dead, but it’s simple and convenient to recharge them.

    But there is a downside, namely all the metals that go into making these modern batteries and electrical products, including lithium, cobalt and other rare earth elements.

    Getting hold of these metals is hard. Most are currently extracted and purified from compounds in rocks, a process which can be very energy-intensive as well as very polluting.

    Recycling and reusing these same metals is also hard.

    This is the periodic table of the elements created by Dmitri Mendeleev, first published in 1869 and subsequently presented right here at the Royal Institution some 20 years later.

    How many elements do you think are used in electronic products?

    Electronic products can contain up to 60 different elements – around 52 of them metals (those are the elements highlighted in blue on the slide) – and we currently rely on inefficient and environmentally damaging methods to isolate and recycle individual metals.

    Indeed, many electronic items cannot be recycled. They simply go to landfill. This is already a serious issue and it’s 1 that will only get worse as global demand for electronics increases.

    Well, what if I told you that researchers here in the UK have identified naturally occurring bacteria, which have the ability to extract and recycle metals from this sort of waste?

    Hats off to anyone in the audience familiar with the strain of bacteria called Shewanella oneidensis MR-1, which can remove manganese from lithium-ion batteries. Or the bacteria Desulfovibrio alaskensis, which is capable of precipitating cobalt out from a mixture of the different metals and chemicals in lithium-ion batteries.

    I’m only aware of these bacteria thanks to amazing research taking place in the UK, including by Louise Horsfall’s group at the University of Edinburgh. Louise’s team have been collaborating with researchers from across the country as part of the ReLib project, which stands for the reuse and recycling of lithium-ion batteries.

    Actually, 1 of the funders for this project is the Faraday Institution, the UK’s flagship battery research programme named for the great Michael Faraday whose desk is in front of me.

    On his desk I have a few items to use to help explain battery recycling.

    Louise’s team have primarily been focused on recycling metals from large lithium-ion batteries used in electric vehicles. However, they can be pretty large – too large for me to bring here tonight. Nevertheless, many of you will know what a lithium-ion battery looks like from your phone – and the science behind how we can recycle these batteries is no different.

    Once lithium-ion batteries reach the end of their life they can be disassembled and shredded using mechanical methods to produce this. In this case, the shredded material has come from part of the battery called the cathode, which contains lots of the metals we want to recycle.

    Once we’ve dissolved this shredded material using chemical or biological methods, we get this solution here… called metal leachate. This contains the useful metals we’re interested in and it’s at this point that we introduce the bacteria I mentioned earlier.

    The bacteria collect and excrete specific metals as tiny nanoparticles which we can recover to give us something like this… which is manganese that Louise’s team has produced in the way I’ve just described from this exact process! We can then use this manganese to build new batteries or other devices.

    You might be wondering what do we do with what’s left behind in the leachate solution. Well, after the bacteria have done their work we are left with this biobrine which is rich in lithium – and resembles what you might find in lithium deposits in South America. This too can be used to make new batteries.

    And I’m not just talking about using a few types of microorganism to improve the extraction and recycling of 1 or 2 metals. There appear to be lots of different microbes out there capable of extracting different metals. Indeed, it’s possible that the bacteria have evolved this capability in a way that detoxifies their own environment, collecting up and excreting harmful metals and so not being poisoned.

    So if we use combinations of these bacteria and we tweak the characteristics of these strains, we can increase the efficiency with which metals are purified and recycled from waste.

    That word tweaking is important and it doesn’t do justice to the science involved. What we’re really talking about is engineering existing microbes to extract and recycle metals.

    Extracting metals from the ground is a hugely expensive and damaging process. It looks rather like this:

    What you can see on the bottom part of this slide is an open cast manganese mine.

    And once we’re finished with products needing such metals, we throw them away. The top part of this slide shows a landfill site after a fire. There have been reports of lithium-ion batteries causing fires at landfill sites across the world.

    With engineering biology, we only need to remove metals from the ground once; thereafter they can become part of a genuine circular economy through continual re-use.

    We use physics, chemistry and engineering to get them out of the ground but then we can and should use biology and engineering to keep recycling them.

    And this is just 1 example of what is within our grasp thanks to the power and potential of the scientific field called engineering biology.

    I’m speaking about engineering biology this evening because I believe it could be the most significant branch of science for decades to come.

    I want to explain why I think that’s the case – and to share my excitement about this field for 2 main reasons.

    The first is that the science and engineering involved in this field is, frankly, beautiful.

    The second – and more important – reason is that both current and future applications will make a huge difference to the everyday lives of people in the UK and across the world.

    I’m here to try to convince you of both these things, but if I can convince you of only 1, I want it to be the latter.

    I’m really keen for people to recognise that the scientists and engineers in this field are working to  produce solutions that most, if not all, of us can agree are necessary… urgently necessary even.

    To kick off, I ought to say that – as Government Chief Scientific Adviser – my role is to advise the Prime Minister and the Government on all matters related to science, technology and engineering.

    The job – and the advice – is a mixture of proactive and reactive work. It covers everything from providing scientific and technical advice during a national emergency to explaining the risks and opportunities around emerging technologies like artificial intelligence and engineering biology.

    Now, in getting to grips with the promise of engineering biology, I did have a little bit of a head start.

    I am a mathematical biologist by background. My own research focused on using mathematical models to improve our understanding of the evolution and spread of infections like measles and HIV.

    I don’t, however, have any background in engineering, nor in biochemistry. So I have had to get up to speed over the past few years.

    At this point let me explain what engineering biology actually is.

    Engineering biology involves applying engineering to biological processes in order to bend biology to our will.

    In other words, it’s the practice of using ideas and tools taken from engineering to design and modify living organisms or biological systems.

    Using tools and ideas developed over recent decades, the goal is to develop new materials and energy sources; to improve animal, plant and human health; to address environmental issues in new and sustainable ways.

    What we’re talking about is the ability to harness and control biology predictably, repeatably and – I’ve said this already – usefully. Sometimes that will mean working with what’s already available in nature; at other times, it will involve genetic modification techniques.

    Let me unpack some of this a bit further.

    Firstly, on the engineering side. Here, I want to start with the design-build-test-learn cycle – DBTL for short.

    This approach has been central to product development in engineering disciplines for some time. It drives continuous refinement and innovation, making research and development faster and more efficient.

    In engineering biology, design-build-test-learn is brought to bear on biological processes – by which I mean the activities occurring within living organisms.

    Image of the design-build-test-learn cycle. Each element is located in a different quarter and all 4 quarters make up a circle.

    Essentially, I’m talking about designing something biological – like a version of a cell, or it could be a biological process (such as cell division) or a genetically-engineered system…

    Then building it, maybe in the lab…

    Then testing it to see how well it works…

    Before finally, and perhaps most importantly, learning from what did and didn’t work and then feeding the lessons into another round of design, making improvements again and again around this cycle, towards an end goal.

    This looks like being a more efficient way of recycling metals, to use the case study I gave at the start.

    And why is this approach necessary? Well, because living organisms are highly complex, with many different parts and networks of interactions between those parts.

    One could argue that physical or chemical systems are a bit more straightforward, more predictable, more easily quantifiable. We’ve been using this design-build-test-learn process to bend chemistry and physics to our will for more than a century – very successfully.

    The complex and often unpredictable nature of biological systems means we need to work through multiple permutations to get to a desired outcome – and that’s where the engineering in engineering biology comes in.

    If we can get this approach right – and I’m going to offer some further examples later showing where we already are – then we have the power to systematically develop biological systems to meet some of the biggest challenges we face.

    Let me be more definitive. If the nineteenth century was chemistry’s golden age, and the twentieth century was the same thing for physics, I believe the twenty-first century should be the golden age for biology.

    Why am I so optimistic?

    This century can belong to biology because of a series of extraordinary advances in scientific understanding.

    Where to begin? Of course, we have spent thousands of years modifying the living world.

    But I’m not going to go all the way back to the domestication of wild crops. I’m not even going back to Darwin and Mendel.

    Instead I’ll start with Watson, Crick and Wilkins – as well as the often overlooked Rosalind Franklin; 3 of the 4 received a Nobel Prize in 1962. By determining the structure of DNA, they discovered what we can call the language of biology.

    Understanding the structure of DNA opened the door to reading this complex language, then editing it, then actually writing it ourselves.

    Our ability to read DNA took a big step forward thanks to Walter Gilbert and Fred Sanger, who shared half of the 1980 Nobel Prize in Chemistry. Gilbert and Sanger did lots of work to understand the building blocks of DNA – the nucleotide alphabet of biology, if you like.

    The next game-changer was in 1983 when an American biochemist, Kary Mullis, developed something called the Polymerase Chain Reaction. Better known as PCR, it is a laboratory technique that’s used to make copies of particular pieces of DNA. Think of it as a photocopier for DNA.

    The technique lets scientists easily – and cheaply – create many millions of copies of DNA segments from very small original amounts – and that makes reading the DNA in a sample possible even if it is only there in tiny amounts.

    You will all have become familiar with PCR during the Covid pandemic, when it was used to make many copies of the viral genetic material to allow reliable diagnosis of a Covid infection. That was the test where you did a swab, popped it in a test tube and then sent it away in the post. It was particularly important early on, before we had home testing kits.    

    The invention of PCR also earned a share of the 1993 Nobel Prize in Chemistry – that’s DNA Nobel number 3.

    Fast forward 10 years to 2003 and the completion of the Human Genome Project. Researchers across the world spent some 13 years cataloguing the precise sequence of all the DNA in the cells of a human being. It was a huge effort and that first whole genome sequence of a human cost an estimated £2.5 billion.

    Thankfully – but also remarkably – sequencing technology has come on leaps and bounds over the past 20 years. Now, it is possible to sequence the same amount of DNA analysed by the Human Genome Project in a single day – and for just a few hundred pounds! We’ve even developed pocket-sized machines which are capable of reading DNA in real-time.

    In fact, I have 1 here: a portable sequencing device made by Oxford Nanopore. You simply add your sample into the middle here – this contains the sensor that will help to read the DNA sequence of your sample. Then simply close the lid and press go. And the results are delivered straight to your laptop via a USB-C cable which plugs into the end here.

    This is useful for situations where we can’t send off a sample for analysis and wait days for the results – if, say, we’re urgently trying to identify the cause of an infection in some far-flung corner of the world.

    So… we’ve learned to amplify DNA using PCR and we’ve learned to read DNA – fast – using rapid sequencing technologies.

    We’ve also started learning – and do emphasise “started” – to accurately and precisely “edit” DNA.

    Previously, when we wanted to do this, the methods were somewhat cruder – such as gene guns, which were used to literally fire DNA into cells.

    We now have tools like CRISPR-Cas9 (another Nobel prize-winning technology developed by Emmanuelle Charpentier and Jennifer Doudna), and we can now take a targeted portion of DNA and change it very accurately in specific places. Some people have compared CRISPR to using a pair of genetic scissors.

    Some of you might be wondering whether engineering biology is any different from another common term: synthetic biology. They are often applied interchangeably, although different countries interpret them in different ways.

    The way I see it, synthetic biology refers to tools like CRISPR, used to design and build new biological components. Engineering biology is taking these tools – with or without genetic modification – and using the DBTL cycle to apply these tools at scale to find solutions to problems in the world around us.

    There are still challenges with the accuracy of such tools, but the possibilities are vast.

    We know that certain diseases are caused by mutations in a single gene. Sickle cell disease, for example, is caused by mutations in the beta-globin gene, resulting in red blood cells which are misshapen. As a result, these red cells don’t flow around the body as well as they should. This can cause those affected – roughly 17,500 people in the UK – to suffer from anaemia as well as complications like terrible pain and organ damage.

    In the past, the only treatment was to rely on regular blood transfusions or a bone marrow transplant, neither of which comes without risks or complications. However, researchers have been using CRISPR to precisely edit the gene responsible for sickle cell with great success – so much so that, in January this year, the treatment was approved for use in the NHS as the world’s first gene-editing treatment for blood disorders.

    And this is just 1 of many gene-editing clinical trials going on right now, including treatments for liver disease, heart disease and some cancers.

    The possibilities are not confined to human diseases. We can use these genetic scissors to develop crops that are better at withstanding drought and more resistant to insects, so we don’t have to rely so much on pesticides.

    And it’s these tools that are being used to modify the bacteria designed for metal recycling that I spoke about at the start.

    Now, it would be remiss of me to talk about the tools of the future without mentioning AI and the transformative impacts it could have.

    A prime example is the challenge of understanding and predicting how proteins fold up intricately and precisely in all of our cells. Decoding this process is something scientists have been trying to achieve for decades.

    And in 2018, DeepMind came along with its AI model AlphaFold. AlphaFold has since been used to calculate the structure of hundreds of millions of proteins. And, yes, it earned the UK’s Demis Hassabis a share of last year’s Nobel prize in chemistry.

    Timeline starting with images of James Watson, Francis Crick, Maurice Wilkins and Rosalind Franklin above the year 1962. Images of Walter Gilbert and Frederick Sanger are next to the year 1980. Image of Kary Mullis is next to the year 1993. Images of Emmanuelle Charpentier and Jennifer Doudna are below the year 2020 and an image of Demis Hassabis is below the year 2024.

    All that’s missing on my timeline now is the capacity to design a new protein from scratch de novo. That will bring us into the realm of being able to write the language of biology – designing and printing a sequence of synthetic DNA to produce a protein with the properties that we want, from scratch.

    I’ve just been talking about how technologies such as AI, and tools such as CRISPR, are helping to broaden the range of biological powers at our disposal and increase our ability to design and optimise biological systems.

    And all this comes with valid concerns about risks. An example which springs to my mind was when scientists in Australia created a version of a mouse virus back in 2001 that instead of causing the normal mild symptoms, killed all of the mice within nine days. They were conducting some innocent genetic engineering research to try and make a mouse contraceptive vaccine for pest control and inadvertently found a way of creating a much more deadly version of the mousepox virus. Unsurprisingly, this made quite a splash in the media – although I think it was good that such a story was not buried.

    The point I want to make is that we must develop the right practices and regulation so that we ensure that research is carried out safely and responsibly but we do not stifle innovation.

    We refer to this as “responsible innovation” and it is 1 of the pillars of our government vision for engineering biology. That has given rise to new guidance on which genetic sequences people should be allowed to order for their research – welcome progress.

    Having the UK take a lead in this kind of responsible innovation – where we are thinking carefully about the desired benefits of our research as well as about how to avoid negative impacts – lets us manage the risks and harness the wealth of opportunities that engineering biology can offer.

    There are also other challenges to overcome. What’s standing in the way of us exploiting engineering biology for good? I won’t dwell for long on this, because you’re here to hear about science, not policy – but it is important to talk about the barriers.

    We’ve already spoken about proper regulation for engineering biology. We also need to have proper ways of funding the basic research that drives this wonderful new technology and also the application of that research that lets us solve real-world problems. Then there’s also the task of making more people aware of the potential for progress here.

    But a key area for me – and also a common issue across all areas of science and technology – is making sure we have the right skills in our future workforce to perform the future jobs that come with new technologies.

    The skill set for engineering biology is particularly broad: the field is a combination many different skill-sets and mindsets. Mostly we train people either to become biologists or to become engineers, and for this technology we need people who can think with both those mindsets. So we need to think about a pipeline which starts in schools, with children getting the right grounding in key subjects – and children also hearing about the exciting careers they can pursue through developing and using the technologies I’ve talked about.

    I think it’s vital that we don’t think exclusively about technical skills: communication skills are extremely important too. It’s a wonderful thing to do pioneering, cutting-edge research but we also need to be able to explain what that’s about and why people should want it.

    So far, I’ve told you a bit about what engineering biology is and how we’ve got to this point, poised for biological century. I’ve also talked a bit about risks and challenges, but I think it’s now time to delve further into the applications that I think are so inspiring.

    Today, I launched a report called “Engineering Biology Aspirations”. It’s our attempt to share our excitement about the possibilities that this technology opens up – and we want to share it with everyone, my colleagues inside government and also much more widely.

    It contains case studies, written by UK-based experts, that illustrate some of the diverse problems we can address using engineering biology. Microbial metal extraction is 1 of them. I want to highlight some others during the rest of this talk – and to recognise some of the amazing research taking place in the UK.

    One of the reasons that I commissioned the report is that all too often, when someone mentions engineering biology or synthetic biology, the examples will involve vaccines or medicines.

    Of course those are fantastic, important applications: with the Covid pandemic such a fresh memory, we are all acutely aware of the life-saving importance of rapid and effective vaccine production. And I’m in awe of those researchers who can edit the gene that causes sickle cell disease.

    But I want to make sure that we also shine a light on the true breadth of opportunities that engineering biology presents, not only in health, but across agriculture, materials, chemicals, energy, defence.

    So, let’s shift gear and think about the fashion industry. Unlike metal recycling, it’s a sector familiar to all of us. We all buy and wear clothes, but we don’t often stop to think about where they’ve come from, how they’ve been made, and at what cost to the environment.

    Putting aside issues around workforce conditions and waste, the fashion industry is 1 of the world’s largest polluters, responsible for up to 8 per cent of carbon emissions globally…

    Not to mention the pollution generated in the form of clothing and textiles dumped in landfills, like this 1 in Bangladesh, never to biodegrade.

    At the same time, 1/5 of the pollution of clean water around the world is caused by dyeing and treating textiles.

    And there’s also growing awareness of the environmental damage caused by the microfibres shed by polyester clothing.

    So it’s no surprise that plenty of researchers and companies here in the UK and beyond are seeking inspiration from biological processes to make new materials that don’t rely on fossil fuels or on animal products such as leather.

    You may have been wondering why there are bottled drinks and a handbag beside each other on the Faraday desk. Well, they’re made of essentially the same material.

    The process of making both items starts with microbes that naturally produce a material called nanocellulose.

    In the case of Mogu Mogu – a coconut water drink you might find in your local supermarket – the nanocellulose is responsible for the lumps of jelly you can see in this bowl. 

    It is a polymer produced through fermentation – the same process used to make beer.

    Now, 1 company I visited last year is called Modern Synthesis, based in South London and founded by Jen Keane and Ben Reeve. They’re aiming to develop scalable solutions to meet the fashion industry’s need for high-performing, versatile materials that don’t pollute the planet.

    Modern Synthesis make nanocellulose fibres and then combine them with textiles such as cotton or linen to create new composites. These are then finished with natural coatings like waxes and oils to improve performance and to enhance look and feel, which are of course critical to customers. The result is this handbag!

    Image of black, biologically derived material

    And on the slide behind me, you can see in more detail the fibres that make up the handbag. These miniscule nanocellulose fibres are actually really, really strong – 8 times stronger than stainless steel relative to weight!

    Modern Synthesis is just 1 example of a pioneering UK company making waves in this area. Another example is Solena Materials who are using AI to help design completely new materials from scratch, including fibres that are effective at absorbing energy. This makes them relevant for the military and the police, who need blast-, ballistic- and stab-proof clothing. As the ex-Chief Scientific Adviser for the Ministry of Defence, it’s great to see engineering biology applications offering benefits for defence.

    Developing new materials like these can significantly reduce greenhouse gas emissions compared to traditional material production. This includes minimising the environmental impacts of raising livestock for leather or the energy-intensive processes involved in creating synthetic textiles such as polyesters and nylons. Better still, these materials can be designed for biodegradability, getting away from the big problem of plastic pollution.

    Allow me to quote from our report for a second: “Imagine a world where every piece of your clothing has minimal cost to the environment, with zero waste going to landfills. Even if a piece of clothing is accidentally discarded into the environment, it safely biodegrades to leave no trace of its existence. This is the future of fashion, and engineering biology is helping to make it happen.”

    Let me move now to another pervasive problem: inefficiencies in food production. Most of you will be aware that fertilisers are used by farmers across the world to supply nitrogen to their crops. Without fertilisers, yields suffer.

    But there are 2 problems. First, the process for making nitrogen fertilisers is very energy-intensive. It’s responsible for between 1 and 2% of the entire world’s energy use – and generates matching CO2 emissions. Second, using fertilisers has considerable environmental impacts, releasing further greenhouse gas emissions and damaging waterways thanks to fertiliser runoff from fields.

    This slide shows excessive algae growth – a common impact of fertiliser runoff – in the River Wantsum in Kent.

    Currently, farmers across the world use more than 200 million tonnes of chemical fertilisers every year.

    Diagram showing molecules of nitrogen and hydrogen converted into molecules of ammonia, with a chemical equilibrium sign betweem ammonia and molecules of nitrogen that combine with molecules of hydrogen

    Now, this ability to produce nitrogen at scale – via the Haber-Bosch process – was without question the most important chemical breakthrough of the 20th century. The reaction that underpins this industrial process is shown behind me – converting nitrogen and hydrogen into ammonia, which is commonly used in fertilisers. It was discovered by Fritz Haber. Over half the global population depends for survival on foods fertilised using industrial production of nitrogen. But for the reasons I’ve outlined, we do need to do better.   

    So how can engineering biology help?

    What if we could engineer cereals crops to absorb their own nitrogen from the environment, without relying on fertilisers? We call that “fixing” nitrogen.

    There are actually examples of this happening in nature. There are bacteria in the soil called rhizobia which are particularly good at fixing nitrogen; in fact, they convert nitrogen gas from the atmosphere into ammonia – which is precisely the form of nitrogen that plants need. Legumes such as peas, clover and lupins attract these rhizobia bacteria to live in their roots – in small structures called nodules. In return for a steady supply of ammonia, the plant houses and feeds the bacteria, forming an ideal symbiotic relationship.

    Behind me is an illustration of a plant with root nodules… but in classic Blue Peter style, here are a couple I grew earlier!

    This clover plant from my lawn has nodules on its roots – but, because they are a bit tiny, I have also brought a photo of the same plant.

    For these sort of plants, we can already coat their seeds with rhizobia and achieve increases in yields. And we can even go a step further by adding the bacteria directly to fields in a process called soil inoculation.

    But the trouble with cereal crops like wheat, barley and maize is that they don’t have those root nodules and nor do they produce the special signalling chemicals that legumes use to attract bacteria.

    Image showing a clover plant with roots that have small circular nodules on them in the bottom left-hand corner and a sweet-corn plant with roots without nodules in the top right-hand corner

    Here is another plant that I’ve brought in from my garden. This 1 is sweet-corn, a variety of maize and a major cereal crop worldwide. You can see its roots here on the top part of the slide… no nodules! These kinds of crops do not set up this kind of symbiotic relationship with nitrogen-fixing bacteria.

    So what researchers, like Phil Poole at the University of Oxford, are doing is trying to engineer a new generation of fertiliser-free crops, drawing on plant genetics, biochemistry and soil ecology.

    One approach, given what I’ve just described, is to engineer cereals to form nodules on their roots that can host nitrogen-fixing bacteria.

    The UK is leading the way on this – Oxford and Cambridge universities have major programmes backed by investment from our research councils and from the Gates Foundation. In fact, the teams involved work together as part of a larger collaboration, and have recently made some significant advances, engineering barley to form nodule-like structures and engineering barley roots to release the chemical signal rhizopine that prompts rhizobia to start fixing nitrogen.

    The design-build-test-learn cycle I described earlier is a part of this research. All of the progress made so far has built on round after round of modifying, testing and redesigning organisms.

    There are still many hurdles to overcome, both from a technical perspective and societally; genetic modification of crops is a very sensitive issue. But the value of the prize here is large, and I think scientists should not be shy about describing it.

    Imagine a world where humanity’s main source of carbohydrates – cereal crops like wheat and barley – are able to generate their own nitrogen fertiliser.

    We could tackle global food shortages on a much more sustainable basis and at the same solve 1 of the most urgent climate challenges, consigning industrially-produced nitrogen to the past.

    Now, let’s just think about crops in a further context, because harvesting doesn’t have to be the end of their engineering biology journey!

    At the start of this talk, I name-dropped a couple of bacterial strains in relation to metal recycling. Well the biologist in me can’t help but tell you another 1 – this time being a type of bacteria called Halomonas.

    Researchers like Nigel Scrutton up at the University of Manchester, are engineering these bacteria to act as efficient factories for converting food waste into fuel via fermentation. When I say factories, I’m not talking about the massive industrial sites we would normally associate with fuel production.

    This photo is of Fawley oil refinery in Hampshire.

    Diagram showing drawings representing bacteria, food waste feedstock, a cylinder that produces fuel and container. The diagram shows that the result of feeding bacteria and food waste feedstock is fermentation that then produces fuel, which can be housed in a portable and scalable container

    By contrast, these fuel-producing bacteria can be housed in different-sized containers like the ones on this slide – some of them not too dissimilar to shipping containers.

    The beauty of this technology, therefore, is that it is inherently portable and scaleable to meet demand – with transformative implications for remote areas of the world where energy infrastructure can be scarce. And crucially, these are cleaner, fossil-free fuels that can be used to power homes, businesses, even aircraft.

    Let’s focus on that last application for a second. At the moment, the aviation industry relies almost completely on kerosene-based fuels, which account for a staggering 3% of global CO2 emissions.

    Burning fossil fuels is generally accepted as the main cause of global warming, so it is essential that we find ways to transition to sustainable sources of energy.

    Engineering biology solutions like Nigel’s can therefore play a significant role in creating a future without fossil fuels. One of the benefits of using bacteria to turn waste into useful fuels is that this can create another circular economy in which we no longer need to extract and burn more and more harmful fossil fuels; instead we recycle the carbon we already have.

    Personally, I think the environmental benefits are reason enough to get excited by this technology. But 1 of the great benefits of bacteria-fuel factories is how portable they are! In other words, they remove the need for large-scale bioreactor infrastructure.

    Imagine a world where clean fuels could be produced locally and on demand – including in all those remote and sparsely populated regions which currently struggle to access the fuels they require.

    Now, I argued just a moment ago that I want to convince people that engineering biology is about so much more than vaccines and medicines – and I hope that I’ve surprised at least some of you with the breadth of the examples I’ve described so far.

    But I do have 1 example from medicine that is just too fascinating to leave out, and that’s research into laboratory-grown blood.

    Why would we need such a product?

    Currently, the world relies almost entirely on human blood donations to treat disease and for emergency medicine. In many countries, including the UK, donation rates fluctuate, and shortages can happen. On top of that, donated blood has a limited shelf life. It is challenging to store and challenging to distribute. When you consider the fact that some countries don’t have the infrastructure to deliver blood products safely, or think about conflict or humanitarian emergencies, the problems associated with donated blood become even clearer.

    There are a few more issues too. It can be very difficult to source some rare blood types. And although blood services of course use screening to avoid known pathogens, there is always a risk of new ones arising, and being passed on to patients who receive blood transfusions.

    For all these reasons, finding new ways to produce blood would be another game changer, and, once more engineering biology can help us.

    Researchers, like Ash Toye at the University of Bristol, are exploring the possibility of banking unlimited supplies of red blood cells, either by transforming stem cells or genetically reprogramming donated precursor blood cells.

    What you can see on the screen is a beautiful illustration by artist Claudia Stocker, which provides a visualisation of CRISPR – the “genetic scissors” technology I mentioned earlier – being used here to edit the genetic material of the precursor cells that will go on to become red blood cells.

    The part of the image to focus on is the centre of the slide and specifically the spiral spools of DNA emanating from the big blue circle in the middle – the cell that will eventually give rise to the red blood cells around the outside of the slide. The little blue doughnuts represent the CRISPR technology in action, actively and precisely editing the DNA as we have instructed it to do.

    This editing can enable us to produce precursor cells that can grow and divide indefinitely in a controlled environment, giving us unlimited blood supplies.

    The Bristol team pioneering this research has been working closely with NHS Blood and Transplant and other partners in a ground-breaking clinical trial called RESTORERESTORE being the acronym for REcovery and survival of STem cell Originated REd cells.

    It’s the first time in the world that red blood cells grown in a laboratory have been given to another person as part of a trial into blood transfusion – you might have seen media coverage of this programme, which has attracted interest from all over the world. The trial should produce further results by the end of this year or early next.

    In the future, we could go a step further and use CRISPR to delete the genes responsible for blood groups, and – in doing so – create “universal” blood that would be invaluable in providing blood transfusions for individuals with rarer blood types.

    Image of a table containing the combinations of blood types of a donor and a recipient that match each other and ones that do not. The matches are highlighted in purple and the mismatches in red

    This slide is a brief reminder of the complexities around ensuring blood compatibility between donors and recipients. Only the combinations in purple are suitable.

    The prospects here are again tantalising. Imagine a world where no patient dies due to a lack of compatible blood following an accident or during surgery. Where safe blood is available on demand, can be stored for longer and is free of disease transmission risks.

    So there are all these amazing opportunities, which you can tell I love talking about!

    We’ve covered a fair bit of ground about engineering biology: not just historically but geographically, in universities and companies, and across a range of applications.

    I’m so proud that our country can lay claim to so much ingenuity. Microbial metal recycling from Edinburgh. Biosynthetic fuels from Manchester. Lab-grown blood from Bristol. Nitrogen-fixing cereals from Oxford.  And nanocellulose-based materials from right here in London.

    I want to end, though on a broader point concerning emerging technologies such as engineering biology and others besides.

    Earlier, you heard me talk about risks and challenges, including the need for responsible innovation.

    Another challenge – though – is about how we, as a society, talk about science and technology in general.

    Clearly, 1 of my aims this evening has been to raise awareness of engineering biology.

    But it strikes me that we’re living through a period where public engagement around science is getting harder.

    That’s not just because of the unprecedented volumes of misinformation circulating around us.

    We now live in a less paternalistic society – which is surely a good thing – it is no longer enough for scientists to tell people what’s good for them and expect them to toe the line. Instead, we know we need to have a proper, well-informed debate about these issues.

    Clearly, it would be possible for the promise of engineering biology to be compromised by public opposition. We need to listen to public concerns – really listen! – and understand that if we don’t respond to those concerns people will be perfectly within their rights to not support, or actively block, the engineering biology advances that we’re trying to create.

    There is a lot of work to do here. I don’t think we can ever be finished listening to the public.

    Essentially, the technologies we’re developing in engineering biology need to offer solutions to problems that people actually care about.

    Health, nutrition, climate, the environment, sustainability, global equity. I know that these are problems that billions of people care about.

    I hope I’ve persuaded you that when it comes to these problems, engineering biology can provide solutions.

    Image of the front cover of the ‘Engineering Biology Aspirations’ report on the left-hand side and a QR code to the webpage with the report on the right-hand side

    Thank you for listening – do read our report; here it is – and thank you to the Royal Institution for asking me to speak in this 200th anniversary year for discourses.

    Updates to this page

    Published 2 May 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Economics: Richard Doornbosch: Sustainable tourism development in Curaçao – a balanced approach

    Source: Bank for International Settlements

    Presentation accompanying the speech 

    Introduction

    Good morning, ladies and gentlemen. It is a pleasure to speak to you at today’s CHATA Membership Meeting on a topic that is crucial to the future of our beautiful island: tourism development in Curaçao. This future encompasses not only the economic prospects of our country, but also our social well-being and environmental sustainability.

    In recent years, particularly following the COVID-19 pandemic, Curaçao has witnessed remarkable growth in its tourism sector. The island has successfully strengthened its appeal in both stay-over and cruise tourism. Today, tourist arrivals are at record highs, and the sector has firmly established itself as the leading driver of economic growth in Curaçao. According to estimates by the CBCS, tourism now contributes more than 23% to Curaçao’s GDP, representing approximately Cg. 1.4 billion. This figure includes also positive spillover effects to other sectors of the economy, such as transportation, real estate, and construction. This growth is particularly striking given that, until the mid-2000s, tourism accounted for only around 8% of GDP.

    Additionally, foreign exchange earnings from travel now represent approximately 50% of Curaçao’s total foreign exchange earnings from the export of goods and services. This excludes foreign exchange revenues from tourism-related sectors such as the transportation and rental services. Moreover, the tourism sector provides a significant number of both direct and indirect jobs for the people of Curaçao.


    With several ongoing and planned private investments, particularly in accommodation, the island’s capacity to host more visitors is expected to increase substantially in the coming years. However, the key question is how we can manage this growth while minimizing potential social and environmental costs. Today, I would like to outline an approach to achieving sustainable tourism development. Without such an approach, we risk locking ourselves into a mass tourism model with high long-term costs – costs that could take decades to reverse.

    Growth seen from a different perspective


    Before delving into this approach, allow me to provide a comparison of stay-over and cruise tourism development in Curaçao relative to Aruba and Sint Maarten. Since the 1980s, Aruba and Sint Maarten have experienced more rapid tourism growth than Curaçao. As a result, Curaçao lags behind both destinations in terms of tourism maturity. Aruba, with its well-established brand, consistently attracts high volumes of American tourists. Meanwhile, Sint Maarten continues to demonstrate resilience and adaptability despite facing natural setbacks. However, over the past 15 years, Curaçao has been narrowing the performance gap with its regional peers. Since 2016, it has even surpassed Sint Maarten in terms of stay-over visitor numbers. Aruba, however, still receives higher volumes of stay-over tourists than Curaçao.

    As for cruise tourism, up until the pandemic in 2020, Sint Maarten consistently outperformed both Curaçao and Aruba. In contrast, cruise tourism trends in the latter two countries have generally moved in tandem and on a comparable scale.


    Now, let us assess tourism development in the three countries from a different perspective by focusing on the visitor-to-resident ratio. This ratio is defined as the number of visitors, both stay-over and cruise together, divided by the total population. It may serve as an indicator of the pressure exerted on the environmental and social resources of a destination and its population.

    Although a cross-country comparison of the visitor-to-resident ratio should be interpreted with caution due to country-specific idiosyncrasies such as variations in tourism infrastructure and environmental considerations, this graph shows that the visitor-to-resident ratio in Sint Maarten has consistently remained higher than those of Aruba and Curaçao’s. In 2023, for example, Sint Maarten welcomed approximately 41 visitors for every resident. This ratio was 19 for Aruba and 8 for Curaçao. This disparity is related to Sint Maarten’s significantly larger cruise tourism sector. In fact, Curaçaos visitor-to-resident ratio consistently ranks the lowest among the three countries, indicating a younger stage of tourism maturity.


    Given the rapid growth in tourism that Curaçao has experienced over the past years, let us perform a back-of-the envelope calculation to project the potential development of our visitor-to-resident ratio. Assuming the total number of visitors increases by 8% annually over the next five years, while our population grows by an average of 0.1% per year, which aligns with the average population growth observed over the past decade, all other factors remaining equal, the visitor-to-resident ratio would reach 16 by 2030. The assumed 8% annual increase in the total number of visitors is based on the forecast for 2025 and 2026 outlined in Curaçao’s Strategic Tourism Destination Development Plan. As illustrated in the graph, the calculation suggests that the potential pressure on environmental and social resources could double compared to what we are experiencing at this moment.

    The Double-Edged Nature of Tourism Growth


    While tourism expansion undoubtedly presents significant opportunities in terms of value added, employment, and foreign exchange earnings, it also carries hidden costs and risks, that, if ignored, could threaten Curaçao’s long-term economic stability and quality of life.

    Rapid and uncontrolled tourism growth can impose substantial social costs. Uncontrolled expansion often leads to overcrowding, especially in peak seasons. For instance, the inner-city areas of Punda and Otrobanda become particularly congested on days when the harbor is filled with cruise ships. Beaches also become overcrowded with visitors, which not only affects residents’ quality of life but also diminishes visitors’ experience.

    In addition, a significant rise in tourist arrivals can lead to an increased cost of living. Currently, various construction projects of new hotels and residential buildings intended for Airbnb or tourist rentals are underway. As a result, housing prices have risen significantly over the last few years, making it difficult for locals to find affordable housing and thereby reducing their quality of life.

    Moreover, intensified tourism activity can escalate environmental degradation through increased pollution and loss of biodiversity, potentially diminishing the overall visitor experience in the long run. Curaçao’s unique ecosystems, coral reefs, and pristine beaches -its main attractions- are vulnerable assets that require vigilant stewardship to ensure they are not adversely affected by large scale tourism.

    Strong tourism growth can also put severe pressure on Curaçao’s public infrastructure. Already, increased road congestion is observable, particularly on the Caracasbaaiweg, a situation that will likely worsen with more stay-over arrivals. In addition, more visitors pose challenges for the provision of public goods such as sanitation and waste management, as well as utilities such as electricity production. Furthermore, capacity constraints at Curaçao International Airport could emerge as a bottleneck, limiting potential growth and reducing the overall attractiveness of Curaçao as a travel destination.

    People, profit and planet as principles for sustainable tourism development

    Recognizing both the opportunities and potential costs of tourism development, Curaçao stands at a pivotal crossroads. Instead of focusing on a mass tourism model, we must embrace a balanced approach to ensure that tourism contributes sustainably to our economic prosperity, environmental stewardship, and social well-being.

    Central to this strategy must be the clear identification of the type of tourists Curaçao seeks to attract. Sustainable tourism development should aim to welcome travelers who provide higher economic returns while imposing fewer social and environmental burdens. Attracting high-yield, low-impact visitors – those interested in immersive cultural experiences, culinary excellence, sustainable adventure tourism, or niche markets such as eco-tourism – will ensure more robust economic benefits for Curaçao. The focus should not be on volume but on value.


    The following graph compares the Average Daily Rate (ADR) of Curaçao with those of other Caribbean countries in 2023. ADR is a key performance indicator that reflects the average revenue earned per occupied room over a specific period. The fact that Curaçao ranks at the lower end of the selected Caribbean countries, with an ADR of USD224.67, implies that there is potential to increase the value that we derive from our tourism product.


    A robust and holistic framework for sustainable tourism development should be encapsulated by the “People, Profit, Planet” principle, emphasizing the balanced and interconnected approach needed for sustainable development.


    Let us first start with the first principle, ‘People’. Tourism must benefit the local population of Curaçao, enhancing their quality of life and providing ample opportunities for participation and growth. Equitable benefit-sharing through employment opportunities, training programs, and empowerment initiatives, including entrepreneurial skills, ensures that the community remains central to tourism development. In addition, actively engaging residents in decision-making processes helps ensure that tourism development aligns with local values and cultural heritage.

    The second principle is ‘Profit’, which focuses on economic sustainability. Curaçao’s tourism industry must continuously strive for economic viability, ensuring profitability for businesses, employment opportunities for locals, and tax revenues for the government. Emphasizing quality tourism experiences over quantity will encourage higher spending, extended visitor stays, and repeated visits, thus increasing overall economic sustainability.

    The final principle, ‘Planet’, emphasizes the critical importance of protecting Curaçao’s natural environment. Sustainable tourism development must prioritize minimizing ecological footprints through responsible practices, such as reduced waste generation, energy and water conservation, and biodiversity protection. Sustainable management of our natural resources should safeguard the unique beauty and biodiversity of Curaçao for future generations and maintain the island’s long-term attractiveness as a tourism destination.

    By harmonizing these three principles – People, Profit, and Planet – Curaçao can ensure a resilient and sustainable tourism sector that benefits all stakeholders equitably while safeguarding the island’s natural and cultural heritage.

    Understanding Tourism Carrying Capacity: Four Key Dimensions


    Assessing and respecting the tourism carrying capacity should also be an integral component of the sustainable tourism development framework. The United Nations World Tourism Organization (UNWTO) defines tourism carrying capacity as “the maximum number of people that may visit a tourist destination at the same time, without causing destruction of the physical, economic and sociocultural environment and an unacceptable decrease in the quality of visitors’ satisfaction”. Carrying capacity is a multi-dimensional concept and must be understood across four dimensions.

    The first dimension, economic carrying capacity, considers the ability of the economy to absorb and benefit from tourism without generating inflation, wage disparities, or unsustainable price increases in housing and basic goods. It evaluates whether tourism revenues are widely distributed or concentrated among a few sectors, and whether the benefits outweigh the potential displacement of local industries.

    The second dimension is the environmental carrying capacity. This dimension addresses the physical limits of Curaçao’s ecosystems to accommodate tourism. It focuses on the impact of tourism on coral reefs, beaches, water resources, waste generation, and biodiversity. Monitoring visitor volumes in environmentally sensitive areas and applying zoning, restoration, and eco-certification measures are key to staying within safe environmental limits.

    Meanwhile, the social carrying capacity reflects the ability of local communities to absorb tourism development without experiencing a decline in social cohesion, cultural integrity, or quality of life. It includes public attitudes toward tourism, perceived fairness in benefit-sharing, and tolerance for changes to local customs, space, and lifestyles.

    And finally, the fourth dimension, governance, plays a critical role in managing tourism sustainably. It includes the capacity of public institutions to plan, regulate, and monitor tourism development effectively. It also involves legal frameworks, inter-agency coordination, stakeholder engagement, data collection systems, and transparency mechanisms that ensure tourism growth aligns with public policy goals.

    By assessing and managing tourism within these four dimensions, Curaçao can avoid the risks of over-tourism and ensure that the island remains a vibrant, welcoming, and sustainable destination. In this regard, it is a positive development that Curaçao is proactively conducting a Destination Carrying Capacity Study to evaluate the economic, environmental and social impacts of strong tourism development.

    The next step in this approach would be to identify a long-term vision focused on quality, authenticity and environmental responsibility. This vision should be commonly shared by all key tourism stakeholders. Next, growth scenarios should be defined that set clear targets for, among other things, tourist arrivals, employment and reductions in ecological footprints – aligned with the island’s carrying capacity. In addition, the necessary investments in areas such as infrastructure, human capital and green innovation should be identified, along with relevant policy reforms, to strengthen the island’s carrying capacity and achieve the outlined long-term vision. Ultimately, all initiatives must align with the principles of People, Profit, and Planet to ensure economic viability, social inclusivity, and ecological integrity.

    Social cost-benefit analysis to effectively manage sustainable tourism development

    To effectively manage sustainable tourism development and prioritize tourism projects, the framework should include rigorous social cost-benefit analyses, particularly in the case of major tourism investment projects and public tourism-related infrastructure projects. These analyses extend beyond traditional economic evaluation and incorporate broader social and environmental dimensions that are critical for informed decision-making.

    Social cost-benefit analyses for tourism projects not only assess the direct economic contribution in terms of employment and tax revenues, but also the social impact of such projects, including their effect on community well-being, housing affordability, public infrastructure pressures and local quality of life in general. Also, these analyses assess the environmental impact of tourism projects such as ecological footprints, resource depletion and pollution levels.

    One benefit of conducting social cost-benefit analyses is that they enable policymakers and stakeholders to explicitly evaluate both the positive and negative impacts of tourism development projects with a focus on society as a whole rather than only short-term financial gains. In addition, these analyses allow for the prioritization of tourism projects that provide genuine, sustainable benefits while minimizing negative externalities.

    Conducing social cost-benefit analyses is a complex, multi-dimensional exercise that demands technical expertise across several areas and extensive data. It is important that Curacao develops its own expertise in this area and focuses on having up to date economic, tourism, social and environmental data. This also requires cooperation and collaboration between public and private stakeholders.

    Conclusion


    Ladies and gentlemen, Curaçao has been experiencing robust growth in its tourism industry, becoming the main pillar of our economy. While this growth brings immediate economic benefits, it is crucial that we also focus on long-term development strategies that encompass economic progress, social well-being and environmental sustainability. By acknowledging and addressing the potential costs associated with tourism development we can implement measures to mitigate these challenges effectively.

    Today, I have outlined a balanced approach for sustainable tourism development centered around the principles of people, profit, and planet. In this regard, it is crucial that Curaçao continues advancing the initiatives outlined in its Strategic Tourism Development Destination Plan while also developing a comprehensive long-term strategy for sustainable tourism development that incorporates the concept of carrying capacity. Through a participatory process we must define acceptable levels of the economic, social and environmental impact of tourism on Curacao. Curacao is a unique tourist destination with potential to contribute even more significantly to Curacao’s economy. However, it is crucial that we also prioritize sustainability by steering away from mass tourism and focusing more on value rather than on volume. Sustainable tourism development can serve as a catalyst for economic prosperity, and social wellbeing while ensuring environmental preservation. By embracing this balanced approach, we can secure a thriving future for Curaçao that honors our heritage while safeguarding our natural resources for the generations to come.


    Thank you for your time and attention.

    MIL OSI Economics

  • MIL-OSI USA: President Trump Finally Ends the Madness of NPR, PBS

    US Senate News:

    Source: The White House
    Last night, President Donald J. Trump signed an executive order ending the taxpayer subsidization of National Public Radio (NPR) and the Public Broadcasting Service (PBS) — entities that receive tens of millions of dollars in taxpayer funds each year to spread radical, woke propaganda disguised as “news.”
    Here are some examples of the trash that has passed for “news” at NPR and PBS:
    NPR ran a story titled “Cannibalism: It’s ‘Perfectly Natural,’” in which an author described eating another human’s placenta: “It was really the prep that made it taste good. Granted, the [husband] was a chef and so he knew how to prepare it osso bucco style and used a really nice wine I had brought. It smelled great. It didn’t taste bad.”
    In 2021, NPR declared the Declaration of Independence to be a document with “flaws and deeply ingrained hypocrisies.”
    In 2022, NPR scrapped its decades-long Independence Day tradition of reading the Declaration of Independence on air to instead discuss “equality.”
    NPR subsequently issued an “editor’s note” warning the Declaration of Independence is “a document that contains offensive language.”

    NPR apologized for calling illegal immigrants “illegal.”
    NPR sounded the alarm about young men who abstain from masturbating to pornography.
    NPR featured a Valentine’s Day story centered around “queer animals,” in which it suggested the make-believe clownfish in “Finding Nemo” would’ve been better off as a female, that “banana slugs are hermaphrodites,” and that “some deer are nonbinary.”
    PBS devoted a panel to what it “mean[s] to be woke” and “white privilege.”
    NPR routinely promotes the chemical and surgical mutilation of children as so-called “gender-affirming care” without mentioning the irreversible damage caused by these procedures.
    In 2021, a PBS station aired a “children’s program” that featured a drag queen named “Lil’ Miss Hot Mess.”
    NPR educated the nation on the “whole community of genderqueer dinosaur enthusiasts” and “trans-ceratops.”
    Then-PBS White House Correspondent Yamiche Alcindor characterized President Trump’s patriotic 2020 Mount Rushmore speech as a love letter to “white resentment” that promoted the “myth of America.”
    NPR reported on the “cousin of diet culture” known as “healthism, which is the idea that we have to be healthy” — as if that was a bad thing.
    NPR assigned three reporters to investigate how the thumbs-up emoji is racist.
    NPR suggested doorway sizes are based on “latent fatphobia.”
    PBS produced an entire movie celebrating a transgender teenager’s so-called “changing gender identity.”
    NPR absurdly claimed “limited scientific evidence of physical advantage” exists between male and female athletes.
    NPR lamented that “animals deserve pronouns, too.”
    NPR ran a feature titled “What ‘Queer Ducks’ can teach teenagers about sexuality in the animal kingdom.”
    In 2023, PBS’s Washington Week roundtable covered up Joe Biden’s clear mental decline, with far-left “journalist” Jeffrey Goldberg claiming Biden was actually “quite acute.”
    NPR dedicated an entire segment to the “population of anthropomorphic animal enthusiasts known as ‘furries.’”
    PBS produced a documentary making the case for reparations.
    NPR disparagingly referred to pro-life Americans at the March for Life as “anti-abortion rights activists.”
    NPR explored “the racial origins of fat phobia.”
    NPR management asked its editors to avoid the term “biological sex” when discussing transgender issues.
    PBS show Sesame Street partnered with CNN on a one-sided narrative to “address racism” amid the Black Lives Matter riots.
    NPR and PBS have zero tolerance for non-leftist viewpoints:
    In 2020, NPR refused to cover the explosive Hunter Biden laptop scandal in the runup to the election, baselessly claiming its “assertions don’t amount to much” and writing they “don’t want to waste the listeners’ and readers’ time on stories that are just pure distractions.”
    When a 25-year veteran NPR reporter and editor spoke out about the network’s obsession with liberal causes, they suspended him.
    The editor found that registered Democrats outnumbered Republicans 87 to zero in their newsroom.
    NPR prolifically reported on the Russian collusion hoax, with the editor describing “[Adam] Schiff talking points” as “the drumbeat of NPR news reports.”

    NPR CEO Katherine Maher once called President Trump “racist,” shared a photo of herself wearing a “Biden for President” campaign hat, serves on the board of a Soros-funded activist group, and described “reverence for the truth” as a “distraction.”
    In 2023, a study found that congressional Republicans saw 85% negative coverage while congressional Democrats saw 54% positive coverage on PBS’s flagship news program.
    According to a 2024 study, PBS news staff used 162 variations of the term “far-right,” but only six variations of “far-left.”
    Media bias rating agency AllBias — which surveyed nearly 24,000 readers — found NPR’s bias aligns with “liberal, progressive or left-wing thought and/or policy agendas.”
    NPR repeatedly dismissed the theory that COVID-19 originated in a lab — a conclusion now deemed likely by the FBI, CIA, and Department of Energy.
    April 2020: “Scientists Debunk Lab Accident Theory Of Pandemic Emergence”
    May 2020: “As Trump Pushes Theory Of Virus Origins, Some See Parallels In Lead-Up To Iraq War”
    May 2021: “Many Scientists Still Think The Coronavirus Came From Nature”
    March 2023: “Virologist says COVID origin report could make it harder to study dangerous diseases”
    September 2024: “New research points to raccoon dogs in Wuhan market as pandemic trigger. It’s controversial”

    A 2024 Media Research Center study found that PBS’s coverage of the Republican National Convention was 72% negative, while coverage of the Democratic National Convention was 88% positive.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI: Brookfield Business Partners Reports First Quarter 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    BROOKFIELD, News, May 02, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Brookfield Business Partners (NYSE: BBU, BBUC; TSX: BBU.UN, BBUC) announced today financial results for the quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    “We had an active start to the year, generating over $1.5 billion from our capital recycling initiatives, progressing the acquisition of two market-leading industrial operations and investing approximately $140 million to repurchase our units and shares,” said Anuj Ranjan, CEO of Brookfield Business Partners. “During periods of uncertainty and volatility, our consistent strategy of owning market leading businesses and executing on our operational improvement plans is more important than ever. With the enhanced strength of our balance sheet, we are well positioned to support our capital allocation priorities and continue compounding long-term value for our investors.”

      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions (except per unit amounts), unaudited   2025   2024  
    Net income (loss) attributable to Unitholders1 $ 80 $ 48  
    Net income (loss) per limited partnership unit2 $ 0.38 $ 0.23  
         
    Adjusted EBITDA3 $ 591 $ 544  

    Net income attributable to Unitholders for the three months ended March 31, 2025 was $80 million ($0.38 per limited partnership unit) compared to net income of $48 million ($0.23 per limited partnership unit) in the prior period.

    Adjusted EBITDA for the three months ended March 31, 2025 was $591 million compared to $544 million in the prior period. Current period results included contribution from the recent acquisition of our electric heat tracing systems manufacturer in January 2025. Prior period results included $37 million of contribution from disposed operations including our offshore oil services’ shuttle tanker operation which was sold in January 2025.

    Operational Update

    The following table presents Adjusted EBITDA by segment:

      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions, unaudited   2025     2024  
    Industrials $ 304   $ 228  
    Business Services   213     205  
    Infrastructure Services   104     143  
    Corporate and Other   (30 )   (32 )
    Adjusted EBITDA $ 591   $ 544  

    Our Industrials segment generated Adjusted EBITDA of $304 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to $228 million during the same period in 2024. Current period results included $72 million of tax benefits at our advanced energy storage operation and contribution from our electric heat tracing manufacturer which was acquired in January 2025.

    Our Business Services segment generated Adjusted EBITDA of $213 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to $205 million during the same period in 2024. Strong performance at our residential mortgage insurer and increased contribution from our construction operation was partially offset by the impact of higher costs associated with technology upgrades at dealer software and technology services. Prior period results included contribution from our road fuels operation which was sold in July 2024.

    Our Infrastructure Services segment generated Adjusted EBITDA of $104 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to $143 million during the same period in 2024. Prior period results included contribution from our offshore oil services’ shuttle tanker operation which was sold in January 2025.

    The following table presents Adjusted EFO4 by segment:

      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions, unaudited   2025     2024  
    Adjusted EFO    
    Industrials $ 130   $ 180  
    Business Services   117     168  
    Infrastructure Services   166     72  
    Corporate and Other   (68 )   (89 )

    Adjusted EFO in the current period included a $114 million of net gain related to the disposition of the shuttle tanker operation at our offshore oil services. Industrials Adjusted EFO included the impact of withholding taxes on a distribution received from our advanced energy storage operation during the quarter. Adjusted EFO in the prior period included $62 million of net gains primarily related to the sale of public securities and $50 million of other income related to a distribution at our entertainment operation.

    Strategic Initiatives

    • Specialty Equipment Manufacturer
      In February, we agreed to acquire Antylia Scientific, a leading manufacturer and distributor of critical consumables and testing equipment serving life sciences and environmental labs for approximately $1.3 billion. Brookfield Business Partners expects to invest approximately $160 million for an approximate 25% economic interest. The transaction is expected to close in the second quarter, subject to customary closing conditions and regulatory approvals.
    • Unit Repurchase Program
      During the quarter and subsequent to quarter end, we invested approximately $140 million to repurchase 5.9 million5 units and shares of Brookfield Business Partners at an average price of approximately $24 per unit and share. The repurchases were completed under our normal course issuer bid (NCIB) which we plan to renew once it expires in August this year.

    Liquidity

    We ended the quarter with approximately $2.4 billion of liquidity at the corporate level including $59 million of cash and liquid securities, $25 million of remaining preferred equity commitment from Brookfield Corporation and approximately $2.3 billion of availability on our corporate credit facilities. Pro forma for announced and recently closed transactions, corporate liquidity is $2.3 billion.

    Distribution

    The Board of Directors has declared a quarterly distribution in the amount of $0.0625 per unit, payable on June 30, 2025 to unitholders of record as at the close of business on May 30, 2025.

    Additional Information

    The Board has reviewed and approved this news release, including the summarized unaudited interim consolidated financial statements contained herein.

    Brookfield Business Partners’ Letter to Unitholders and the Supplemental Information are available on our website https://bbu.brookfield.com under Reports & Filings.

    Notes:

    1. Attributable to limited partnership unitholders, general partnership unitholders, redemption-exchange unitholders, special limited partnership unitholders and BBUC exchangeable shareholders.
    2. Net income (loss) per limited partnership unit calculated as net income (loss) attributable to limited partners divided by the average number of limited partnership units outstanding for the three months ended March 31, 2025 which was 80.0 million (March 31, 2024: 74.3 million).
    3. Adjusted EBITDA is a non-IFRS measure of operating performance presented as net income and equity accounted income at the partnership’s economic ownership interest in consolidated subsidiaries and equity accounted investments, respectively, excluding the impact of interest income (expense), net, income taxes, depreciation and amortization expense, gains (losses) on acquisitions/dispositions, net, transaction costs, restructuring charges, revaluation gains or losses, impairment expenses or reversals, other income or expenses, and preferred equity distributions. The partnership’s economic ownership interest in consolidated subsidiaries and equity accounted investments excludes amounts attributable to non-controlling interests consistent with how the partnership determines net income attributable to non-controlling interests in its unaudited interim condensed consolidated statements of operating results. The partnership believes that Adjusted EBITDA provides a comprehensive understanding of the ability of its businesses to generate recurring earnings which allows users to better understand and evaluate the underlying financial performance of the partnership’s operations and excludes items that the partnership believes do not directly relate to revenue earning activities and are not normal, recurring items necessary for business operations. Please refer to the reconciliation of net income (loss) to Adjusted EBITDA included in this news release.
    4. Adjusted EFO is the partnership’s segment measure of profit or loss and is presented as net income and equity accounted income at the partnership’s economic ownership interest in consolidated subsidiaries and equity accounted investments, respectively, excluding the impact of depreciation and amortization expense, deferred income taxes, transaction costs, restructuring charges, unrealized revaluation gains or losses, impairment expenses or reversals and other income or expense items that are not directly related to revenue generating activities. The partnership’s economic ownership interest in consolidated subsidiaries excludes amounts attributable to non-controlling interests consistent with how the partnership determines net income attributable to non-controlling interests in its unaudited interim condensed consolidated statements of operating results. In order to provide additional insight regarding the partnership’s operating performance over the lifecycle of an investment, Adjusted EFO includes the impact of preferred equity distributions and realized disposition gains or losses recorded in net income, other comprehensive income, or directly in equity, such as ownership changes. Adjusted EFO does not include legal and other provisions that may occur from time to time in the partnership’s operations and that are one-time or non-recurring and not directly tied to the partnership’s operations, such as those for litigation or contingencies. Adjusted EFO includes expected credit losses and bad debt allowances recorded in the normal course of the partnership’s operations. Adjusted EFO allows the partnership to evaluate its segments on the basis of return on invested capital generated by its operations and allows the partnership to evaluate the performance of its segments on a levered basis.
    5. Inclusive of all limited partnership units and BBUC exchangeable shares repurchased under our NCIB during the three months ended March 31, 2025 and up to market close on May 1, 2025, based on settlement date.

    Brookfield Business Partners is a global business services and industrials company focused on owning and operating high-quality businesses that provide essential products and services and benefit from a strong competitive position. Investors have flexibility to invest in our company either through Brookfield Business Partners L.P. (NYSE: BBU; TSX: BBU.UN), a limited partnership or Brookfield Business Corporation (NYSE, TSX: BBUC), a corporation. For more information, please visit https://bbu.brookfield.com.

    Brookfield Business Partners is the flagship listed vehicle of Brookfield Asset Management’s Private Equity Group. Brookfield Asset Management is a leading global alternative asset manager with over $1 trillion of assets under management.

    Please note that Brookfield Business Partners’ previous audited annual and unaudited quarterly reports have been filed on SEDAR+ and EDGAR, and are available at https://bbu.brookfield.com under Reports & Filings. Hard copies of the annual and quarterly reports can be obtained free of charge upon request.

    For more information, please contact:

    Media:
    Marie Fuller
    Tel: +44 207 408 8375
    Email: marie.fuller@brookfield.com
    Investors:
    Alan Fleming
    Tel: +1 (416) 645-2736
    Email: alan.fleming@brookfield.com
       

    Conference Call and Quarterly Earnings Webcast Details

    Investors, analysts and other interested parties can access Brookfield Business Partners’ first quarter 2025 results as well as the Letter to Unitholders and Supplemental Information on our website https://bbu.brookfield.com under Reports & Filings.

    The results call can be accessed via webcast on May 2, 2025 at 10:00 a.m. Eastern Time at BBU2025Q1Webcast or participants can preregister at BBU2025Q1ConferenceCall. Upon registering, participants will be emailed a dial-in number and unique PIN. A replay of the webcast will be available at https://bbu.brookfield.com.

                               
    Brookfield Business Partners L.P.
    Consolidated Statements of Financial Position
     
      As at
    US$ millions, unaudited March 31, 2025   December 31, 2024
               
    Assets          
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 3,442       $ 3,239  
    Financial assets     11,642         12,371  
    Accounts and other receivable, net     6,948         6,279  
    Inventory and other assets     5,063         5,728  
    Property, plant and equipment     12,529         13,232  
    Deferred income tax assets     1,767         1,744  
    Intangible assets     19,157         18,317  
    Equity accounted investments     2,307         2,325  
    Goodwill     13,032         12,239  
    Total Assets   $ 75,887       $ 75,474  
               
    Liabilities and Equity          
    Liabilities          
    Corporate borrowings   $ 1,017       $ 2,142  
    Accounts payable and other     15,085         16,691  
    Non-recourse borrowings in subsidiaries of the partnership     42,316         36,720  
    Deferred income tax liabilities     2,614         2,613  
               
    Equity          
    Limited partners $ 2,158       $ 1,752    
    Non-controlling interests attributable to:          
    Redemption-exchange units   1,246         1,644    
    Special limited partner              
    BBUC exchangeable shares   1,732         1,721    
    Preferred securities   740         740    
    Interest of others in operating subsidiaries   8,979         11,451    
          14,855         17,308  
    Total Liabilities and Equity   $ 75,887       $ 75,474  
                 
    Brookfield Business Partners L.P.
    Consolidated Statements of Operating Results
     
      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions, unaudited   2025     2024  
         
    Revenues $ 6,749   $ 12,015  
    Direct operating costs   (5,402 )   (10,878 )
    General and administrative expenses   (311 )   (317 )
    Interest income (expense), net   (770 )   (796 )
    Equity accounted income (loss)   (8 )   23  
    Impairment reversal (expense), net       10  
    Gain (loss) on acquisitions/dispositions, net   214     15  
    Other income (expense), net   (83 )   116  
    Income (loss) before income tax   389     188  
    Income tax (expense) recovery    
    Current   (197 )   (90 )
    Deferred   64     105  
    Net income (loss) $ 256   $ 203  
    Attributable to:    
    Limited partners $ 30   $ 17  
    Non-controlling interests attributable to:    
    Redemption-exchange units   23     15  
    Special limited partner        
    BBUC exchangeable shares   27     16  
    Preferred securities   13     13  
    Interest of others in operating subsidiaries   163     142  
         
    Brookfield Business Partners L.P.
    Reconciliation of Non-IFRS Measure
         
        Three Months Ended March 31, 2025
    US$ millions, unaudited   Business
    Services
      Infrastructure
    Services
      Industrials   Corporate
    and Other
      Total
                         
    Net income (loss)   $     $ 156     $ 145     $ (45 )   $ 256  
                         
    Add or subtract the following:                    
    Depreciation and amortization expense     222       165       343             730  
    Gain (loss) on acquisitions/dispositions, net           (214 )                 (214 )
    Other income (expense), net1     68       (79 )     93       1       83  
    Income tax (expense) recovery     18       25       101       (11 )     133  
    Equity accounted income (loss)     (3 )     26       (15 )           8  
    Interest income (expense), net     230       149       366       25       770  
    Equity accounted Adjusted EBITDA2     24       33       15             72  
    Amounts attributable to non-controlling interests3     (346 )     (157 )     (744 )           (1,247 )
    Adjusted EBITDA   $ 213     $ 104     $ 304     $ (30 )   $ 591  


    Notes:

    1. Other income (expense), net corresponds to amounts that are not directly related to revenue earning activities and are not normal, recurring income or expenses necessary for business operations. The components of other income (expense), net include $125 million of gains recorded at our offshore oil services due to vessel upgrades and unrealized gains recorded on reclassification of property, plant and equipment to finance leases, $78 million of business separation expenses, stand-up costs and restructuring charges, $50 million of net revaluation losses, $35 million of transaction costs and $45 million of other expenses.
    2. Equity accounted Adjusted EBITDA corresponds to the Adjusted EBITDA attributable to the partnership that is generated by its investments in associates and joint ventures accounted for using the equity method.
    3. Amounts attributable to non-controlling interests are calculated based on the economic ownership interests held by the non-controlling interests in consolidated subsidiaries.
         
    Brookfield Business Partners L.P.
    Reconciliation of Non-IFRS Measure
         
        Three Months Ended March 31, 2024
    US$ millions, unaudited   Business
    Services
      Infrastructure
    Services
      Industrials   Corporate
    and Other
      Total
                         
    Net income (loss)   $ 240     $ (65 )   $ 98     $ (70 )   $ 203  
                         
    Add back or deduct the following:                    
    Depreciation and amortization expense     254       212       342             808  
    Impairment reversal (expense), net     (4 )     (12 )     6             (10 )
    Gain (loss) on acquisitions/dispositions, net     (15 )                       (15 )
    Other income (expense), net1     (140 )     (18 )     32       10       (116 )
    Income tax expense (recovery)     24       (3 )     (27 )     (9 )     (15 )
    Equity accounted income (loss)     (1 )     (4 )     (18 )           (23 )
    Interest income (expense), net     252       180       327       37       796  
    Equity accounted Adjusted EBITDA2     17       39       16             72  
    Amounts attributable to non-controlling interests3     (422 )     (186 )     (548 )           (1,156 )
    Adjusted EBITDA   $ 205     $ 143     $ 228     $ (32 )   $ 544  


    Notes:

    1. Other income (expense), net corresponds to amounts that are not directly related to revenue earning activities and are not normal, recurring income or expenses necessary for business operations. The components of other income (expense), net include $158 million of net revaluation gains, $50 million of other income related to a distribution at our entertainment operation, $21 million of transaction costs, $19 million of business separation expenses, stand-up costs and restructuring charges and $52 million of other expenses.
    2. Equity accounted Adjusted EBITDA corresponds to the Adjusted EBITDA attributable to the partnership that is generated by our investments in associates and joint ventures accounted for using the equity method.
    3. Amounts attributable to non-controlling interests are calculated based on the economic ownership interests held by the non-controlling interests in consolidated subsidiaries.

    Brookfield Business Corporation Reports First Quarter 2025 Results

    BROOKFIELD, News, May 2, 2025 – Brookfield Business Corporation (NYSE, TSX: BBUC) announced today its net income (loss) for the quarter ended March 31, 2025.

      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions, unaudited   2025     2024  
         
    Net income (loss) attributable to Brookfield Business Partners $ (58 ) $ (150 )

    Net loss attributable to Brookfield Business Partners for the three months ended March 31, 2025 was $58 million compared to net loss of $150 million during the same period in 2024. Current period results included $7 million of remeasurement loss on our exchangeable and class B shares that are classified as liabilities under IFRS. As at March 31, 2025, the exchangeable and class B shares were remeasured to reflect the closing price of $23.46 per unit.

    Dividend

    The Board of Directors has declared a quarterly dividend in the amount of $0.0625 per share, payable on June 30, 2025 to shareholders of record as at the close of business on May 30, 2025.

    Additional Information

    Each exchangeable share of Brookfield Business Corporation has been structured with the intention of providing an economic return equivalent to one unit of Brookfield Business Partners L.P. Each exchangeable share will be exchangeable at the option of the holder for one unit. Brookfield Business Corporation will target that dividends on its exchangeable shares be declared and paid at the same time as distributions are declared and paid on the Brookfield Business Partners’ units and that dividends on each exchangeable share will be declared and paid in the same amount as distributions are declared and paid on each unit to provide holders of exchangeable shares with an economic return equivalent to holders of units.

    In addition to carefully considering the disclosures made in this news release in its entirety, shareholders are strongly encouraged to carefully review the Letter to Unitholders, Supplemental Information and other continuous disclosure filings which are available at https://bbu.brookfield.com.

    Please note that Brookfield Business Corporation’s previous audited annual and unaudited quarterly reports have been filed on SEDAR+ and EDGAR and are available at https://bbu.brookfield.com/bbuc under Reports & Filings. Hard copies of the annual and quarterly reports can be obtained free of charge upon request.

                               
    Brookfield Business Corporation
    Consolidated Statements of Financial Position
     
      As at
    US$ millions, unaudited March 31, 2025   December 31, 2024
               
    Assets          
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 968       $ 1,008  
    Financial assets     324         353  
    Accounts and other receivable, net     3,397         3,229  
    Inventory, net     59         52  
    Other assets     641         627  
    Property, plant and equipment     2,479         2,480  
    Deferred income tax assets     206         197  
    Intangible assets     6,031         5,966  
    Equity accounted investments     201         198  
    Goodwill     4,993         4,988  
    Total Assets   $ 19,299       $ 19,098  
               
    Liabilities and Equity          
    Liabilities          
    Accounts payable and other   $ 5,371       $ 5,276  
    Non-recourse borrowings in subsidiaries of the company     8,711         8,490  
    Exchangeable and class B shares     1,682         1,709  
    Deferred income tax liabilities     951         988  
               
    Equity          
    Brookfield Business Partners $ (78 )     $ (59 )  
    Non-controlling interests   2,662         2,694    
          2,584         2,635  
    Total Liabilities and Equity   $ 19,299       $ 19,098  
       
    Brookfield Business Corporation
    Consolidated Statements of Operating Results
       
      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
    US$ millions, unaudited   2025     2024  
         
    Revenues $ 1,966   $ 1,865  
    Direct operating costs   (1,789 )   (1,652 )
    General and administrative expenses   (75 )   (64 )
    Interest income (expense), net   (219 )   (210 )
    Equity accounted income (loss)   3     1  
    Impairment reversal (expense), net       (2 )
    Remeasurement of exchangeable and class B shares   (7 )   (111 )
    Other income (expense), net   (34 )   (11 )
    Income (loss) before income tax   (155 )   (184 )
    Income tax (expense) recovery    
    Current   (23 )   (44 )
    Deferred   43     54  
    Net income (loss) $ (135 ) $ (174 )
    Attributable to:    
    Brookfield Business Partners $ (58 ) $ (150 )
    Non-controlling interests   (77 )   (24 )


    Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-looking Statements and Information

    Note: This news release contains “forward-looking information” within the meaning of Canadian provincial securities laws and “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of applicable Canadian and U.S. securities laws. Forward-looking statements include statements that are predictive in nature, depend upon or refer to future events or conditions, include statements regarding the operations, business, financial condition, expected financial results, performance, prospects, opportunities, priorities, targets, goals, ongoing objectives, strategies and outlook of Brookfield Business Partners, as well as regarding recently completed and proposed acquisitions, dispositions, and other transactions, and the outlook for North American and international economies for the current fiscal year and subsequent periods, and include words such as “expects”, “anticipates”, “plans”, “believes”, “estimates”, “seeks”, “intends”, “targets”, “projects”, “forecasts”, “views”, “potential”, “likely” or negative versions thereof and other similar expressions, or future or conditional verbs such as “may”, “will”, “should”, “would” and “could”.

    Although we believe that our anticipated future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements and information are based upon reasonable assumptions and expectations, investors and other readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements and information because they involve assumptions, known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, many of which are beyond our control, which may cause the actual results, performance or achievements of Brookfield Business Partners to differ materially from anticipated future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements and information. These beliefs, assumptions and expectations can change as a result of many possible events or factors, not all of which are known to us or are within our control. If a change occurs, our business, financial condition, liquidity and results of operations and our plans and strategies may vary materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements and forward-looking information herein.

    Factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those contemplated or implied by forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, the following: the cyclical nature of our operating businesses and general economic conditions and risks relating to the economy, including unfavorable changes in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, inflation, commodity prices and volatility in the financial markets; the ability to complete and effectively integrate acquisitions into existing operations and the ability to attain expected benefits; business competition, including competition for acquisition opportunities; strategic actions including our ability to complete dispositions and achieve the anticipated benefits therefrom; global equity and capital markets and the availability of equity and debt financing and refinancing within these markets; changes to U.S. laws or policies, including changes in U.S. domestic and economic policies as well as foreign trade policies and tariffs; technological change; litigation; cybersecurity incidents; the possible impact of international conflicts, wars and related developments including terrorist acts and cyber terrorism; operational, or business risks that are specific to any of our business services operations, infrastructure services operations or industrials operations; changes in government policy and legislation; catastrophic events, such as earthquakes, hurricanes and pandemics/epidemics; changes in tax law and practice; and other risks and factors detailed from time to time in our documents filed with the securities regulators in Canada and the United States including those set forth in the “Risk Factors” section in our annual report for the year ended December 31, 2024 filed on Form 20-F.

    Statements relating to “reserves” are deemed to be forward-looking statements as they involve the implied assessment, based on certain estimates and assumptions, that the reserves described herein can be profitably produced in the future. We qualify any and all of our forward-looking statements by these cautionary factors.

    We caution that the foregoing list of important factors that may affect future results is not exhaustive. When relying on our forward-looking statements and information, investors and others should carefully consider the foregoing factors and other uncertainties and potential events. Except as required by law, we undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements or information, whether written or oral, that may be as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

    Cautionary Statement Regarding the Use of a Non-IFRS Measure

    This news release contains references to a Non-IFRS measure. Adjusted EBITDA is not a generally accepted accounting measure under IFRS and therefore may differ from definitions used by other entities. We believe this is a useful supplemental measure that may assist investors in assessing the financial performance of Brookfield Business Partners and its subsidiaries. However, Adjusted EBITDA should not be considered in isolation from, or as a substitute for, analysis of our financial statements prepared in accordance with IFRS.

    References to Brookfield Business Partners are to Brookfield Business Partners L.P. together with its subsidiaries, controlled affiliates and operating entities. Unitholders’ results include limited partnership units, redemption-exchange units, general partnership units, BBUC exchangeable shares and special limited partnership units. More detailed information on certain references made in this news release will be available in our Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations in our interim report for the first quarter ended March 31, 2025 furnished on Form 6-K.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: Ms. Anuradha Prasad Assumes Charge as Member, Union Public Service Commission

    Source: Government of India

    Posted On: 02 MAY 2025 2:16PM by PIB Delhi

    Ms. Anuradha Prasad, former Secretary to the Government of India, Inter State Council Secretariat, Ministry of Home Affairs, took the Oath of the Office and Secrecy as Member, Union Public Service Commission today. The Oath was administered by Lt. Gen. Raj Shukla (Retd.), the seniormost Member of the Commission.

    Ms. Anuradha Prasad did her graduation from the Lady Sriram College for Women and obtained a Masters in History from the University of Delhi. She also has a Masters Degree in Development Administration from the University of Birmingham, U.K.

    Ms. Anuradha Prasad belongs to the 1986 batch of the Indian Defence Accounts Service.   She has extensive experience in public policy, public finance, and cooperative federalism. In a career spanning over 37 years, she has worked in Union Ministries of Defence, Finance, Food Processing Industries, Labour & Employment and Home, gaining in-depth experience in policy & programme formulation and implementation. 

    As Finance Manager in the Acquisitions Wing of the Ministryof Defence, she handled acquisition of large platforms.In the Ministry of Finance, she handled finance and accounting for the Defence Services and the Ordnance Factory Board.During her stint in the Ministry of Food Processing Industries, Ms. Anuradha Prasad was instrumental in the development of the food industry through cold chain infrastructure, food testing laboratories and industry-driven R&D. She also has regulatory experience as Member of the Board of Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) as also the National Council for Vocational Education & Training (NCVET).

    As Additional Secretary in the Ministry of Labour & Employment, she contributed to drafting of the Labour Codes and development of e-Shram Portal, a national database of workers in the unorganized sector.As Director General, Employees’ State Insurance Corporation (ESIC), she spearheaded various initiatives for health & welfare of workers during the Covid-19 pandemic.  

    As Secretary, Inter State Council Secretariat, Ministry of Home Affairs, she handled Centre-State and Inter-State relations and built consensus on many complex and sensitive issues resulting in key policy changes and expediting of infrastructure and other projects.

    Post-retirement, Ms. Anuradha Prasad served as Member, Police Complaints Authority, Government of NCT Delhi.

    ***

    NKR/NSK

    (Release ID: 2126098) Visitor Counter : 53

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI Banking: Lesetja Kganyago: Challenges of the Group of Twenty

    Source: Bank for International Settlements

    Good morning.

    Thank you for inviting me to Brookings. We have long benefited from your expertise, most recently when one of your fellows, Don Kohn, gave a star performance last month at our South African Reserve Bank Research Conference in Cape Town. It is great to be with you in DC today.

    The focus of my talk is the Group of Twenty (G20), for which South Africa currently has the presidency. As you will all know, the G20 started in the 1990s as an informal arrangement for discussing macroeconomic developments and financial stability. It was designated the premier forum for international economic cooperation during the Global Financial Crisis (GFC)1 and, at the time, it proved this status was well deserved.2

    It did this by demonstrating two great strengths.

    First, unlike the Group of Seven, it brought together all the major economies, not just the richer ones. This balanced participation made it a genuinely global institution.
    Second, it was just small enough that it could act decisively.

    In the years since the GFC, the G20 has worked on many important issues, with some real successes. The global regulatory reform agenda stands out as perhaps one of the most significant achievements of the G20. Today we can say the core of the global financial system is more resilient than it was during the GFC.

    The G20 has demonstrated its value during crises, most notably at the onset of the COVID-19 pandemic, where it served as a central forum for coordinating responses and mobilising finance.

    It has strengthened the global financial safety net, with a better-resourced International Monetary Fund at its centre, and has facilitated expanded resource commitments for the multilateral development banks.

    In 2020, the Debt Service Suspension Initiative helped create fiscal space for poor countries at a moment of great peril. The Common Framework that grew out of this is still the most promising mechanism available for working out unsustainable sovereign debts.

    It is a testament to the G20’s value that even now, at a time of extraordinary global change, all its members agree about its importance, and all of them are committed to continuing its work.

    At the same time, I think we are all in agreement that the G20 faces many challenges. I would like to discuss some of them today as a prelude to the discussion to come. I hope you will forgive me for focusing today on how process subverts better policy formulation, but I believe this is a serious concern and detracts from what the G20 might achieve.

    Let me start by drawing attention to the need for more focused agenda-setting, supported by better processes.

    From a very operational perspective, G20 meetings are large. There is a rule of thumb, sometimes called Parkinson’s law,3 that the maximum size of an effective committee is around 20 participants. Once you get past that threshold, it seems to become difficult to make decisions efficiently.

    It would seem that an organisation called the G20 would be perfectly designed for satisfying Parkinson’s law. But, in addition to the G20’s 21 members, we also have a roster of invited countries and many international organisations. Counting in these invited participants, we had a total of 52 countries and institutions at our recent Finance Ministers and Central Bank Governors meeting in Cape Town.

    In this context, it can be challenging to have spontaneous conversations and robust debates.

    One high-level observation is that the G20 functions best in a global crisis. Minds are focused and participants move quickly to find each other in identifying root causes, analysing options and defining the path forward. I think of the meetings of Washington in 2008, London in 2009, and Toronto and Pittsburgh in 2010 as exemplars.

    Once we are no longer in the throes of a crisis, it becomes harder to find purpose. When we say, for instance, that the G20’s relevance is fading, I think we mean that the agenda, always rich in topics, is overloaded and too complex. While there are many agenda items suitable for reasoned, technocratic discussions, such as improving payment systems or helping heavily indebted poor countries, the G20 cannot effectively address itself to all of them.

    Against this, the G20 has powerful mechanisms for adding issues to its agenda. Each year, we have a new presidency, and each presidency wants to make its mark by putting new issues on the table. This means we add more than we subtract. Because the G20 is powerful, prestigious and global, it is tempting to bring it all the problems of the world. It does not follow, however, that, just because something is important, it should be on the G20’s agenda. There are many important issues for which the G20 is not the right forum.

    So, we should be more intentional in how we choose which issues to discuss – especially when the world is in between crises. Narrowing the G20’s scope might also make for more focused discussions that say something more meaningful about the top two or three priorities chosen each year.

    Keeping those priorities central to our discussions would also encourage a better kind of engagement – more intimate conversations that help participants find each other and craft common views.

    In the end, with too much content and not enough conversation, our messaging and communication becomes loaded with vague ‘priors’ rather than more concrete solutions. We tend to sacrifice clarity and purpose in favour of finding relevance among only the most specialist audiences.

    Refocusing on solutions would help to avoid falling into the trap of drafting long and formulaic communiqués. Finally, we would do better by having shorter statements, written in plain language.

    Of course, it is easier to communicate when you have clear decisions to share. The path here is to zero in on our inherently common challenges and then to work harder, partly with better agenda-setting, to develop common views.

    In its early years, the G20 worked well for economic and financial stability issues. We need to preserve that focus and enhance it.

    Another way of doing this could be to separate the various tracks, making them more distinct from one another, creating the space for the principals of the G20 Finance Track to focus, in part, on defining the agenda. Such a step might also mean rethinking the structure of the Finance Track itself and of its multiple working groups and their processes.

    It has also been suggested that we should establish a permanent G20 secretariat. There are obstacles to this, including who hosts it, who gets which roles and who foots the bill. We would have to be very disciplined about keeping it small, meritocratic and well governed.

    That said, establishing a secretariat for each track might address the problem that each year a new country assumes the presidency, puts in a huge effort and financial resources to learn the ropes, and then, just as it starts to really understand the system, its term is over and someone else starts all over again.

    I cannot say I’m convinced a secretariat for each standalone track is a good idea, but maybe it is better than what we have now. It would be great to hear other suggestions.

    To conclude, one of the best parts of the G20 is building relationships and social capital through meeting regularly. In doing so, we enhance our ability to cooperate in crises, gaining perspective and defining better, sustainable solutions.

    Such a dynamic and engaged process is arguably even more critical now as the global community feels its way into a new era. It is in these times that we will find it harder to agree, and it therefore becomes more important to hear each other and seek to redefine our common interests. That there may be contestation over certain topics and how to approach them is a positive outcome of the G20, not a weakness. This is where value we add should, in fact, be found.

    The G20 remains the premier forum for international economic cooperation, and should not have to be reinvented for every crisis. There is no doubt that global cooperation is difficult, even in less crisis-prone times. But the alternatives are worse. And the G20 could, with concerted effort, reach its previous levels of excellence.

    Thank you.


    MIL OSI Global Banks

  • MIL-OSI Economics: Leonardo Villar-Gómez: Speech – XVIII Asofondos Congress

    Source: Bank for International Settlements

    Good morning to all Asofondos Congress attendees. I extend a special greeting to my esteemed fellow panelists in this opening session: Mr. Juan David Correa, President of the Board of Directors of the Association; the Minister of Labor, Mr. Antonio Sanguino; and the Financial Superintendent, Mr. César Ferrari.

    I would also like to express my sincere appreciation to Andrés Velasco and Daniel Wills, President and Technical Vice-President of Asofondos, respectively, as well as to all the members of the Association, for their kind invitation and the opportunity to participate in this vital forum.

    On this occasion, I will first share Banco de la República‘s perspective on Colombia’s macroeconomic and monetary outlook. Additionally, I will conclude my remarks with reflections on the Bank’s role in administering the Contributory Pillar Savings Fund, established by the Congress of the Republic as part of the pension reform approved last year.

    It is important to clarify that the views I will present today do not necessarily reflect the position of the Bank’s Board of Directors, nor do they represent the opinions of its individual members, who may hold differing interpretations on some issues I will address.

    On the Bank’s autonomy and essential objectives

    I would like to begin by addressing recent allegations directed at the Board of Directors, particularly some of its members, regarding alleged political motivations behind the decision made on Monday, March 31 to keep interest rates unchanged. My response to these claims is a strong reaffirmation of the institutional integrity of the Board, which operates strictly on technical grounds and within the clear constitutional mandate of safeguarding the purchasing power of the peso in tandem with general economic policy.

    It is essential to emphasize that none of the Board Members, except for the Minister of Finance, represent any particular government or political opposition. The Constitution is unequivocal on this matter. Article 372 explicitly states: “The members of the Board of Directors shall exclusively represent the interests of the Nation.”

    I have had the distinct honor of serving as member of the Board of Directors of Banco de la República for the past twelve years and, more recently, for over four years as Governor. I can state with absolute clarity and conviction that throughout these sixteen years, I have never witnessed any Board Member-or the Board as an institution-act with any motivation other than pursuing what is best for the country and its people. Our sole objective has always been to fulfill the constitutional mandate of preserving the purchasing power of the peso while ensuring that this goal aligns with the highest possible level of sustainable economic growth and employment.

    In this endeavor, the Board has been fortunate to rely on what I consider to be the most highly qualified team of economists in the country. Every decision the Board makes is preceded by a comprehensive recommendation document prepared by this technical staff. While these recommendations are not necessarily adopted in full, they serve as a crucial point of reference, providing the strongest available evidence to guide Board Members in making informed decisions. Ultimately, each vote is cast with the highest level of diligence, in adherence to the constitutional mandate, and with an unwavering commitment to the nation’s best interests.

    Over the past 25 years, throughout this century, the Board has implemented its mandate to preserve the currency’s purchasing power through an inflation-targeting strategy. This approach seeks to maintain inflation at approximately 3%, with a flexible exchange rate and a very short-term interest rate as the primary policy instrument.

    When inflation exceeds the target, it becomes necessary to uphold a contractionary monetary policy to bring it back under control. However, the short-term economic cost of such a policy-reflected in reduced productive activity-can be more pronounced and prolonged under certain conditions. This occurs, for instance, when prices and wages are heavily indexed to past inflation. Similarly, factors that elevate country risk premiums-such as global uncertainty or political idiosyncrasies, such as rising public debt or fiscal deficits exceeding expectations-can further complicate monetary policy efforts.

    Under these circumstances, the burden on monetary policy intensifies as it seeks to steer inflation back to its target while restoring the conditions necessary for more substantial and sustainable economic growth in the medium and long term.

    Colombia’s recent adjustment process: a success story

    The high policy interest rates maintained over the past three years reflect a deliberately restrictive monetary policy necessary in response to a significant inflationary shock-one that affected most economies worldwide between 2021 and 2023. Our policy response, characterized by elevated interest rates, entailed notable short-term costs regarding its impact on aggregate demand and productive activity. However, these costs were considerably lower than many had anticipated. Contrary to some forecasts, the economy did not enter a recession, and the observed slowdown in productive activity did not hinder the current unemployment rate from standing below pre-pandemic levels.

    Concurrently, this restrictive monetary policy effectively contributed to a substantial reduction in inflation-more than eight percentage points-bringing it down from its peak of 13.4% to the current level of 5.3%. Additionally, the domestic demand imbalances that had manifested in a current account deficit exceeding 6% of GDP in 2022 were significantly corrected, reducing the deficit to just 1.8% of GDP by 2024. The technical staff now projects that this deficit will rise slightly to 2.4% of GDP in 2025, reflecting clear signs of recovery in domestic demand. Even so, the projected deficit remains well below its level three years ago, leaving the economy less reliant on external financing and less vulnerable to abrupt changes in domestic and international conditions-an especially important factor given our current uncertainties.

    I believe that this macroeconomic adjustment process has been successful. It is particularly noteworthy that, within this context, we are witnessing an evident recovery in economic activity. Growth is expected to reach 2.8% in 2025, a rate that compares favorably with forecasts for many regional economies and more advanced economies, including the United States and several European nations.

    According to data from the National Administrative Department of Statistics (DANE), domestic demand grew by 4.4% in real terms in the last quarter of 2024. Similar growth rates are expected in 2025, providing the foundation for the projected recovery in GDP. This improvement is also reflected in labor market indicators, including the seasonally adjusted unemployment rate recorded last February, which was the lowest for any month since April 2017.

    Undoubtedly, the reduction in policy interest rates implemented by this Board between December 2023 and December 2024 played a key role in supporting the recovery of domestic demand, productive activity, and employment.

    Why do interest rates remain relatively high?

    At this point, it is essential to emphasize that our monetary policy interest rates remain at levels indicative of a contractionary monetary stance. Both nominal and real interest rates are currently higher than what the Bank’s technical staff considers neutral and desirable in the medium and long term-conditions in which inflationary pressures are absent and the economy grows close to its potential rate.

    In this context, I would like to reiterate a point I have made publicly on multiple occasions: I consider that interest rates lower than those currently in place would be desirable. Moreover, I am convinced that there is consensus among all members of the Bank’s Board of Directors on this matter.

    Why do we maintain interest rates that we deem contractionary and higher than what would be ideal in the medium and long term? The reason is that, despite our success in significantly reducing inflation from its peak in March 2023, the pace of disinflation in Colombia has been slower than in many other countries in the region and around the world, where inflation has already returned to the target ranges set by their central banks. This slower adjustment is primarily due to the high degree of price and wage indexation in Colombia and other idiosyncratic and circumstantial factors that have complicated the disinflation process.

    Furthermore, the process of lowering interest rates-which we all wish to continue-had to be temporarily halted during the last two Board meetings in January and March. This decision was driven by a slowdown in the pace of inflation’s convergence toward the target, alongside factors that exerted upward pressure on inflation expectations and international interest rates relevant to Colombia’s external financing. Notably, the rise in long-term interest rates in global markets coincided with an increase in Colombia’s country risk spreads. The latter occurred in a context where fiscal deficit figures significantly exceeded forecasts, and public debt as a percentage of GDP was rising at a rate well above what is consistent with macroeconomic stability.

    When comparing Colombia with other Latin American countries that, like us, follow a target inflation strategy, we observe that nations such as Perú, Uruguay, Paraguay/span>, and Costa Rica have made greater progress in reducing interest rates. This has been possible because inflation in these countries has already returned to the target ranges established by their respective central banks. In the case of Chile, inflation remains slightly above its target range due to specific factors related to public utility tariffs. However, inflation expectations suggest that by the end of 2025, Chile will be very close to its target of 3%-the same target set by Colombia.

    The experiences of the region’s two largest economies, México and Brazil, are particularly relevant to our analysis. In México, inflation currently stands at 3.7%, within the target range of 3% ± 1 percentage point. This allowed the Mexican Central Bank to lower its monetary policy interest rate last week from 9.5% to 9%. It is worth noting, however, that even after this reduction, the real ex-post policy rate (the difference between the nominal rate and observed inflation) remains at 5.3% (9% – 3.7%), significantly higher than Colombia’s current level of 4.2% (9.5% – 5.3%).

    The case of Brazil is particularly striking and serves as an important reference for the risks Colombia faces. Inflation in Brazil is currently at 5.1%, slightly lower than in Colombia. The Brazilian Central Bank had been making steady progress in lowering its monetary policy interest rate, reducing it from 13.75% in August 2023 (slightly above Colombia’s at the time) to 10.5% by mid-2024. However, concerns over the country’s fiscal situation in the latter half of 2024 led to a sharp depreciation of the real and rising inflation expectations. In response, the Central Bank was forced to rapidly reverse course, raising the policy rate from 10.5% to its current level of 14.25%. In real ex-post terms, this rate is nearly five percentage points higher than Colombia’s. Additionally, the Brazilian Central Bank has signaled to markets that further rate hikes may be necessary in the coming months. Fortunately, Colombia has not faced such a scenario recently, and clearly, avoiding such a situation remains a priority.

    In Colombia, inflation remains above the 3% target set by the Central Bank. The technical staff’s central forecast for year-end 2025 places inflation above the tolerance range of ±1 percentage point around the target, as announced by the Board last November. If this projection materializes, 2025 would mark the fifth consecutive year in which the inflation target is not met. This would pose a challenge to the credibility of the inflation-targeting framework, which relies on the firm anchoring of inflation expectations as a key element of its effectiveness. Unfortunately, recent analysts’ surveys suggest that inflation expectations among many economic agents have risen in recent months and remain above the target level.

    The combination of deteriorating inflation expectations, fiscal risks in Colombia, and uncertainty surrounding the global economy-exacerbated by the trade tensions triggered by the United States-led the majority of the Board to decide last Monday to maintain the pause in the process of reducing the policy interest rate. As stated in the press release following that meeting: “The decision to maintain the interest rate unchanged reflects a cautious approach to monetary policy, anticipating new information in the coming months that will provide further evidence on the feasibility of additional rate cuts. This decision reaffirms the Board’s commitment to achieving convergence with the inflation target in the context of recovering economic growth.” I believe this statement clearly conveys our expectations moving forward.

    The role of Banco de la República in administering the pension system’s Contributory Pillar Savings Fund

    Before concluding, I would like to address the role that Banco de la República will play in administering the pension systems’ Contributory Pillar Savings Fund (FAPC), as established by the reform approved last year by Congress.

    As you know, Law 2381 of 2024 stipulates that, within the contributory pillar, pension contributions from all workers will include an average premium component administered by Colpensiones, covering contributions on incomes between 1 and 2.3 times the legal monthly minimum wage. Since a portion of these contributions currently goes to the individual savings component, this change will significantly increase the resources received by Colpensiones once the reform takes effect. However, in the long term, this situation will reverse, as Colpensiones’ pension obligations will eventually surpass the resources it collects.

    To address this, the law mandates that the temporary surplus of funds received by Colpensiones-expected to last for two or three decades-be allocated to the Contributory Pillar Savings Fund (FAPC). Congress also determined that Banco de la República would be responsible for administering this Fund. The resources administered through the FAPC will be channeled into capital markets via professional asset managers, generating returns that will help the government meet future pension obligations.

    Currently, even before the reform is enacted, Colpensiones operates with a significant deficit, requiring substantial transfers from the national government. These transfers are included in the annual national budget and contribute to the fiscal deficit. The creation of the FAPC, administered by Banco de la República, has been structured to ensure that its funding is adjusted in a way that neither affects the national government’s current pension expenditures nor undermines aggregate savings in the economy.

    It is essential to underscore that the temporary surplus of resources allocated to the FAPC will be insufficient to meet future pension obligations. According to the projections outlined in the bill, the Fund is expected to be fully depleted by 2070, at which point the government will need to allocate additional resources to cover the resulting deficit. Ensuring the long-term sustainability of the pension system will likely require adjustments to key parameters, particularly in retirement ages and contribution rates. The necessity of these reforms remains unchanged and is in no way diminished by Banco de la República’s role as a financial resource manager.

    A little over a month and a half ago, on February 13, I addressed this very auditorium during the Treasury Congress of the Banking Association, stressing the urgency of issuing the government decree regulating the FAPC’s operation. I noted that without the prompt issuance of this decree, it would be impossible to establish the fundamental elements necessary to begin administering the Fund on time, as mandated by law for July 1.

    Banco de la República’s team worked intensively and constructively with officials from the Ministry of Finance and the Financial Regulation Unit (URF) throughout the last months of 2024, expecting that by year-end, the decree would be in place, allowing us to begin developing the institutional and financial framework required for the Fund’s timely launch. Unfortunately, the process has been significantly delayed. In late February, a version of the decree was released for public consultation, which contained multiple provisions that had not been previously disclosed to the Bank, some of which were inconsistent with the law. Consequently, we submitted a detailed letter on March 7 highlighting our many concerns. Fortunately, several of these observations were taken into account by the Ministry of Finance and the URF, for which we are grateful. A revised draft was published for further comments last Friday, March 28. However, as of yesterday, we had to submit another letter reiterating key concerns that had not yet been addressed, raising the possibility that the decree’s issuance could be further delayed or that it may not fully resolve our outstanding issues. I mention these dates to convey the pressing urgency we currently face in securing the regulatory framework needed to fulfill our legal mandate, which takes effect in less than three months.

    Only once the regulatory decree is issued can we move forward with drafting and signing the FAPC administration contract between the government and the Bank. This will allow us to initiate the selection and hiring of the first administering entities responsible for overseeing the resources, which are expected to accumulate at a rate of approximately 1.4 trillion pesos per month starting July 1. Among many other matters, the contract must explicitly establish that Banco de la República will administer the FAPC’s resources in its capacity as the government’s fiscal agent, as it does with other funds. It will provide the necessary technical and operational infrastructure while ensuring a strict separation between the Fund’s resources and the Bank’s own, both in budgetary and accounting terms. Furthermore, the administration of these resources will adhere to principles of prudence and diligence, as is standard in fiduciary mandates, with responsibility over the means rather than specific financial outcomes.

    The law establishes a Steering Committee as the highest authority of the FAPC, composed of three government representatives and four independent experts appointed by the Board of Directors of Banco de la República. However, the selection process for these four experts can only begin once the corresponding regulatory decree is in place. The draft decree published for public observations last Friday incorporated the Bank’s proposal for a transition period, during which the Bank could operate under provisional rules, investing resources in moderate-risk portfolios similar to those currently administered by the AFPs. Nonetheless, the challenge of establishing these delegated portfolios within such a short timeframe remains considerable.

    Several regulatory elements still require definition. In particular, I want to highlight three pressing issues.

    1. First, a provision included in the latest draft of the decree must be revised, as it allows for the use of savings accumulated in the FAPC to make payments under the contributory and semi-contributory pension frameworks. This pertains to the decumulation of the Fund, which should be explicitly regulated in a separate decree concerning generational sub-accounts-an essential regulation that is still pending. The law stipulates that this decree must undergo review and include a binding opinion from the Fund’s Steering Committee, which has not yet been established. Consequently, incorporating mechanisms for decumulating the Fund’s resources in the decree currently under discussion would not only be premature but also contrary to the law.
    2. For Banco de la República, as administrator of the FAPC, it is essential to clarify which Government entity will be responsible for the Fund’s accounting and which will oversee the corresponding auditing functions. After the bill was approved in the Senate and debated in the House of Representatives, the Bank highlighted the need for such clarity. While many House and government representatives showed willingness to make the necessary adjustments, procedural constraints in the legislative process prevented them. Given these circumstances, the government must define these key accounting and resource oversight aspects through a regulatory decree.
    3. Regarding hiring delegated administrators during the transition period, it is imperative that government regulations establish clear limits on their remuneration in strict accordance with the law. Specifically, compensation should be structured as a fee based on the balance administered rather than as a percentage of the base income for contributions, as proposed in the version published last Friday. The latter approach is inapplicable for resources that do not correspond to individual contributions. Additionally, certain sections of the draft decree contain inconsistencies regarding the nature of the FAPC, treating it as if it were a savings fund for individual contributions-an interpretation that does not align with its legal framework.

    Banco de la República remains fully committed to collaborating with all relevant stakeholders to ensure a coordinated and efficient implementation of the new pension system and the successful launch of the Contributory Pillar Savings Fund. However, I must reiterate the urgency of establishing adequate regulations, without which we simply will not be able to fulfill the mandate assigned to us by law.

    Thank you very much. 

    MIL OSI Economics

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Former St Helens pub landlord failed to declare he was bankrupt when applying for Covid loan

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    News story

    Former St Helens pub landlord failed to declare he was bankrupt when applying for Covid loan

    Suspended sentence for former St Helens pub owner

    • Gary Wright was the owner of the Talbot Ale House in St Helens before it ceased trading in 2019, prior to the pandemic 

    • Wright was subsequently declared bankrupt in early 2020 

    • This did not stop him applying for a £25,000 Bounce Back Loan on behalf of the pub, failing to tell the bank he was bankrupt in the process 

    • The loan was repaid in full earlier this year

    A former St Helens pub owner who failed to disclose his bankruptcy when he applied for Covid support funds has been handed a suspended sentence.  

    Gary Wright did not inform the bank that he was bankrupt when he obtained a £25,000 Bounce Back Loan in the summer of 2020. 

    The 46-year-old made the application on behalf of the Talbot Ale House on Duke Street in St Helens town centre, the pub he ran before his bankruptcy earlier that year. 

    Wright, of Bleak Hill Road, St Helens, was sentenced to two years in prison, suspended for two years, at Liverpool Crown Court on Thursday 24 April. 

    He was also ordered to complete 150 hours of unpaid work and pay £1,500 in costs. 

    The Bounce Back Loan was repaid in full shortly before Wright was sentenced. 

    David Snasdell, Chief Investigator at the Insolvency Service, said: 

    Gary Wright incurred significant debts after his business failed and he was ultimately declared bankrupt. 

    He then attempted to take advantage of a scheme which was backed by taxpayers and designed to support viable small businesses through the pandemic. 

    Bankrupts are legally required to declare their status when applying for loans or credit. Wright clearly failed to do this which is why he now has a criminal conviction. 

    Talbot Ale House ceased trading in September 2019 and Wright was declared bankrupt in February 2020 due to debts owed to a major utility company. 

    Despite this, Wright applied for a £25,000 Bounce Back Loan in June 2020, claiming the turnover of the pub was £400,000. 

    Wright remains an undischarged bankrupt, meaning he has not been officially released from his bankruptcy. 

    Individuals subject to a bankruptcy order must disclose their status if they borrow or obtain credit of £500 or more. 

    A pub continues to run from the same address but under different management. 

    Further information 

    Updates to this page

    Published 2 May 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Economics: Denis Beau: Our payment system at a time of geopolitical risks

    Source: Bank for International Settlements

    Slides accompanying the speech

    [Slide 1 Cover slide]

    The payments sector has undergone significant changes in recent decades, driven by digitalisation and the rise of new technologies. While the latter provide opportunities, they also bring risks, particularly in terms of financial stability and sovereignty. These risks have been amplified since the inauguration of the new US administration and the upheavals to the international order that its challenges to multilateralism and its deregulatory and protectionist policies could cause. 

    Against this backdrop of great uncertainty and the major shocks to the financial system since the start of the month, the financial authorities have an important role to play in fostering stability and trust among the players in the French and European economy and financial system. Accordingly, in addition to ensuring price stability, the objective of the Banque de France, in keeping with its monetary and financial stability mandates, is to help maintain stable access to financial services, particularly credit, and to encourage innovation and diversification. It also strives to ensure the smooth functioning of our economy and the infrastructures on which it relies, and especially our payment system.

    In my presentation this morning, I would first like to review the main trends and challenges facing the European payments ecosystem, and then present the levers we are using at the Banque de France to ensure its efficient operation and the security of payment systems and payment means, and to help strengthen Europe’s sovereignty over its payment system. 

    [Slide 2 – I. Trends and challenges for payments in France and Europe]

    I. The digitalisation of payments and its implications    

    A. Progress in technology is leading to the rapid digitalisation of the payments ecosystem

    [Slide 3: A rapid payment digitalisation process]

    For a little over a decade now, we have been witnessing a strong move towards digitalisation and the increasing use of electronic payment solutions, with an attendant decrease in the use of cash. Payment cards are now the most commonly used means of payment at the points of sale, accounting for more than 48% of transactions in France in 2024. Conversely, cash payments are gradually decreasing, falling to 43% of point-of-sale transactions in France in 2024, whereas they stood at 50% in 2022, and as high as 68% in 2016.

    This trend accelerated even further with the rise of online shopping and the Covid pandemic. The share of e-commerce in the number of transactions thus doubled between 2019 and 2024 to reach a quarter of all transactions in France. At the same time, contactless payments and mobile payments have developed rapidly, with the aim of making payments increasingly seamless and almost invisible to consumers. This trend has been facilitated by the development of new technologies that have modernised payments, such as near-field communication (NFC) and QR codes, which have enabled the roll-out of contactless payments. 

    Against this backdrop, new players in payments have emerged, whose value added stems from technological innovation. These new players are now competing with traditional financial institutions such as banks. They include not only FinTechs but also “non-financial” players, namely telecom operators, technical service providers (specialising, for example, in the tokenisation of payment card data), and BigTechs, in particular the American GAFAMs – ApplePay, GooglePay – which dominate the mobile payments market. They also include Chinese and Korean platforms such as AliPay and WeChatPay.

    The growth in the tokenisation of financial instruments, driven by the use of distributed ledger technologies (DLT) such as blockchain, represents a significant opportunity for our markets. Significant benefits are expected: faster exchanges, lower operating costs and greater transparency of transactions. However, this trend is now going hand in hand with a plethora of uncoordinated DLT initiatives, giving rise to the emergence of new private settlement assets, most notably stablecoins. These initiatives are largely controlled by non-European players and mechanisms, whose reference currency is the dollar. 

    B. The challenges raised by changes in the payments landscape

    [Slide 4: Issues and challenges posed by the digitalisation of the European payments system]

    While the digitalisation of payment means has delivered many benefits, in particular by enabling simpler, faster, more convenient and more secure payments, it also poses challenges.

    The decline in the use of cash raises questions about the sustainability of some of its characteristics, particularly confidentiality, universal acceptance and accessibility, which are not currently available in the digital sphere. Furthermore, the increase in the use of digital payments raises questions about the role of central bank money, as opposed to commercial money used for card payments, even though central bank money plays a key role in anchoring confidence in our monetary system. 

    Furthermore, expanding the use of digital solutions has steadily upped our reliance on non-European entities (particularly from the United States and China), which already leverage significant network effects, thanks notably to their ability to harness extensive datasets and customer bases. They also control a number of widely used proprietary standards (Visa, Mastercard). Beyond the question of operational resilience, this situation raises concerns over competition, strategic autonomy and data protection. With the emergence of these international players, European payment solutions appear highly fragmented and their market share has been eroding.1

    The growing digitalisation of payments also represents a challenge to maintain a high level of payment security. Fraud schemes are becoming increasingly complex, involving the manipulation of payers and the circumvention of the strong authentication mechanisms put in place to ensure the security of digital payments in Europe. In particular, artificial intelligence (AI) is a double-edged sword

    AI amplifies cyber risk and, in payments, it can considerably facilitate payment scams, for example through deepfakes. But this technology can also become an invaluable ally in the fight against fraud, by enabling fraud schemes to be more rapidly and effectively identified. Against this backdrop, integrating AI into anti-fraud models could help to improve the security of the digital payment means available to the public.

    It should also be noted that digitalisation could extend to financial assets, through tokenisation, although at present there are no suitable and really secure payment solutions available for these financial transactions. Therefore, without a central bank money-based payment solution for these “wholesale” transactions, private non-European solutions could become dominant, in particular stablecoins. However, almost all stablecoins are currently pegged to the dollar, and their issuance in the United States is not currently subject to any protective federal regulatory framework. If the tokenisation of financial assets were to gather pace, the lack of a central bank money payment solution in euro might therefore threaten the role of central bank money as the anchor of the euro area’s monetary architecture, with concrete adverse consequences: an increase in counterparty and liquidity risks, increased fragmentation of settlement, and ultimately a loss of sovereignty and a weakening of financial stability.

    In this context, the recent positions adopted by the new US administration, and in particular the adoption on 23 January of an Executive order, are likely to amplify these risks as this Executive Order (i) prohibits all work related to the development of a new form of central bank money compatible with technological changes, (ii) promotes the development of dollar-backed stablecoins, and (iii) encourages citizens and businesses to use public blockchains. This new political direction reinforces the need for Europe to preserve its monetary sovereignty, which means developing its payment sovereignty.

    II. To meet these challenges, the Banque de France is using several additional levers for action

    [Slide 5: Transition – Two additional responses: regulation/support and innovation.]

    A. Adapting regulatory frameworks and supporting innovation within a framework of trust

    [Slide 6: Adapting regulatory frameworks at national and international level]

    First and foremost, the Banque de France promotes clear, standardised and balanced regulatory frameworks that allow innovation to flourish within a framework of trust conducive to their sustainable deployment. It therefore supports and contributes to the development of frameworks that aim to:

    • Maintain a level playing field between players. For example, this has made it possible for operators other than Apple to have access to NFC antennae on iPhones at the European level to promote better competition.
       
    • Adapt to technological progress to support the development of new players, while ensuring they are adequately regulated, based on the principle of “same activity, same risk, same regulation”. This approach has guided the deployment of the Markets in Crypto-Assets (MiCA) regulation, which standardises the rules applicable to crypto-asset service providers, enabling them to develop their business while ensuring that risks to users and the financial system are properly managed. 
       
    • Protect consumers. This was, for example, the aim of the second European Payment Services Directive (PSD2), which introduced “strong customer authentication” (SCA) for more secure payments. The Instant Payment Regulation (IPR) follows the same logic, requiring payment service providers (PSPs) to deploy fraud protection measures (e.g. checking the name of the beneficiary against the IBAN) to ensure the orderly development of instant payments.

    [Slide 7: Strengthening the security of means of payment]

    As part of its statutory mission, which includes ensuring the security of means of payment, the Banque de France supports innovation by ensuring that it does not jeopardise the security of payment methods. The following tasks are performed within the framework of the Observatory for the Security of Payment Means (OSMP).

    • Communication campaigns targeting the general public, such as “never give out your data”, carried by various audio-visual media and radio, and aiming to raise awareness of the personal nature of passwords in particular,
    • Initiatives aimed at boosting cooperation with data protection, cybersecurity and telecommunications authorities to limit fraud as much as possible.

    [Slide 8: Promoting innovation by supporting private initiatives]

    Support for innovation also seeks to ensure that private initiatives help to strengthen European sovereignty over the euro payment system:

    • At the national level, this support aims to consolidate the position of high-performance French payment solutions, such as the Groupement carte bancaire (CB bank card group), which has been allocated specific support within the framework of the new national retail payments strategy for 2025-30, implemented by the National Payments Committee (CNMP) last October.
       
    • At the European level, pan-European solutions, such as the European Payments Initiative (EPI), are strongly supported. EPI launched the ‘Wero’ digital payment wallet for consumers last autumn, providing instant payments across five European countries (Belgium, France, Germany, Luxembourg and the Netherlands). This initiative with pan-European ambition aims to promote competition and strengthen Europe’s strategic autonomy in retail payments.

    B. The provision of new central bank money services to preserve the key role of central bank money in a digitalised world

    Alongside regulating and supporting private initiatives, the Banque de France is making a strong and decisive contribution to the Eurosystem’s work on developing its services through the creation of a central bank digital currency for both retail and wholesale transactions. This work has become more strategically important in terms of ensuring European sovereignty over its payment system since the policy shift initiated by the new US administration that I referred to a few minutes ago.

    [Slide 9: Innovating with the digital euro: a European payment solution] 

    1. The digital euro

    Given the strong dependence on American payment solutions and networks, the Banque de France thus supports and participates fully in the digital euro project spearheaded by the Eurosystem, which will constitute a public alternative, preserving the freedom to choose means of payment, sovereignty and competition in the euro area. 

    The digital euro aims to provide everyone with the possibility to use a ‘digital banknote’ in the digital payments sphere that incorporates the main features of a ‘physical’ banknote. Its off-line mechanism will provide a cash-like level of privacy and will be a guarantee of resilience. It will be free of charge for individuals. Its characteristics will foster digital financial inclusion, including for people without bank accounts or smartphones. It will also be a new form of public money, which will safeguard the anchoring role of central bank money and trust in our single currency.

    The digital euro also aims to strengthen European integration and strategic autonomy in payments thanks to the legal tender status it would be given, making it usable anywhere and in any circumstances within the euro area. It will also be based on open and harmonised standards, which private payment solutions such as Wero will be able to use to expand their reach. In this way, the digital euro aims to foster the development of private solutions under European governance, which can be used across the euro area, whereas most solutions are currently restricted to certain countries or use cases.

    The Eurosystem is currently in a preparation phase that will last until the end of 2025. At the same time, a democratic debate is taking place at the European level to define, by means of legislation, the conditions in which the digital euro may be used. A decision on issuance can be taken once this legislation has been approved by the European Parliament and the Council.

     [Slide 10: From Wholesale CBDC to a shared European ledger]

    2. Wholesale central bank digital currency

    With the development of tokenised assets, the Banque de France is also firmly committed to providing a payment solution in central bank money that includes making it available in tokenised form, in other words, a “wholesale CBDC”. 

    The Banque de France has been resolutely committed to this solution since 2020, playing a pioneering role at the European level in an experimental programme conducted between 2020 and 2022, in partnership with various private and institutional sector players. This work, which allowed the Banque de France to develop and test its own blockchain (DL3S), was followed by that of the Eurosystem in 2024. This was used to test three solutions for settling tokenised assets in central bank currency through around 40 or so experiments.

    Drawing on the lessons learned from these experiments and their confirmation of a demand for adapting central bank money services, in February 2025, the ECB Governing Council decided to quickly make available a settlement service in CB money adapted for tokenised assets, which will include money in token form, i.e. a “wholesale” CB digital currency. 

    This decision also paves the way for discussions on building a European shared ledger that could be used to adapt European payment infrastructures to the digital era to ensure sovereignty. By providing a credible alternative to non-European solutions, based on a standardised legal and regulatory framework, a European shared ledger could support financial integration within the EU and help strengthen the resilience and attractiveness of our financial market. 

    Conclusion : As a central bank tasked with safeguarding monetary and financial stability, and notably the security and efficiency of payment systems and means of payment for the euro, the Banque de France is fully committed to monitoring, understanding and supporting the major transformations currently taking place in the payments landscape. These transformations have recently assumed major strategic importance for the monetary sovereignty of euro area countries, necessitating the mobilisation of all the European players concerned to respond in an appropriate and adequate manner. This involves developing secure, efficient public and private pan-European payment solutions that contribute to European sovereignty over its payment system. As both supervisor and provider of central bank money services, we are determined to play our part.

    [Slide 11: Thank you for your attention]


    MIL OSI Economics

  • MIL-OSI: Shell Plc 1st Quarter 2025 Unaudited Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

                                 
    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS
           
                                             
     
    SUMMARY OF UNAUDITED RESULTS
    Quarters $ million    
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    4,780    928    7,358    +415 Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders        
    5,577    3,661    7,734    +52 Adjusted Earnings A      
    15,250    14,281    18,711    +7 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    9,281    13,162    13,330    -29 Cash flow from operating activities        
    (3,959)   (4,431)   (3,528)     Cash flow from investing activities        
    5,322    8,731    9,802      Free cash flow G      
    4,175    6,924    4,493      Cash capital expenditure C      
    8,575    9,401    8,997    -9 Operating expenses F      
    8,453    9,138    9,054    -7 Underlying operating expenses F      
    10.4% 11.3% 12.0%   ROACE D      
    76,511    77,078    79,931      Total debt E      
    41,521    38,809    40,513      Net debt E      
    18.7% 17.7% 17.7%   Gearing E      
    2,838    2,815    2,911    +1 Oil and gas production available for sale (thousand boe/d)        
    0.79    0.15    1.14 +427 Basic earnings per share ($)        
    0.92    0.60    1.20    +53 Adjusted Earnings per share ($) B      
    0.3580    0.3580    0.3440    Dividend per share ($)        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income attributable to Shell plc shareholders, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected lower exploration well write-offs, lower operating expenses and higher Products margins.

    First quarter 2025 income attributable to Shell plc shareholders also included a charge of $0.5 billion related to the UK Energy Profits Levy and impairment charges. These items are included in identified items amounting to a net loss of $0.8 billion in the quarter. This compares with identified items in the fourth quarter 2024 which amounted to a net loss of $2.8 billion.

    Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as income attributable to Shell plc shareholders and adjusted for the above identified items.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the first quarter 2025 was $9.3 billion and primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $2.9 billion and working capital outflows of $2.7 billion. The working capital outflows mainly reflected accounts receivable and payable movements.

    Cash flow from investing activities for the first quarter 2025 was an outflow of $4.0 billion, and included cash capital expenditure of $4.2 billion, and net other investing cash outflows of $0.9 billion which included the drawdowns on loan facilities provided at completion of the sale of The Shell Petroleum Development Company of Nigeria Limited (SPDC) in Nigeria, partly offset by divestment proceeds of $0.6 billion.

    Net debt and Gearing: At the end of the first quarter 2025, net debt was $41.5 billion, compared with $38.8 billion at the end of the fourth quarter 2024. This reflects free cash flow of $5.3 billion, which included working capital outflows of $2.7 billion, more than offset by share buybacks of $3.3 billion, cash dividends paid to Shell plc shareholders of $2.2 billion, lease additions of $1.3 billion including those related to the Pavilion Energy Pte. Ltd. acquisition and interest payments of $0.8 billion. Gearing was 18.7% at the end of the first quarter 2025, compared with 17.7% at the end of the fourth quarter 2024, mainly driven by higher net debt.


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    Shareholder distributions

    Total shareholder distributions in the quarter amounted to $5.5 billion comprising repurchases of shares of $3.3 billion and cash dividends paid to Shell plc shareholders of $2.2 billion. Dividends declared to Shell plc shareholders for the first quarter 2025 amount to $0.3580 per share. Shell has now completed $3.5 billion of share buybacks announced in the fourth quarter 2024 results announcement. Today, Shell announces a share buyback programme of $3.5 billion which is expected to be completed by the second quarter 2025 results announcement.

    This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, together with supplementary financial and operational disclosure for this quarter, is available at www.shell.com/investors 3.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and depreciation, depletion and amortisation (DD&A) expenses.

    3.Not incorporated by reference.

    PORTFOLIO DEVELOPMENTS

    Integrated Gas

    In March 2025, we completed the previously announced acquisition of 100% of the shares in Pavilion Energy Pte. Ltd. (Pavilion Energy). Pavilion Energy, headquartered in Singapore, operates a global LNG trading business with contracted supply volume of approximately 6.5 million tonnes per annum (mtpa).

    Upstream

    In January 2025, we announced the start of production at the Shell-operated Whale floating production facility in the Gulf of America. The Whale development is owned by Shell (60%, operator) and Chevron U.S.A. Inc. (40%).

    In February 2025, we announced production restart at the Penguins field in the UK North Sea with a modern floating, production, storage and offloading (FPSO) facility (Shell 50%, operator; NEO Energy 50%). The previous export route for this field was via the Brent Charlie platform, which ceased production in 2021 and is being decommissioned.

    In February 2025, we signed an agreement to acquire a 15.96% working interest from ConocoPhillips Company in the Shell-operated Ursa platform in the Gulf of America. The transaction completed on May 1, 2025 which increases Shell’s working interest in the Ursa platform from 45.3884% to 61.3484%.

    In March 2025, we completed the sale of SPDC to Renaissance, as announced in January 2024.

    In March 2025, we announced the Final Investment Decision (FID) for Gato do Mato, a deep-water project in the pre-salt area of the Santos Basin, offshore Brazil. The Gato do Mato Consortium includes Shell (operator, 50%), Ecopetrol (30%), TotalEnergies (20%) and Pré-Sal Petróleo S.A. (PPSA) acting as the manager of the production sharing contract (PSC).

    Chemicals and Products

    In January 2025, CNOOC and Shell Petrochemicals Company Limited (CSPC), a 50:50 joint venture between Shell and CNOOC Petrochemicals Investment Ltd, took an FID to expand its petrochemical complex in Daya Bay, Huizhou, south China.

    In April 2025, we completed the previously announced sale of our Energy and Chemicals Park in Singapore to CAPGC Pte. Ltd. (CAPGC), a joint venture between Chandra Asri Capital Pte. Ltd. and Glencore Asian Holdings Pte. Ltd.

    In April 2025, we agreed to sell our 16.125% interest in Colonial Enterprises, Inc. (“Colonial”) to Colossus AcquireCo LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of Brookfield Infrastructure Partners L.P. and its institutional partners (collectively, “Brookfield”), for $1.45 billion. The transaction is subject to regulatory approvals and is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2025.

    Renewables and Energy Solutions

    In January 2025, we completed the previously announced acquisition of a 100% equity stake in RISEC Holdings, LLC, which owns a 609-megawatt (MW) two-unit combined-cycle gas turbine power plant in Rhode Island, USA.

             Page 2


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    PERFORMANCE BY SEGMENT

                                             
                       
    INTEGRATED GAS        
    Quarters $ million                
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    2,789    1,744    2,761    +60 Income/(loss) for the period        
    306    (421)   (919)     Of which: Identified items A      
    2,483    2,165    3,680    +15 Adjusted Earnings A      
    4,735    4,568    6,136    +4 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    3,463    4,391    4,712    -21 Cash flow from operating activities A      
    1,116    1,337    1,041      Cash capital expenditure C      
    126    116    137    +9 Liquids production available for sale (thousand b/d)        
    4,644    4,574    4,954    +2 Natural gas production available for sale (million scf/d)        
    927    905    992    +2 Total production available for sale (thousand boe/d)        
    6.60    7.06    7.58    -6 LNG liquefaction volumes (million tonnes)        
    16.49    15.50    16.87    +6 LNG sales volumes (million tonnes)        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    Integrated Gas includes liquefied natural gas (LNG), conversion of natural gas into gas-to-liquids (GTL) fuels and other products. It includes natural gas and liquids exploration and extraction, and the operation of the upstream and midstream infrastructure necessary to deliver these to market. Integrated Gas also includes the marketing, trading and optimisation of LNG.

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected lower exploration well write-offs ($277 million), partly offset by lower LNG liquefaction volumes (decrease of $68 million). The net effect of contributions from trading and optimisation and realised prices was in line with the fourth quarter 2024 despite higher unfavourable (non-cash) impact of expiring hedging contracts.

    Identified items in the first quarter 2025 included favourable movements of $362 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, that as part of Shell’s normal business are entered into as hedges for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory. These favourable movements compare with the fourth quarter 2024 which included impairment charges of $339 million and a loss of $96 million related to sale of assets, partly offset by favourable movements of $109 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives.

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, and net cash inflows related to derivatives of $542 million, partly offset by tax payments of $773 million and working capital outflows of $687 million.

    Total oil and gas production, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, increased by 2% mainly due to lower planned maintenance in Pearl GTL (Qatar), partly offset by unplanned maintenance and weather constraints in Australia. LNG liquefaction volumes decreased by 6% mainly due to unplanned maintenance and weather constraints in Australia.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

             Page 3


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                             
                       
    UPSTREAM          
    Quarters $ million                
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    2,080    1,031    2,272    +102 Income/(loss) for the period        
    (257)   (651)   339      Of which: Identified items A      
    2,337    1,682    1,933    +39 Adjusted Earnings A      
    7,387    7,676    7,888    -4 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    3,945    4,509    5,727    -13 Cash flow from operating activities A      
    1,923    2,076    2,010      Cash capital expenditure C      
    1,335    1,332    1,331    Liquids production available for sale (thousand b/d)        
    3,020    3,056    3,136    -1 Natural gas production available for sale (million scf/d)        
    1,855    1,859    1,872    Total production available for sale (thousand boe/d)        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    The Upstream segment includes exploration and extraction of crude oil, natural gas and natural gas liquids. It also markets and transports oil and gas, and operates the infrastructure necessary to deliver them to the market.

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected lower exploration well write-offs ($346 million), lower depreciation, depletion and amortisation expenses (decrease of $330 million), lower operating expenses ($194 million) and comparative favourable tax movements ($179 million), partly offset by lower volumes (decrease of $359 million).

    Identified items in the first quarter 2025 included a charge of $509 million related to the UK Energy Profits Levy, partly offset by gains of $159 million from disposal of assets and gains of $95 million related to the impact of the strengthening Brazilian real on a deferred tax position. These charges and favourable movements compare with the fourth quarter 2024 which included a loss of $161 million related to the impact of the weakening Brazilian real on a deferred tax position, and impairment charges of $152 million.

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the first quarter 2025 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $1,999 million and working capital outflows of $913 million.

    Total production, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, decreased mainly due to the SPDC divestment, largely offset by new oil production.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

             Page 4


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                             
                       
    MARKETING        
    Quarters $ million                
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    814    103    896    +688 Income/(loss) for the period        
    (49)   (736)   (7)     Of which: Identified items A      
    900    839    781    +7 Adjusted Earnings A      
    1,869    1,709    1,686    +9 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    1,907    1,363    1,319    +40 Cash flow from operating activities A      
    256    811    465      Cash capital expenditure C      
    2,674    2,795    2,763    -4 Marketing sales volumes (thousand b/d)        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    The Marketing segment comprises the Mobility, Lubricants, and Sectors and Decarbonisation businesses. The Mobility business operates Shell’s retail network including electric vehicle charging services and the Wholesale commercial fuels business which provides fuels for transport, industry and heating. The Lubricants business produces, markets and sells lubricants for road transport, and machinery used in manufacturing, mining, power generation, agriculture and construction. The Sectors and Decarbonisation business sells fuels, speciality products and services including low-carbon energy solutions to a broad range of commercial customers including the aviation, marine, and agricultural sectors.

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected lower operating expenses (decrease of $69 million), and higher Marketing margins (increase of $54 million) mainly due to higher Lubricants unit margins and seasonal impact of higher volumes partly offset by lower Mobility margins due to seasonal impact of lower volumes and lower Sectors and Decarbonisation margins. These net gains were partly offset by unfavourable tax movements ($109 million).

    Identified items in the first quarter 2025 included net losses of $61 million related to sale of assets. These losses compare with the fourth quarter 2024 which included impairment charges of $458 million, and net losses of $247 million related to sale of assets.

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the first quarter 2025 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, inflows relating to the timing impact of payments related to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $540 million, and dividends (net of profits) from joint ventures and associates of $203 million. These inflows were partly offset by working capital outflows of $344 million and tax payments of $174 million.

    Marketing sales volumes (comprising hydrocarbon sales), compared with the fourth quarter 2024, decreased mainly due to seasonality.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

             Page 5


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                             
                       
    CHEMICALS AND PRODUCTS        
    Quarters $ million                
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    (77)   (276)   1,311    +72 Income/(loss) for the period        
    (581)   (99)   (458)     Of which: Identified items A      
    449    (229)   1,615    +296 Adjusted Earnings A      
    1,410    475    2,826    +197 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    130    2,032    (349)   -94 Cash flow from operating activities A      
    458    1,392    500      Cash capital expenditure C      
    1,362    1,215    1,430    +12 Refinery processing intake (thousand b/d)        
    2,813    2,926    2,883    -4 Chemicals sales volumes (thousand tonnes)        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    The Chemicals and Products segment includes chemicals manufacturing plants with their own marketing network, and refineries which turn crude oil and other feedstocks into a range of oil products which are moved and marketed around the world for domestic, industrial and transport use. The segment also includes the pipeline business, trading and optimisation of crude oil, oil products and petrochemicals, and Oil Sands activities (the extraction of bitumen from mined oil sands and its conversion into synthetic crude oil).

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected higher Products margins (increase of $546 million) mainly driven by higher margins from trading and optimisation and higher refining margins. Adjusted Earnings also reflected higher Chemicals margins (increase of $115 million). In addition, the first quarter 2025 reflected lower operating expenses (decrease of $134 million). These net gains were partly offset by comparative unfavourable tax movements ($96 million).

    In the first quarter 2025, Chemicals had negative Adjusted Earnings of $137 million and Products had positive Adjusted Earnings of $586 million.

    Identified items in the first quarter 2025 included impairment charges of $277 million, and unfavourable movements of $202 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, that as part of Shell’s normal business are entered into as hedges for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory. These charges and unfavourable movements compare with the fourth quarter 2024 which included impairment charges of $224 million, partly offset by favourable deferred tax movements of $114 million..

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the first quarter 2025 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, and inflows relating to the timing impact of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $125 million. These inflows were partly offset by working capital outflows of $1,081 million, and net cash outflows relating to commodity derivatives of $508 million.

    Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation was 81% compared with 75% in the fourth quarter 2024, mainly due to lower planned and unplanned maintenance.

    Refinery utilisation was 85% compared with 76% in the fourth quarter 2024, mainly due to lower planned maintenance.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

             Page 6


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                             
                       
    RENEWABLES AND ENERGY SOLUTIONS        
    Quarters $ million                
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference      
    (247)   (1,226)   553    +80 Income/(loss) for the period        
    (205)   (914)   390      Of which: Identified items A      
    (42)   (311)   163    +87 Adjusted Earnings A      
    111    (123)   267    +190 Adjusted EBITDA A      
    367    850    2,466    -57 Cash flow from operating activities A      
    403    1,277    438      Cash capital expenditure C      
    76    76    77    +1 External power sales (terawatt hours)2        
    184    165    190    +12 Sales of pipeline gas to end-use customers (terawatt hours)3        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    2.Physical power sales to third parties; excluding financial trades and physical trade with brokers, investors, financial institutions, trading platforms, and wholesale traders.

    3.Physical natural gas sales to third parties; excluding financial trades and physical trade with brokers, investors, financial institutions, trading platforms, and wholesale traders. Excluding sales of natural gas by other segments and LNG sales.

    Renewables and Energy Solutions includes activities such as renewable power generation, the marketing and trading and optimisation of power and pipeline gas, as well as carbon credits, and digitally enabled customer solutions. It also includes the production and marketing of hydrogen, development of commercial carbon capture and storage hubs, investment in nature-based projects that avoid or reduce carbon emissions, and Shell Ventures, which invests in companies that work to accelerate the energy and mobility transformation.

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected higher margins (increase of $99 million) mainly due to higher trading and optimisation in the Americas as a result of higher seasonal demand and volatility, lower operating expenses (decrease of $90 million) and comparative favourable tax movements ($89 million). Most Renewables and Energy Solutions activities were loss-making in the first quarter 2025, which was partly offset by positive Adjusted Earnings from trading and optimisation.

    Identified items in the first quarter 2025 included a charge of $143 million related to the disposal of assets. These charges compare with the fourth quarter 2024 which included impairment charges of $996 million mainly relating to renewable generation assets in North America, partly offset by favourable movements of $50 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, that as part of Shell’s normal business are entered into as hedges for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    Cash flow from operating activities for the first quarter 2025 was primarily driven by net cash inflows relating to working capital of $380 million and Adjusted EBITDA, partially offset by outflows related to derivatives of $169 million.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

    Additional Growth Measures

                                             
    Quarters      
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024          
            Renewable power generation capacity (gigawatt):        
    3.5    3.4    3.2    +4 – In operation2        
    4.0    4.0    3.5    -1 – Under construction and/or committed for sale3        

    1.Q1 on Q4 change

    2.Shell’s equity share of renewable generation capacity post commercial operation date. It excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.

    3.Shell’s equity share of renewable generation capacity under construction and/or committed for sale under long-term offtake agreements (PPA). It excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.

             Page 7


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                     
                 
    CORPORATE      
    Quarters $ million          
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024   Reference    
    (483)   (335)   (354)   Income/(loss) for the period      
    (26)   45    14    Of which: Identified items A    
    (457)   (380)   (368)   Adjusted Earnings A    
    (261)   (24)   (92)   Adjusted EBITDA A    
    (531)   16    (545)   Cash flow from operating activities A    

    The Corporate segment covers the non-operating activities supporting Shell. It comprises Shell’s holdings and treasury organisation, headquarters and central functions, self-insurance activities and centrally managed longer-term innovation portfolio. All finance expense, income and related taxes are included in Corporate Adjusted Earnings rather than in the earnings of business segments.

    Quarter Analysis1

    Income/(loss) for the period was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings and includes identified items.

    Adjusted Earnings, compared with the fourth quarter 2024, reflected unfavourable currency exchange rate effects, partly offset by lower operating expenses.

    Adjusted EBITDA2 was driven by the same factors as Adjusted Earnings.

    1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

    2.Adjusted EBITDA is without interest, taxation, exploration well write-offs and DD&A expenses.

             Page 8


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    OUTLOOK FOR THE SECOND QUARTER 2025

    Full year 2024 cash capital expenditure was $21 billion. Our cash capital expenditure range for the full year 2025 is expected to be within $20 – $22 billion.

    Integrated Gas production is expected to be approximately 890 – 950 thousand boe/d. LNG liquefaction volumes are expected to be approximately 6.3 – 6.9 million tonnes. Second quarter 2025 outlook reflects scheduled maintenance across the portfolio.

    Upstream production is expected to be approximately 1,560 – 1,760 thousand boe/d. Production outlook reflects the SPDC divestment in March 2025 and the scheduled maintenance across the portfolio.

    Marketing sales volumes are expected to be approximately 2,600 – 3,100 thousand b/d.

    Refinery utilisation is expected to be approximately 87% – 95%. Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation is expected to be approximately 74% – 82%. Second quarter 2025 utilisation outlook reflects the sale of the Energy and Chemicals Park in Singapore which was completed in April 2025.

    Corporate Adjusted Earnings1 were a net expense of $457 million for the first quarter 2025. Corporate Adjusted Earnings are expected to be a net expense of approximately $400 – $600 million in the second quarter 2025.

    1.For the definition of Adjusted Earnings and the most comparable GAAP measure see reference A.

    FORTHCOMING EVENTS

               
     
    Date Event
    May 20, 2025 Annual General Meeting
    July 31, 2025 Second quarter 2025 results and dividends
    October 30, 2025 Third quarter 2025 results and dividends

             Page 9


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

                               
     
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME    
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    69,234    66,281    72,478    Revenue1    
    615    (156)   1,318    Share of profit/(loss) of joint ventures and associates    
    302    683    907    Interest and other income/(expenses)2    
    70,152    66,807    74,703    Total revenue and other income/(expenses)    
    45,849    43,610    46,867    Purchases    
    5,549    5,839    5,810    Production and manufacturing expenses    
    2,840    3,231    2,975    Selling, distribution and administrative expenses    
    185    331    212    Research and development    
    210    861    750    Exploration    
    5,441    7,520    5,881    Depreciation, depletion and amortisation2    
    1,120    1,213    1,164    Interest expense    
    61,194    62,605    63,659    Total expenditure    
    8,959    4,205    11,044    Income/(loss) before taxation    
    4,083    3,164    3,604    Taxation charge/(credit)2    
    4,875    1,041    7,439    Income/(loss) for the period    
    95    113    82    Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest    
    4,780    928    7,358    Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders    
    0.79    0.15    1.14    Basic earnings per share ($)3    
    0.79    0.15    1.13    Diluted earnings per share ($)3    

    1.See Note 2 “Segment information”.

    2.See Note 7 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

    3.See Note 3 “Earnings per share”.

                               
                 
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME    
    Quarters $ million        
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    4,875    1,041    7,439    Income/(loss) for the period    
          Other comprehensive income/(loss) net of tax:    
          Items that may be reclassified to income in later periods:    
    1,711    (4,899)   (1,995)   – Currency translation differences1    
      (11)   (6)   – Debt instruments remeasurements    
    (25)   224    53    – Cash flow hedging gains/(losses)    
    (42)   (50)   (14)   – Deferred cost of hedging    
    74    (91)   (12)   – Share of other comprehensive income/(loss) of joint ventures and associates    
    1,723    (4,827)   (1,974)   Total    
          Items that are not reclassified to income in later periods:    
    306    239    439    – Retirement benefits remeasurements    
    (16)   (50)   78    – Equity instruments remeasurements    
    (36)   46    10    – Share of other comprehensive income/(loss) of joint ventures and associates    
    254    235    528    Total    
    1,977    (4,592)   (1,445)   Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the period    
    6,852    (3,552)   5,994    Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period    
    105    50    56    Comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest    
    6,748    (3,602)   5,937    Comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders    

    1.See Note 7 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

             Page 10


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                     
     
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
    $ million    
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024
    Assets    
    Non-current assets    
    Goodwill 16,072    16,032   
    Other intangible assets1 11,365    9,480   
    Property, plant and equipment 183,712    185,219   
    Joint ventures and associates 24,236    23,445   
    Investments in securities 2,284    2,255   
    Deferred tax 6,989    6,857   
    Retirement benefits 10,266    10,003   
    Trade and other receivables 7,269    6,018   
    Derivative financial instruments² 400    374   
      262,593    259,683   
    Current assets    
    Inventories 22,984    23,426   
    Trade and other receivables 48,247    45,860   
    Derivative financial instruments² 8,941    9,673   
    Cash and cash equivalents 35,601    39,110   
      115,773    118,069   
    Assets classified as held for sale1 10,881    9,857   
      126,654    127,926   
    Total assets 389,248    387,609   
    Liabilities    
    Non-current liabilities    
    Debt 65,120    65,448   
    Trade and other payables 5,487    3,290   
    Derivative financial instruments² 1,565    2,185   
    Deferred tax 13,257    13,505   
    Retirement benefits 6,756    6,752   
    Decommissioning and other provisions 20,313    21,227   
      112,498    112,407   
    Current liabilities    
    Debt 11,391    11,630   
    Trade and other payables 60,870    60,693   
    Derivative financial instruments² 6,371    7,391   
    Income taxes payable 4,343    4,648   
    Decommissioning and other provisions 5,104    4,469   
      88,079    88,831   
    Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale1 8,001    6,203   
      96,080    95,034   
    Total liabilities 208,578    207,441   
    Equity attributable to Shell plc shareholders 178,813    178,307   
    Non-controlling interest 1,856    1,861   
    Total equity 180,670    180,168   
    Total liabilities and equity 389,248    387,609   

    1.    See Note 7 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

    2.    See Note 6 “Derivative financial instruments and debt excluding lease liabilities”.

             Page 11


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                                         
     
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
      Equity attributable to Shell plc shareholders      
    $ million Share capital1 Shares held in trust Other reserves² Retained earnings Total Non-controlling interest   Total equity
    At January 1, 2025 510    (803)   19,766    158,834    178,307    1,861      180,168   
    Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period —    —    1,967    4,780    6,748    105      6,852   
    Transfer from other comprehensive income —    —    11    (11)   —    —      —   
    Dividends³ —    —    —    (2,179)   (2,179)   (86)     (2,265)  
    Repurchases of shares4 (8)   —      (3,513)   (3,513)   —      (3,513)  
    Share-based compensation —    500    (663)   (405)   (567)   —      (567)  
    Other changes —    —    —    23    22    (24)     (2)  
    At March 31, 2025 502    (304)   21,090    157,527    178,813    1,856      180,670   
    At January 1, 2024 544    (997)   21,145    165,915    186,607    1,755      188,362   
    Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period —    —    (1,420)   7,358    5,937    56      5,994   
    Transfer from other comprehensive income —    —    138    (138)   —    —      —   
    Dividends3 —    —    —    (2,210)   (2,210)   (68)     (2,278)  
    Repurchases of shares4 (7)   —      (3,502)   (3,502)   —      (3,502)  
    Share-based compensation —    543    (426)   (392)   (275)   —      (275)  
    Other changes —    —    —        (4)      
    At March 31, 2024 537    (455)   19,445    167,038    186,565    1,739      188,304   

    1.    See Note 4 “Share capital”.

    2.    See Note 5 “Other reserves”.

    3.    The amount charged to retained earnings is based on prevailing exchange rates on payment date.

    4.     Includes shares committed to repurchase under an irrevocable contract and repurchases subject to settlement at the end of the quarter.

             Page 12


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                     
     
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS    
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025   Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    8,959      4,205    11,044    Income before taxation for the period    
            Adjustment for:    
    636      665    576    – Interest expense (net)    
    5,441      7,520    5,881    – Depreciation, depletion and amortisation1    
    28      649    554    – Exploration well write-offs    
    127      288    (10)   – Net (gains)/losses on sale and revaluation of non-current assets and businesses    
    (615)     156    (1,318)   – Share of (profit)/loss of joint ventures and associates    
    523      1,241    738    – Dividends received from joint ventures and associates    
    854      131    (608)   – (Increase)/decrease in inventories    
    (2,610)     751    (195)   – (Increase)/decrease in current receivables    
    (907)     1,524    (1,949)   – Increase/(decrease) in current payables    
    (244)     111    1,386    – Derivative financial instruments    
    (100)     (58)   (61)   – Retirement benefits    
    (480)     (256)   (600)   – Decommissioning and other provisions    
    570      (856)   509    – Other1    
    (2,900)     (2,910)   (2,616)   Tax paid    
    9,281      13,162    13,330    Cash flow from operating activities    
    (3,748)     (6,486)   (3,980)      Capital expenditure    
    (413)     (421)   (500)      Investments in joint ventures and associates    
    (15)     (17)   (13)      Investments in equity securities    
    (4,175)     (6,924)   (4,493)   Cash capital expenditure    
    559      493    323    Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and businesses    
    33      305    133    Proceeds from joint ventures and associates from sale, capital reduction and repayment of long-term loans    
          569    Proceeds from sale of equity securities    
    508      581    577    Interest received    
    506      1,762    857    Other investing cash inflows    
    (1,394)     (655)   (1,494)   Other investing cash outflows1    
    (3,959)     (4,431)   (3,528)   Cash flow from investing activities    
    80      65    (107)   Net increase/(decrease) in debt with maturity period within three months    
            Other debt:    
    139      (13)   167    – New borrowings    
    (2,514)     (2,664)   (1,532)   – Repayments    
    (846)     (1,379)   (911)   Interest paid    
    326      (833)   (297)   Derivative financial instruments    
    (25)     (10)   (4)   Change in non-controlling interest    
            Cash dividends paid to:    
    (2,179)     (2,114)   (2,210)   – Shell plc shareholders    
    (86)     (53)   (68)   – Non-controlling interest    
    (3,311)     (3,579)   (2,824)   Repurchases of shares    
    (768)     (309)   (462)   Shares held in trust: net sales/(purchases) and dividends received    
    (9,183)     (10,889)   (8,248)   Cash flow from financing activities    
    353      (985)   (379)   Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents    
    (3,509)     (3,142)   1,175    Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents    
    39,110      42,252    38,774    Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period    
    35,601      39,110    39,949    Cash and cash equivalents at end of period    

    1.See Note 7 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

             Page 13


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    NOTES TO THE UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

    1. Basis of preparation

    These unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements of Shell plc (“the Company”) and its subsidiaries (collectively referred to as “Shell”) have been prepared in accordance with IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) and adopted by the UK, and on the basis of the same accounting principles as those used in the Company’s Annual Report and Accounts (pages 240 to 312) for the year ended December 31, 2024, as filed with the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales and as filed with the Autoriteit Financiële Markten (the Netherlands) and Form 20-F (pages 223 to 296) for the year ended December 31, 2024, as filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission, and should be read in conjunction with these filings.

    The financial information presented in the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 434(3) of the Companies Act 2006 (“the Act”). Statutory accounts for the year ended December 31, 2024, were published in Shell’s Annual Report and Accounts, a copy of which was delivered to the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales. The auditor’s report on those accounts was unqualified, did not include a reference to any matters to which the auditor drew attention by way of emphasis without qualifying the report and did not contain a statement under sections 498(2) or 498(3) of the Act.

    Key accounting considerations, significant judgements and estimates

    Future commodity price assumptions and management’s view on the future development of refining and chemicals margins represent a significant estimate and were subject to change in 2024. These assumptions continue to apply for impairment testing purposes in the first quarter 2025. As per the normal process outlined in the 2024 Annual Report and Accounts and Form 20-F, these assumptions are subject to review later this year.

    The discount rates applied for impairment testing and the discount rate applied to provisions are reviewed on a regular basis. Both discount rates applied in the first quarter 2025 remain unchanged compared with 2024.

    2. Segment information

    With effect from January 1, 2025, segment earnings are presented on an Adjusted Earnings basis (Adjusted Earnings), which is the earnings measure used by the Chief Executive Officer, who serves as the Chief Operating Decision Maker, for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance. This aligns with Shell’s focus on performance, discipline and simplification.

    The Adjusted Earnings measure is presented on a current cost of supplies (CCS) basis and aims to facilitate a comparative understanding of Shell’s financial performance from period to period by removing the effects of oil price changes on inventory carrying amounts and removing the effects of identified items. Identified items are in some cases driven by external factors and may, either individually or collectively, hinder the comparative understanding of Shell’s financial results from period to period.

    The segment earnings measure used until December 31, 2024 was CCS earnings. The difference between CCS earnings and Adjusted Earnings are the identified items. Comparative periods are presented below on an Adjusted Earnings basis.

             Page 14


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                               
     
    REVENUE AND ADJUSTED EARNINGS BY SEGMENT    
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
          Third-party revenue    
    9,602    9,294    9,195    Integrated Gas    
    1,510    1,652    1,759    Upstream    
    27,083    27,524    30,041    Marketing    
    21,610    19,992    23,735    Chemicals and Products    
    9,417    7,808    7,737    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    12    10    11    Corporate    
    69,234    66,281    72,478    Total third-party revenue1    
          Inter-segment revenue    
    2,675    2,024    2,404    Integrated Gas    
    9,854    9,931    10,287    Upstream    
    1,849    984    1,355    Marketing    
    8,255    8,656    10,312    Chemicals and Products    
    1,164    1,879    1,005    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    —    —    —    Corporate    
          Adjusted Earnings    
    2,483    2,165    3,680    Integrated Gas    
    2,337    1,682    1,933    Upstream    
    900    839    781    Marketing    
    449    (229)   1,615    Chemicals and Products    
    (42)   (311)   163    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    (457)   (380)   (368)   Corporate    
    5,670    3,766    7,804    Total Adjusted Earnings2    
    5,577    3,661    7,734    Adjusted Earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders    
    94    106    70    Adjusted Earnings attributable to non-controlling interest    

    1.Includes revenue from sources other than from contracts with customers, which mainly comprises the impact of fair value accounting of commodity derivatives.

    2.See Reconciliation of income for the period to Adjusted Earnings below.

             Page 15


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    Cash capital expenditure is a measure used by the Chief Executive Officer for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance.

                               
     
    CASH CAPITAL EXPENDITURE BY SEGMENT
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
          Capital expenditure    
    943    1,123    858    Integrated Gas    
    1,727    2,205    1,766    Upstream    
    252    798    427    Marketing    
    451    1,121    474    Chemicals and Products    
    358    1,214    421    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    17    25    34    Corporate    
    3,748    6,486    3,980    Total capital expenditure    
          Add: Investments in joint ventures and associates    
    174    214    184    Integrated Gas    
    197    (117)   244    Upstream    
      13    38    Marketing    
      271    26    Chemicals and Products    
    30    36      Renewables and Energy Solutions    
        —    Corporate    
    413    421    500    Total investments in joint ventures and associates    
          Add: Investments in equity securities    
    —    —    —    Integrated Gas    
    —    (11)   —    Upstream    
    —    —    —    Marketing    
    —    —    —    Chemicals and Products    
    14    28    10    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    —    —      Corporate    
    15    17    13    Total investments in equity securities    
          Cash capital expenditure    
    1,116    1,337    1,041    Integrated Gas    
    1,923    2,076    2,010    Upstream    
    256    811    465    Marketing    
    458    1,392    500    Chemicals and Products    
    403    1,277    438    Renewables and Energy Solutions    
    19    30    37    Corporate    
    4,175    6,924    4,493    Total Cash capital expenditure    

             Page 16


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                               
                 
    RECONCILIATION OF INCOME FOR THE PERIOD TO ADJUSTED EARNINGS    
    Quarters $ million        
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    4,780    928    7,358    Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders    
    95    113    82    Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest    
    4,875    1,041    7,439    Income/(loss) for the period    
    (15)   (75)   (360)   Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation    
    (2)   23    84    Add: Tax on current cost of supplies adjustment    
    (510) (3,008) (1,244) Less: Identified items adjustment before taxation    
    301 (230) (604) Add: Tax on identified items adjustment    
    5,670    3,766    7,804    Adjusted Earnings    
    5,577    3,661    7,734    Adjusted Earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders    
    94    106    70    Adjusted Earnings attributable to non-controlling interest    

    Identified items

    The objective of identified items is to remove material impacts on net income/loss arising from transactions which are generally uncontrollable and unusual (infrequent or non-recurring) in nature or giving rise to a mismatch between accounting and economic results, or certain transactions that are generally excluded from underlying results in the industry.

    Identified items comprise: divestment gains and losses, impairments and impairment reversals, redundancy and restructuring, fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts that gives rise to a mismatch between accounting and economic results, the impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on certain deferred tax balances, and other items.

                                                   
     
    Q1 2025 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation              
    Divestment gains/(losses) (106) (1) 154 (57) (15) (187)
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (341) (21) 10 (293) (38)
    Redundancy and restructuring (44) (1) (15) (9) (13) (9) 4
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 194 420 (1) 12 (258) 20
    Other2 (212) (70) 4 (101) (46)
    Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation (510) 348 121 (44) (679) (260) 4
    Less: Total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit) 301 43 378 4 (99) (54) 29
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period              
    Divestment gains/(losses) (208) 8 (61) (12) (143)
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (317) (15) 6 (277) (31)
    Redundancy and restructuring (24) (1) (5) (1) (12) (7) 2
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 187 362 7 (202) 20
    Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances3 108 4 132 (28)
    Other2 (558) (59) (377) (77) (45)
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings (811) 306 (257) (49) (581) (205) (26)
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to non-controlling interest
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders (811) 306 (257) (49) (581) (205) (26)

    1.Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts: In the ordinary course of business, Shell enters into contracts to supply or purchase oil and gas products, as well as power and environmental products. Shell also enters into contracts for tolling, pipeline and storage capacity. Derivative contracts are entered into for mitigation of resulting economic exposures (generally price exposure) and these derivative contracts are carried at period-end

             Page 17


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    market price (fair value), with movements in fair value recognised in income for the period. Supply and purchase contracts entered into for operational purposes, as well as contracts for tolling, pipeline and storage capacity, are, by contrast, recognised when the transaction occurs; furthermore, inventory is carried at historical cost or net realisable value, whichever is lower. As a consequence, accounting mismatches occur because: (a) the supply or purchase transaction is recognised in a different period; or (b) the inventory is measured on a different basis. In addition, certain contracts are, due to pricing or delivery conditions, deemed to contain embedded derivatives or written options and are also required to be carried at fair value even though they are entered into for operational purposes. The accounting impacts are reported as identified items.

    2.Other identified items represent other credits or charges that based on Shell management’s assessment hinder the comparative understanding of Shell’s financial results from period to period.

    3.Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances represents the impact on tax balances of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments arising on: (a) the conversion to dollars of the local currency tax base of non-monetary assets and liabilities, as well as recognised tax losses (this primarily impacts the Integrated Gas and Upstream segments); and (b) the conversion of dollar-denominated inter-segment loans to local currency, leading to taxable exchange rate gains or losses (this primarily impacts the Corporate segment).

                                                   
     
    Q4 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation              
    Divestment gains/(losses) (288) (99) (66) (216) 42 51
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (2,554) (523) (183) (493) (288) (1,065) (1)
    Redundancy and restructuring (175) (27) (62) (70) (5) (11) (1)
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 209 136 (14) 58 (38) 67
    Other1 (200) (165) (33) (2)
    Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation (3,008) (514) (491) (753) (291) (958) (2)
    Less: Total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit) (230) (92) 160 (17) (191) (43) (47)
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period              
    Divestment gains/(losses) (321) (96) (51) (247) 33 40
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (2,170) (339) (152) (458) (224) (996) (1)
    Redundancy and restructuring (115) (16) (34) (52) (3) (8) (1)
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 184 109 (4) 46 (17) 50
    Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances1 (210) (57) (199) 46
    Other1 (147) (22) (212) (25) 113
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings (2,778) (421) (651) (736) (99) (914) 45
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to non-controlling interest
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders (2,778) (421) (651) (736) (99) (914) 45

    1.For a detailed description, see the corresponding footnotes to the Q1 2025 identified items table above.

             Page 18


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                                   
     
    Q1 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation              
    Divestment gains/(losses) 10 (3) 27 (15) (9) 10
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (227) (8) (96) (4) (178) 59
    Redundancy and restructuring (74) (1) (13) (20) (18) (15) (6)
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 (1,079) (1,068) (2) 6 (416) 400
    Other1 126 4 38 23 45 16
    Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation (1,244) (1,075) (46) (11) (575) 469 (6)
    Less: Total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit) (604) (157) (385) (4) (118) 80 (20)
    Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period              
    Divestment gains/(losses) (4) (2) 10 (11) (7) 6
    Impairment reversals/(impairments) (186) (5) (102) (3) (152) 77
    Redundancy and restructuring (53) (1) (9) (15) (14) (11) (4)
    Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts1 (896) (887) 5 (319) 306
    Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances1 403 (27) 412 18
    Other1 95 3 28 17 34 12
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings (641) (919) 339 (7) (458) 390 14
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to non-controlling interest
    Impact on Adjusted Earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders (641) (919) 339 (7) (458) 390 14

    1.For a detailed description, see the corresponding footnotes to the Q1 2025 identified items table above.

    The identified items categories above may include after-tax impacts of identified items of joint ventures and associates which are fully reported within “Share of profit/(loss) of joint ventures and associates” in the Consolidated Statement of Income, and fully reported as identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation in the table above. Identified items related to subsidiaries are consolidated and reported across appropriate lines of the Consolidated Statement of Income.

    3. Earnings per share

                               
     
    EARNINGS PER SHARE
    Quarters    
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    4,780    928    7,358    Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders ($ million)    
               
          Weighted average number of shares used as the basis for determining:    
    6,033.5    6,148.4    6,440.1    Basic earnings per share (million)    
    6,087.8    6,213.9    6,504.3    Diluted earnings per share (million)    

             Page 19


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    4. Share capital

                             
     
    ISSUED AND FULLY PAID ORDINARY SHARES OF €0.07 EACH
      Number of shares   Nominal value
    ($ million)
    At January 1, 2025 6,115,031,158      510     
    Repurchases of shares (98,948,766)     (8)    
    At March 31, 2025 6,016,082,392      502     
    At January 1, 2024 6,524,109,049      544     
    Repurchases of shares (88,893,999)     (7)    
    At March 31, 2024 6,435,215,050      537     

    At Shell plc’s Annual General Meeting on May 21, 2024, the Board was authorised to allot ordinary shares in Shell plc, and to grant rights to subscribe for, or to convert, any security into ordinary shares in Shell plc, up to an aggregate nominal amount of approximately €150 million (representing approximately 2,147 million ordinary shares of €0.07 each), and to list such shares or rights on any stock exchange. This authority expires at the earlier of the close of business on August 20, 2025, or the end of the Annual General Meeting to be held in 2025, unless previously renewed, revoked or varied by Shell plc in a general meeting.

    5. Other reserves

                                             
     
    OTHER RESERVES
    $ million Merger reserve Share premium reserve Capital redemption reserve Share plan reserve Accumulated other comprehensive income Total
    At January 1, 2025 37,298    154    270    1,417    (19,373)   19,766   
    Other comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders —    —    —    —    1,967    1,967   
    Transfer from other comprehensive income —    —    —    —    11    11   
    Repurchases of shares —    —      —    —     
    Share-based compensation —    —    —    (663)   —    (663)  
    At March 31, 2025 37,298    154    279    754    (17,394)   21,090   
    At January 1, 2024 37,298    154    236    1,308    (17,851)   21,145   
    Other comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders —    —    —    —    (1,420)   (1,420)  
    Transfer from other comprehensive income —    —    —    —    138    138   
    Repurchases of shares —    —      —    —     
    Share-based compensation —    —    —    (426)   —    (426)  
    At March 31, 2024 37,298    154    244    882    (19,132)   19,445   

    The merger reserve and share premium reserve were established as a consequence of Shell plc (formerly Royal Dutch Shell plc) becoming the single parent company of Royal Dutch Petroleum Company and The “Shell” Transport and Trading Company, p.l.c., now The Shell Transport and Trading Company Limited, in 2005. The merger reserve increased in 2016 following the issuance of shares for the acquisition of BG Group plc. The capital redemption reserve was established in connection with repurchases of shares of Shell plc. The share plan reserve is in respect of equity-settled share-based compensation plans.

    6. Derivative financial instruments and debt excluding lease liabilities

    As disclosed in the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended December 31, 2024, presented in the Annual Report and Accounts and Form 20-F for that year, Shell is exposed to the risks of changes in fair value of its financial assets and liabilities. The fair values of the financial assets and liabilities are defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Methods and assumptions used to estimate the fair values at March 31, 2025, are consistent with those used in the year ended December 31, 2024, though the carrying amounts of derivative financial instruments have changed since that date.

             Page 20


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    The movement of the derivative financial instruments between December 31, 2024 and March 31, 2025 is a decrease of $732 million for the current assets and a decrease of $1,020 million for the current liabilities.

    The table below provides the comparison of the fair value with the carrying amount of debt excluding lease liabilities, disclosed in accordance with IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures.

                     
     
    DEBT EXCLUDING LEASE LIABILITIES
    $ million March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024
    Carrying amount1 48,023    48,376   
    Fair value2 44,240    44,119   

    1.    Shell issued no debt under the US shelf or under the Euro medium-term note programmes during the first quarter 2025.

    2.     Mainly determined from the prices quoted for these securities.

    7. Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements

    Consolidated Statement of Income

    Interest and other income

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    302    683    907    Interest and other income/(expenses)    
          Of which:    
    481    548    588    Interest income    
      25    23    Dividend income (from investments in equity securities)    
    (127)   (288)   10    Net gains/(losses) on sales and revaluation of non-current assets and businesses    
    (137)   267    66    Net foreign exchange gains/(losses) on financing activities    
    85    131    219    Other    

    Depreciation, depletion and amortisation

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    5,441    7,520    5,881    Depreciation, depletion and amortisation    
          Of which:    
    5,130 5,829 5,654 Depreciation    
    311 1,797 382 Impairments    
    (1) (106) (154) Impairment reversals    

    Impairments recognised in the first quarter 2025 of $311 million pre-tax ($287 million post-tax) principally relate to Chemicals and Products.

    Impairments recognised in the fourth quarter 2024 of $2,659 million pre-tax ($2,245 million post-tax), of which $1,797 million recognised in depreciation, depletion and amortisation and $863 million recognised in share of profit of joint ventures and associates, mainly relate to Renewables and Energy Solutions ($1,068 million pre-tax; $1,000 million post-tax), Integrated Gas ($532 million pre-tax; $345 million post-tax), Marketing ($495 million pre-tax; $459 million post-tax), Chemicals and Products ($315 million pre-tax; $247 million post-tax) and Upstream ($248 million pre-tax; $194 million post-tax).

    Impairments recognised in the first quarter 2024 of $382 million pre-tax ($332 million post-tax) include smaller

    impairments in various segments.

             Page 21


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    Taxation charge/credit

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    4,083    3,164    3,604    Taxation charge/(credit)    
          Of which:    
    4,024 3,125 3,525 Income tax excluding Pillar Two income tax    
    59 39 79 Income tax related to Pillar Two income tax    

    As required by IAS 12 Income Taxes, Shell has applied the exception to recognising and disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to Pillar Two income taxes.

    Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

    Currency translation differences

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    1,711    (4,899)   (1,995)   Currency translation differences    
          Of which:    
    1,618 (5,028) (1,983) Recognised in Other comprehensive income    
    92 129 (12) (Gain)/loss reclassified to profit or loss    

    Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet

    Other intangible assets

                       
       
    $ million      
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024  
    Other intangible assets 11,365    9,480     
           

    The increase in other intangible assets as at March 31, 2025 compared with December 31, 2024 is mainly related to initial recognition at fair value of favourable LNG, gas offtake and sales contracts. These were recognised following completion of the acquisition of Pavilion Energy Pte. Ltd. during the first quarter 2025. The fair value of unfavourable LNG, gas offtake and sales contracts acquired was recognised under trade and other payables.

    Assets classified as held for sale

                       
       
    $ million      
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024  
    Assets classified as held for sale 10,881    9,857     
    Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale 8,001    6,203     

    Assets classified as held for sale and associated liabilities at March 31, 2025 principally relate to Shell’s UK offshore oil and gas assets in Upstream, mining interests in Canada and an energy and chemicals park in Singapore, both in Chemicals and Products. Upon completion of the sale, Shell’s UK offshore assets will be derecognised in exchange for a 50% interest in a newly formed joint venture.

    The major classes of assets and liabilities classified as held for sale at March 31, 2025, are Property, plant and equipment ($8,866 million; December 31, 2024: $8,283 million), Inventories ($1,003 million; December 31, 2024: $1,180 million), Decommissioning and other provisions ($3,228 million; December 31, 2024: $3,053 million), deferred tax liabilities ($2,823 million; December 31, 2024: $2,042 million), Trade and other payables ($1,000 million; December 31, 2024: $484 million) and Debt ($839 million; December 31, 2024: $624 million).

             Page 22


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

    Cash flow from operating activities – Other

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    570    (856)   509    Other    

    ‘Cash flow from operating activities – Other’ for the first quarter 2025 includes $652 million of net inflows (fourth quarter 2024: $1,447 million net outflows; first quarter 2024: $188 million net inflows) due to the timing of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes in Europe and North America and $255 million in relation to reversal of currency exchange gains on Cash and cash equivalents (fourth quarter 2024: $672 million losses; first quarter 2024: $253 million losses).

    Cash flow from investing activities – Other investing cash outflows

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    (1,394)   (655)   (1,494)   Other investing cash outflows    

    ‘Cash flow from investing activities – Other investing cash outflows’ for the first quarter 2025 includes $818 million secured term loans provided to The Shell Petroleum Development Company of Nigeria Limited (SPDC) upon completion of the sale of SPDC. The first quarter 2024 includes $645 million of debt securities acquired in the Corporate segment.

    8. Reconciliation of Operating expenses and Total Debt

                               
     
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES    
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    5,549    5,839    5,810    Production and manufacturing expenses    
    2,840    3,231    2,975    Selling, distribution and administrative expenses    
    185    331    212    Research and development    
    8,575    9,401    8,997    Operating expenses    
                               
                 
    RECONCILIATION OF TOTAL DEBT    
    March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024 $ million    
    11,391    11,630    11,046    Current debt    
    65,120    65,448    68,886    Non-current debt    
    76,511    77,078    79,931    Total debt    

             Page 23


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE (NON-GAAP) MEASURES

    A.Adjusted Earnings, Adjusted earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation (“Adjusted EBITDA”) and Cash flow from operating activities

    The “Adjusted Earnings” measure aims to facilitate a comparative understanding of Shell’s financial performance from period to period by removing the effects of oil price changes on inventory carrying amounts and removing the effects of identified items. These items are in some cases driven by external factors and may, either individually or collectively, hinder the comparative understanding of Shell’s financial results from period to period. This measure excludes earnings attributable to non-controlling interest when presenting the total Shell Group result but includes these items when presenting individual segment Adjusted Earnings as set out in the table below.

    We define “Adjusted EBITDA” as “Income/(loss) for the period” adjusted for current cost of supplies; identified items; tax charge/(credit); depreciation, amortisation and depletion; exploration well write-offs and net interest expense. All items include the non-controlling interest component. Management uses this measure to evaluate Shell’s performance in the period and over time.

                                                   
     
    Q1 2025 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Income/(loss) for the period 4,875 2,789 2,080 814 (77) (247) (483)
    Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (15)     52 (67)    
    Add: Tax on current cost of supplies adjustment (2)     (14) 12    
    Less: Identified items (811) 306 (257) (49) (581) (205) (26)
    Less: Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest 95            
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to non-controlling interest (1)            
    Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest            
    Adjusted Earnings 5,577            
    Add: Non-controlling interest 94            
    Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest 5,670 2,483 2,337 900 449 (42) (457)
    Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items 3,784 803 2,619 391 99 63 (191)
    Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments 5,130 1,404 2,213 566 852 90 6
    Add: Exploration well write-offs 28 29        
    Add: Interest expense excluding identified items 1,119 51 200 12 14 2 841
    Less: Interest income 481 4 11 4 2 461
    Adjusted EBITDA 15,250 4,735 7,387 1,869 1,410 111 (261)
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (15)     52 (67)    
    Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit) (178) (286) (159) 203 54 10
    Derivative financial instruments (38) 542 14 10 (508) (169) 73
    Taxation paid (2,900) (773) (1,999) (174) 63 52 (68)
    Other (206) (68) (386) 396 125 (17) (257)
    (Increase)/decrease in working capital (2,663) (687) (913) (344) (1,081) 380 (19)
    Cash flow from operating activities 9,281 3,463 3,945 1,907 130 367 (531)

             Page 24


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                                   
     
    Q4 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Income/(loss) for the period 1,041 1,744 1,031 103 (276) (1,226) (335)
    Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (75)     (2) (73)    
    Add: Tax on current cost of supplies adjustment 23     2 21    
    Less: Identified items (2,778) (421) (651) (736) (99) (914) 45
    Less: Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest 113            
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to non-controlling interest (7)            
    Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest            
    Adjusted Earnings 3,661            
    Add: Non-controlling interest 106            
    Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest 3,766 2,165 1,682 839 (229) (311) (380)
    Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items 3,371 635 2,618 266 (198) 97 (46)
    Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments 5,829 1,440 2,803 587 896 96 8
    Add: Exploration well write-offs 649 277 372
    Add: Interest expense excluding identified items 1,213 54 201 17 16 2 923
    Less: Interest income 548 3 10 7 529
    Adjusted EBITDA 14,281 4,568 7,676 1,709 475 (123) (24)
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (75)     (2) (73)    
    Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit) 451 110 (22) 172 139 51
    Derivative financial instruments 319 120 (28) (8) 230 533 (527)
    Taxation paid (2,910) (635) (2,019) (130) 36 (41) (120)
    Other (1,461) 114 (486) (1,227) (313) 77 375
    (Increase)/decrease in working capital 2,407 114 (611) 845 1,394 353 312
    Cash flow from operating activities 13,162 4,391 4,509 1,363 2,032 850 16
                                                   
     
    Q1 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Income/(loss) for the period 7,439 2,761 2,272 896 1,311 553 (354)
    Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (360)     (153) (207)    
    Add: Tax on current cost of supplies adjustment 84     30 54    
    Less: Identified items (641) (919) 339 (7) (458) 390 14
    Less: Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest 82            
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to non-controlling interest (12)            
    Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest            
    Adjusted Earnings 7,734            
    Add: Non-controlling interest 70            
    Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest 7,804 3,680 1,933 781 1,615 163 (368)
    Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items 4,124 996 2,522 358 338 (91)
    Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments 5,654 1,410 2,727 535 870 106 6
    Add: Exploration well write-offs 554 8 546
    Add: Interest expense excluding identified items 1,163 42 169 12 17 1 922
    Less: Interest income 588 10 14 4 560
    Adjusted EBITDA 18,711 6,136 7,888 1,686 2,826 267 (92)
    Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation (360)     (153) (207)    
    Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit) (582) (197) (546) 93 56 13
    Derivative financial instruments 306 (1,080) (3) (39) (402) 1,978 (149)
    Taxation paid (2,616) (467) (1,802) (175) (19) (244) 91
    Other (97) 45 (231) 393 (378) (30) 104
    (Increase)/decrease in working capital (2,752) 275 421 (792) (2,639) 481 (499)
    Cash flow from operating activities 13,330 4,712 5,727 1,319 (349) 2,466 (545)

    Identified items

    The objective of identified items is to remove material impacts on net income/loss arising from transactions which are generally uncontrollable and unusual (infrequent or non-recurring) in nature or giving rise to a mismatch between accounting and economic results, or certain transactions that are generally excluded from underlying results in the industry.

             Page 25


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    Identified items comprise: divestment gains and losses, impairments and impairment reversals, redundancy and restructuring, fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts that gives rise to a mismatch between accounting and economic results, the impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on certain deferred tax balances, and other items.

    See Note 2 “Segment information” for details.

    B.    Adjusted Earnings per share

    Adjusted Earnings per share is calculated as Adjusted Earnings (see Reference A), divided by the weighted average number of shares used as the basis for basic earnings per share (see Note 3).

    C.    Cash capital expenditure

    Cash capital expenditure represents cash spent on maintaining and developing assets as well as on investments in the period. Management regularly monitors this measure as a key lever to delivering sustainable cash flows. Cash capital expenditure is the sum of the following lines from the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows: Capital expenditure, Investments in joint ventures and associates and Investments in equity securities.

    See Note 2 “Segment information” for the reconciliation of cash capital expenditure.

    D.    Capital employed and Return on average capital employed

    Return on average capital employed (“ROACE”) measures the efficiency of Shell’s utilisation of the capital that it employs.

    The measure refers to Capital employed which consists of total equity, current debt, and non-current debt reduced by cash and cash equivalents.

    In this calculation, the sum of Adjusted Earnings (see Reference A) plus non-controlling interest (NCI) excluding identified items for the current and previous three quarters, adjusted for after-tax interest expense and after-tax interest income, is expressed as a percentage of the average capital employed excluding cash and cash equivalents for the same period.

                           
     
    $ million Quarters
      Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Current debt 11,046 9,931 9,044
    Non-current debt 68,886 71,610 76,098
    Total equity 188,304 188,362 195,530
    Less: Cash and cash equivalents (39,949) (38,774) (42,074)
    Capital employed – opening 228,286 231,128 238,598
    Current debt 11,391 11,630 11,046
    Non-current debt 65,120 65,448 68,886
    Total equity 180,670 180,168 188,304
    Less: Cash and cash equivalents (35,601) (39,110) (39,949)
    Capital employed – closing 221,580 218,134 228,286
    Capital employed – average 224,933 224,630 233,442

             Page 26


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                           
     
    $ million Quarters
      Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024
    Adjusted Earnings – current and previous three quarters (Reference A) 21,558 23,716 26,338
    Add: Income/(loss) attributable to NCI – current and previous three quarters 441 427 295
    Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to NCI – current and previous three quarters 25 14 (24)
    Less: Identified items attributable to NCI (Reference A) – current and previous three quarters 18 18 (11)
    Adjusted Earnings plus NCI excluding identified items – current and previous three quarters 22,005 24,139 26,620
    Add: Interest expense after tax – current and previous three quarters 2,639 2,701 2,718
    Less: Interest income after tax on cash and cash equivalents – current and previous three quarters 1,329 1,389 1,368
    Adjusted Earnings plus NCI excluding identified items before interest expense and interest income – current and previous three quarters 23,315 25,452 27,971
    Capital employed – average 224,933 224,630 233,442
    ROACE on an Adjusted Earnings plus NCI basis 10.4% 11.3% 12.0%

    E.    Net debt and gearing

    Net debt is defined as the sum of current and non-current debt, less cash and cash equivalents, adjusted for the fair value of derivative financial instruments used to hedge foreign exchange and interest rate risk relating to debt, and associated collateral balances. Management considers this adjustment useful because it reduces the volatility of net debt caused by fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates, and eliminates the potential impact of related collateral payments or receipts. Debt-related derivative financial instruments are a subset of the derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities presented on the balance sheet. Collateral balances are reported under “Trade and other receivables” or “Trade and other payables” as appropriate.

    Gearing is a measure of Shell’s capital structure and is defined as net debt (total debt less cash and cash equivalents) as a percentage of total capital (net debt plus total equity).

                           
     
    $ million  
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024
    Current debt 11,391    11,630    11,046   
    Non-current debt 65,120    65,448    68,886   
    Total debt 76,511    77,078    79,931   
    Of which: Lease liabilities 28,488    28,702    26,885   
    Add: Debt-related derivative financial instruments: net liability/(asset) 1,905    2,469    1,888   
    Add: Collateral on debt-related derivatives: net liability/(asset) (1,295)   (1,628)   (1,357)  
    Less: Cash and cash equivalents (35,601)   (39,110)   (39,949)  
    Net debt 41,521    38,809    40,513   
    Total equity 180,670    180,168    188,304   
    Total capital 222,190    218,974    228,817   
    Gearing 18.7  % 17.7  % 17.7  %

    F.    Operating expenses and Underlying operating expenses

    Operating expenses

    Operating expenses is a measure of Shell’s cost management performance, comprising the following items from the Consolidated Statement of Income: production and manufacturing expenses; selling, distribution and administrative expenses; and research and development expenses.

             Page 27


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                                                   
     
    Q1 2025 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Production and manufacturing expenses 5,549 947 2,139 349 1,621 486 8
    Selling, distribution and administrative expenses 2,840 38 42 2,053 442 153 111
    Research and development 185 22 32 42 25 21 43
    Operating expenses 8,575 1,006 2,213 2,444 2,088 661 162
                                                   
     
    Q4 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Production and manufacturing expenses 5,839 982 2,470 270 1,632 480 5
    Selling, distribution and administrative expenses 3,231 39 96 2,258 471 241 126
    Research and development 331 40 69 73 46 37 66
    Operating expenses 9,401 1,061 2,635 2,602 2,149 757 196
                                                   
     
    Q1 2024 $ million
      Total Integrated Gas Upstream Marketing Chemicals and Products Renewables and Energy Solutions Corporate
    Production and manufacturing expenses 5,810 956 2,269 366 1,634 579 5
    Selling, distribution and administrative expenses 2,975 62 58 2,188 420 158 89
    Research and development 212 26 58 34 34 12 49
    Operating expenses 8,997 1,044 2,385 2,587 2,088 749 144

    Underlying operating expenses

    Underlying operating expenses is a measure aimed at facilitating a comparative understanding of performance from period to period by removing the effects of identified items, which, either individually or collectively, can cause volatility, in some cases driven by external factors.

                               
         
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    8,575    9,401    8,997    Operating expenses    
    (44)   (174)   (73)   Redundancy and restructuring (charges)/reversal    
    (101)   (88)   —    (Provisions)/reversal    
    23    —    130    Other    
    (121)   (262)   57    Total identified items    
    8,453    9,138    9,054    Underlying operating expenses    

    G.    Free cash flow and Organic free cash flow

    Free cash flow is used to evaluate cash available for financing activities, including dividend payments and debt servicing, after investment in maintaining and growing the business. It is defined as the sum of “Cash flow from operating activities” and “Cash flow from investing activities”.

    Cash flows from acquisition and divestment activities are removed from Free cash flow to arrive at the Organic free cash flow, a measure used by management to evaluate the generation of free cash flow without these activities.

             Page 28


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    9,281    13,162    13,330    Cash flow from operating activities    
    (3,959)   (4,431)   (3,528)   Cash flow from investing activities    
    5,322    8,731    9,802    Free cash flow    
    597    805    1,025    Less: Divestment proceeds (Reference I)    
    45      —    Add: Tax paid on divestments (reported under “Other investing cash outflows”)    
    130    525    62    Add: Cash outflows related to inorganic capital expenditure1    
    4,899    8,453    8,839    Organic free cash flow2    

    1.Cash outflows related to inorganic capital expenditure includes portfolio actions which expand Shell’s activities through acquisitions and restructuring activities as reported in capital expenditure lines in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows.

    2.Free cash flow less divestment proceeds, adding back outflows related to inorganic expenditure.

    H.    Cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements

    Working capital movements are defined as the sum of the following items in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows: (i) (increase)/decrease in inventories, (ii) (increase)/decrease in current receivables, and (iii) increase/(decrease) in current payables.

    Cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements is a measure used by Shell to analyse its operating cash generation over time excluding the timing effects of changes in inventories and operating receivables and payables from period to period.

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    9,281    13,162    13,330    Cash flow from operating activities    
    854    131    (608)   (Increase)/decrease in inventories    
    (2,610)   751    (195)   (Increase)/decrease in current receivables    
    (907)   1,524    (1,949)   Increase/(decrease) in current payables    
    (2,663)   2,407    (2,752)   (Increase)/decrease in working capital    
    11,944    10,755    16,082    Cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements    

    I.    Divestment proceeds

    Divestment proceeds represent cash received from divestment activities in the period. Management regularly monitors this measure as a key lever to deliver free cash flow.

                               
     
    Quarters $ million  
    Q1 2025 Q4 2024 Q1 2024      
    559    493 323 Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and businesses    
    33    305 133 Proceeds from joint ventures and associates from sale, capital reduction and repayment of long-term loans    
      6 569 Proceeds from sale of equity securities    
    597    805 1,025 Divestment proceeds    

             Page 29


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

    All amounts shown throughout this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report are unaudited. All peak production figures in Portfolio Developments are quoted at 100% expected production. The numbers presented throughout this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report may not sum precisely to the totals provided and percentages may not precisely reflect the absolute figures, due to rounding.

    The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience to reference Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The terms “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

    Forward-Looking statements

    This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; ‘‘anticipate’’; “aspire”, “aspiration”, ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; “desire”; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; “vision”; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks, including climate change; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including tariffs and regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war and the conflict in the Middle East, and a significant cyber security, data privacy or IT incident; (n) the pace of the energy transition; and (o) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2024 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, May 2, 2025. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report.

    Shell’s net carbon intensity

    Also, in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report we may refer to Shell’s “net carbon intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “net carbon intensity” or NCI is for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

    Shell’s net-zero emissions target

    Shell’s operating plan and outlook are forecasted for a three-year period and ten-year period, respectively, and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next three and ten years. Accordingly, the outlook reflects our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plan and outlook cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is outside our planning period. Such future operating plans and outlooks could include changes to our portfolio, efficiency improvements and the use of carbon capture and storage and carbon credits. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans and outlooks to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

    Forward-Looking non-GAAP measures

    This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as cash capital expenditure and Adjusted Earnings. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile those non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of Shell, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are calculated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

    The contents of websites referred to in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report do not form part of this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report.

    We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC. Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

             Page 30


    SHELL PLC
    1st QUARTER 2025 UNAUDITED RESULTS

    This announcement contains inside information.

    May 2, 2025

         
    The information in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report reflects the unaudited consolidated financial position and results of Shell plc. Company No. 4366849, Registered Office: Shell Centre, London, SE1 7NA, England, UK.

    Contacts:

    – Sean Ashley, Company Secretary

    – Media: International +44 (0) 207 934 5550; U.S. and Canada: https://www.shell.us/about-us/news-and-insights/media/submit-an-inquiry.html

    LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70

    Classification: Inside Information

             Page 31

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Shell plc publishes first quarter 2025 press release

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    London, May 2, 2025

    “Shell delivered another solid set of results in the first quarter of 2025. We further strengthened our leading LNG business by completing the acquisition of Pavilion Energy, and high-graded our portfolio with the completion of the Nigeria onshore and the Singapore Energy and Chemicals Park divestments.

    Our strong performance and resilient balance sheet give us the confidence to commence another $3.5 billion of buybacks for the next three months, consistent with the strategic direction we set out at our Capital Markets Day in March.”

    Shell plc Chief Executive Officer, Wael Sawan


     

    SOLID RESULTS; RESILIENT BALANCE SHEET; CONSISTENT DISTRIBUTIONS

    • Q1 2025 Adjusted Earnings1 of $5.6 billion reflect strong performance across the business. CFFO excluding working capital was $11.9 billion for the quarter. Working capital outflow was $2.7 billion in Q1 2025.
    • Strengthened LNG trading and optimisation capabilities with the Pavilion Energy acquisition and high-graded the portfolio with the completion of the divestments of the Singapore Energy and Chemicals Park2, and SPDC3 in Nigeria.
    • Disciplined capital allocation, with 2025 cash capex outlook of $20 – 22 billion.
    • Commencing another $3.5 billion share buyback programme for the next 3 months, making this the 14th consecutive quarter of at least $3 billion in buybacks. Total shareholder distributions paid over the last 4 quarters were 45% of CFFO, consistent with the 40 – 50% of CFFO through the cycle distribution target announced at Capital Markets Day 2025.
    • Resilient balance sheet with gearing (including leases) of 19%.
    $ million1 Adj. Earnings Adj. EBITDA CFFO Cash capex
    Integrated Gas 2,483 4,735 3,463 1,116
    Upstream 2,337 7,387 3,945 1,923
    Marketing 900 1,869 1,907 256
    Chemicals & Products4 449 1,410 130 458
    Renewables & Energy Solutions (42) 111 367 403
    Corporate (457) (261) (531) 19
    Less: Non-controlling interest (NCI) 94      
    Shell Q1 2025 5,577 15,250 9,281 4,175
    Q4 2024 3,661 14,281 13,162 6,924

    1Income/(loss) attributable to shareholders for Q1 2025 is $4.8 billion. Reconciliation of non-GAAP measures can be found in the unaudited results, available at www.shell.com/investors.
    2 Completed on April 1, 2025.
    3The Shell Petroleum Development Company of Nigeria Limited.
    4Chemicals & Products Adjusted Earnings at a subsegment level are as follows: Chemicals $(0.1) billion and Products $0.6 billion.


     

    • CFFO excluding working capital is $11.9 billion in Q1 2025 and reflects tax payments of $2.9 billion. Working capital outflow is $2.7 billion, consistent with outflows as we have seen in the first quarters of recent years.
    • Net debt of $41.5 billion includes the lease additions related to the Pavilion Energy acquisition as well as a drawdown on the loan facilities provided at the completion of the sale of SPDC in Nigeria.
    $ billion1 Q1 2024 Q2 2024 Q3 2024 Q4 2024 Q1 2025
    Working capital (2.8) (0.3) 2.7 2.4 (2.7)
    Divestment proceeds 1.0 0.8 0.2 0.8 0.6
    Free cash flow 9.8 10.2 10.8 8.7 5.3
    Net debt 40.5 38.3 35.2 38.8 41.5

    1 Reconciliation of non-GAAP measures can be found in the unaudited results, available at www.shell.com/investors.


     

    Q1 2025 FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE DRIVERS

    INTEGRATED GAS

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025 Q2 2025 outlook
    Realised liquids price ($/bbl) 63 64
    Realised gas price ($/thousand scf) 8.1 7.4
    Production (kboe/d) 905 927 890 – 950
    LNG liquefaction volumes (MT) 7.1 6.6 6.3 – 6.9
    LNG sales volumes (MT) 15.5 16.5
    • Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q4 2024, reflecting lower exploration well write-offs. Trading and optimisation results were in line with Q4 2024, despite higher unfavourable (non-cash) impact from expiring hedging contracts.
    • Q2 2025 production and liquefaction outlook reflects higher scheduled maintenance across the portfolio.

    UPSTREAM

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025 Q2 2025 outlook
    Realised liquids price ($/bbl) 71 71
    Realised gas price ($/thousand scf) 7.0 7.4
    Liquids production (kboe/d) 1,332 1,335
    Gas production (million scf/d) 3,056 3,020
    Total production (kboe/d) 1,859 1,855 1,560 – 1,760
    • Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q4 2024, reflecting lower depreciation following year-end reserves updates and lower well write-offs, partially offset by lower sales volumes.
    • Q2 2025 production outlook reflects scheduled maintenance and the completed sale of SPDC in March 2025.

    MARKETING

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025 Q2 2025 outlook
    Marketing sales volumes (kb/d) 2,795 2,674 2,600 – 3,100
    Mobility (kb/d) 2,041 1,964
    Lubricants (kb/d) 77 87
    Sectors & Decarbonisation (kb/d) 678 623
    • Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q4 2024, supported by seasonally stronger margins in Lubricants.

    CHEMICALS & PRODUCTS

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025 Q2 2025 outlook1
    Refinery processing intake (kb/d) 1,215 1,362
    Chemicals sales volumes (kT) 2,926 2,813
    Refinery utilisation (%) 76 85 87 – 95
    Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation (%) 75 81 74 – 82
    Global indicative refining margin ($/bbl) 5.5 6.2
    Global indicative chemical margin ($/t) 138 126

    1Following the Singapore Energy and Chemicals Park divestment, IRM, ICM and associated sensitivities have been updated for Q2 2025; see the guidance tab of the Quarterly Databook, available at www.shell.com/investors.

    • Trading and optimisation results were significantly higher than in Q4 2024 and in line with contributions in Q2 and Q3 of 2024, while the Chemicals results continued to be impacted by a weak margin environment.
    • Q2 2025 outlook reflects the completed sale of the Energy and Chemicals Park in Singapore.

    RENEWABLES & ENERGY SOLUTIONS

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025
    External power sales (TWh) 76 76
    Sales of pipeline gas to end-use customers (TWh) 165 184
    Renewables power generation capacity (GW)* 7.4 7.5
    • in operation (GW)
    3.4 3.5
    • under construction and/or committed for sale (GW)
    4.0 4.0

    *Excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.

    • Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q4 2024, with higher seasonal demand and volatility driving higher trading and optimisation, particularly in the Americas.

    Renewables and Energy Solutions includes activities such as renewable power generation, the marketing and trading and optimisation of power and pipeline gas, as well as carbon credits, and digitally enabled customer solutions. It also includes the production and marketing of hydrogen, development of commercial carbon capture and storage hubs, investment in nature-based projects that avoid or reduce carbon emissions, and Shell Ventures, which invests in companies that work to accelerate the energy and mobility transformation.

    CORPORATE

    Key data Q4 2024 Q1 2025 Q2 2025 outlook
    Adjusted Earnings ($ billion) (0.4) (0.5) (0.6) – (0.4)

    UPCOMING INVESTOR EVENTS

    May 20, 2025 Annual General Meeting
    July 31, 2025 Second quarter 2025 results and dividends
    October 30, 2025 Third quarter 2025 results and dividends


     

    USEFUL LINKS

    Results materials Q1 2025
    Quarterly Databook Q1 2025
    Webcast registration Q1 2025
    Dividend announcement Q1 2025
    Capital Markets Day 2025 materials


     

    ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE (NON-GAAP) MEASURES
    This announcement includes certain measures that are calculated and presented on the basis of methodologies other than in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) such as IFRS, including Adjusted Earnings, Adjusted EBITDA, CFFO excluding working capital movements, free cash flow, Divestment proceeds and Net debt. This information, along with comparable GAAP measures, is useful to investors because it provides a basis for measuring Shell plc’s operating performance and ability to retire debt and invest in new business opportunities. Shell plc’s management uses these financial measures, along with the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures, in evaluating the business performance.

    This announcement may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as Adjusted Earnings and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile the non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of the company, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are estimated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

    CAUTIONARY STATEMENT
    The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement, “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience to reference Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. “Subsidiaries”, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The terms “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

    This announcement contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; “anticipate”; “aspire”; “aspiration”; ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; “desire”; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; “vision”; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this announcement, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks, including climate change; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including tariffs and regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war and the conflict in the Middle East, and a significant cyber security, data privacy or IT incident; (n) the pace of the energy transition; and (o) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this announcement are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2024 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this announcement and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this announcement, May 2, 2025. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this announcement.
    All amounts shown throughout this announcement are unaudited. The numbers presented throughout this announcement may not sum precisely to the totals provided and percentages may not precisely reflect the absolute figures, due to rounding.
    Shell’s Net Carbon Intensity
    Also, in this  announcement, we may refer to Shell’s “net carbon intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “net carbon intensity” or NCI is for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

    Shell’s Net-Zero Emissions Target
    Shell’s operating plan and outlook are forecasted for a three-year period and ten-year period, respectively, and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next three and ten years. Accordingly, the outlook reflects our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plan and outlook cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is outside our planning period. Such future operating plans and outlooks could include changes to our portfolio, efficiency improvements and the use of carbon capture and storage and carbon credits. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans and outlooks to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

    The content of websites referred to in this announcement does not form part of this announcement.

    We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this announcement that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC. Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

    The financial information presented in this announcement does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 434(3) of the Companies Act 2006 (“the Act”). Statutory accounts for the year ended December 31, 2024 were published in Shell’s Annual Report and Accounts, a copy of which was delivered to the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales. The auditor’s report on those accounts was unqualified, did not include a reference to any matters to which the auditor drew attention by way of emphasis without qualifying the report and did not contain a statement under sections 498(2) or 498(3) of the Act.

    The information in this announcement does not constitute the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements which are contained in Shell’s first quarter 2025 unaudited results available on www.shell.com/investors.

    CONTACTS

    • Media: International +44 207 934 5550; U.S. and Canada: Contact form

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Shell plc First Quarter 2025 Interim Dividend

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    London, May 2, 2025 − The Board of Shell plc (the “Company”) (XLON: SHEL, XNYS: SHEL, XAMS: SHELL) today announced an interim dividend in respect of the first quarter of 2025 of US$ 0.358 per ordinary share.

    Details relating to the first quarter 2025 interim dividend

    Per ordinary share
    (GB00BP6MXD84)
    Q1 2025
    Shell Shares (US$) 0.358

    Shareholders will be able to elect to receive their dividends in US dollars, euros or pounds sterling.

    An alternative ‘Electronic Election Entitlement’ (‘EEE’) process is available in CREST for dividends with options elections.

    Absent any valid election to the contrary, persons holding their ordinary shares through Euroclear Nederland will receive their dividends in euros.

    Absent any valid election to the contrary, shareholders (both holding in certificated and uncertificated form (CREST members)) and persons holding their shares through the Shell Corporate Nominee will receive their dividends in pounds sterling.

    The pound sterling and euro equivalent dividend payments will be announced on June 9, 2025.

    Per ADS
    (US7802593050)
    Q1 2025
    Shell ADSs (US$) 0.716

    Cash dividends on American Depositary Shares (“ADSs”) will be paid, by default, in US dollars.

    Each ADS represents two ordinary shares. ADSs are evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (“ADR”) certificate. In many cases the terms ADR and ADS are used interchangeably.

    Dividend timetable for the first quarter 2025 interim dividend

    Event Date
    Announcement date May 2, 2025
    Ex- Dividend Date for ADSs May 16, 2025
    Ex- Dividend Date for ordinary shares May 15, 2025
    Record date May 16, 2025
    Closing of currency election date (see Note below) June 2, 2025
    Pound sterling and euro equivalents announcement date June 9, 2025
    Payment date June 23, 2025

    Note

    A different currency election date may apply to shareholders holding shares in a securities account with a bank or financial institution ultimately holding through Euroclear Nederland. This may also apply to other shareholders who do not hold their shares either directly on the Register of Members or in the corporate sponsored nominee arrangement. Shareholders can contact their broker, financial intermediary, bank or financial institution for the election deadline that applies.

    Taxation – cash dividends

    If you are uncertain as to the tax treatment of any dividends you should consult your tax advisor.

    Dividend Reinvestment Programmes (“DRIP”)

    The following organisations offer Dividend Reinvestment Plans (“DRIPs”) which enable the Company’s shareholders to elect to have their dividend payments used to purchase the Company’s shares:

    • Equiniti Financial Services Limited (“EFSL”), for those holding shares (a) directly on the register as certificate holder or as CREST Member and (b) via the Shell Corporate Nominee;
    • ABN-AMRO NV (“ABN”) for Financial Intermediaries holding shares via Euroclear Nederland;
    • JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. (“JPM”) for holders of ADSs; and
    • Other DRIPs may also be available from the intermediary through which investors hold their shares and ADSs.

    These DRIP offerors provide their DRIPs fully on their account and not on behalf of the Company. Interested parties should contact the relevant DRIP offeror directly.

    More information can be found at https://www.shell.com/drip

    To be eligible to participate in the DRIPs for the next dividend, shareholders must make a valid dividend reinvestment election before the published date for the close of elections. 

    Enquiries
    Media: International +44 (0) 207 934 5550; U.S. and Canada: https://www.shell.us/about-us/news-and-insights/media/submit-an-inquiry.html

    Cautionary Note

    The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience to reference Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The terms “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties.  The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

    Forward-Looking statements

    This announcement contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; ‘‘anticipate’’;  “aspire”; “aspiration”; ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; “desire”; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; “vision”; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this announcement, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks, including climate change; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including tariffs and regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war and the conflict in the Middle East, and a significant cyber security, data privacy or IT incident; (n) the pace of the energy transition; and (o) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this announcement are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2024 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this announcement and should be considered by the reader.  Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this announcement, May 2, 2025. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this announcement.

    Shell’s net carbon intensity

    Also, in this announcement we may refer to Shell’s “net carbon intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “net carbon intensity” or NCI is for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

    Shell’s net-zero emissions target

    Shell’s operating plan and outlook are forecasted for a three-year period and ten-year period, respectively, and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next three and ten years. Accordingly, the outlook reflects our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plan and outlook cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is outside our planning period. Such future operating plans and outlooks could include changes to our portfolio, efficiency improvements and the use of carbon capture and storage and carbon credits. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans and outlooks to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

    Forward-Looking non-GAAP measures

    This announcement may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as adjusted earnings and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile those non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of Shell, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are calculated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

    The contents of websites referred to in this announcement do not form part of this announcement.

    We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this announcement that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC.  Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

    LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70
    Classification: Additional regulated information required to be disclosed under the laws of the United Kingdom

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: President Lai meets Japan’s LDP Youth Division delegation

    Source: Republic of China Taiwan

    Details
    2025-04-29
    President Lai meets NBR delegation  
    On the morning of April 29, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation from the National Bureau of Asian Research (NBR). In remarks, President Lai stated that as Taiwan stands at the very frontline of defense of global democracy, we are actively implementing our Four Pillars of Peace action plan, which includes continuing to enhance our national defense capabilities, demonstrating our commitment to defending freedom and democracy. The president said he hopes to further advance national security and industrial cooperation between Taiwan and the United States. He also expressed hope that this will help boost economic resilience for both sides and establish each as a key pillar of regional security, elevating our relations to even higher levels. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: I am delighted to meet with Admiral John Aquilino again today. I also warmly welcome NBR President Michael Wills and our distinguished guests from the bureau to Taiwan. I look forward to exchanging views with you all on Taiwan-US relations and the regional situation. During his tenure as commander of the US Indo-Pacific Command, Admiral Aquilino placed much attention on the Taiwan Strait issue. And the NBR has conducted a wealth of research and analysis focusing on matters of regional security. Thanks to all of your outstanding contributions and efforts, the international community has gained a better understanding of the role Taiwan plays in the Indo-Pacific region and in global democratic development. For this, I want to extend my deepest gratitude. Taiwan stands at the very frontline of defending global democracy and is located at a strategically important location in the first island chain. We are actively implementing our Four Pillars of Peace action plan, which includes continuing to enhance our national defense capabilities, building economic security, demonstrating stable and principled cross-strait leadership, and standing side-by-side with the democratic community to jointly demonstrate the strength of deterrence and safeguard regional peace and stability. At the beginning of this month, I announced an increase in military allowances for volunteer service members and combat troops. The government will also continue to reform national defense and enhance self-sufficiency in defense. In addition, we will prioritize special budget allocations to ensure that Taiwan’s defense budget exceeds 3 percent of GDP. These efforts continue to strengthen Taiwan’s self-defense capabilities and demonstrate our commitment to defending freedom and democracy. As we mark the 46th anniversary of the enactment of the Taiwan Relations Act, we thank the US government for continuing its arms sales to Taiwan and strengthening the Taiwan-US partnership over the years. We believe that, in addition to engaging in military exchanges and cooperation, Taiwan and the US can build an even closer economic and trade relationship, boosting each other’s economic resilience and establishing each as a key pillar of regional security. I expect that your continued assistance will help advance national security and industrial cooperation between Taiwan and the US, elevating our relations to even higher levels. Once again, I welcome our distinguished guests to Taiwan and wish you a pleasant and successful trip. I hope that through this visit, you gain a more comprehensive and in-depth understanding of Taiwan’s economy and national defense. Admiral Aquilino then delivered remarks, thanking the Ministry of National Defense for the invitation and President Lai for receiving and spending time with them. Mentioning that this is his second visit in five months, he said he continues to be incredibly impressed with the president’s leadership and the actions he has taken to secure Taiwan and defend its people. Admiral Aquilino said that he has watched the efforts of the ministers on whole-of-society defense to demonstrate deterrence and added that the pace of the work is nothing short of inspiring. Admiral Aquilino noted that Taiwan’s thriving democracy is incredibly important to the peace and stability of the region. He stated that he, alongside the NBR, will continue to offer support, noting that President Wills and his team are an asset to Taiwan and the US that helps continue our close relationship and ensure peace and stability in the region.  

    Details
    2025-04-28
    President Lai meets Japanese Diet Member and former Minister of State for Economic Security Takaichi Sanae
    On the afternoon of April 28, President Lai Ching-te met with a delegation led by Member of the Japanese House of Representatives and former Minister of State for Economic Security Takaichi Sanae. In remarks, President Lai thanked the government of Japan for repeatedly emphasizing the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait at important international venues. The president expressed hope that in the face of China’s continually expanding red supply chains, Taiwan and Japan can continue to cooperate closely in such fields as semiconductors, energy, and AI technology to create non-red supply chains that enhance economic resilience and industrial competitiveness for both sides, and jointly pave the way for further prosperity and growth in the Indo-Pacific region. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: First, I would like to extend a warm welcome to Representative Takaichi as she returns for another visit to Taiwan. I am also very happy to have Members of the House of Representatives Kikawada Hitoshi and Ozaki Masanao, and Member of the House of Councillors Sato Kei all gathered together here to engage in these very important exchanges. Our visitors will be taking part in many exchange activities during this trip. Earlier today at the Indo-Pacific Strategy Thinktank’s International Political and Economic Forum, Representative Takaichi delivered a speech in which she clearly demonstrated the great importance she places upon the friendship between Taiwan and Japan. For this I want to express my deepest appreciation to each of our guests. The peoples of Taiwan and Japan have a deep friendship and mutual trust. We have a shared commitment to the universal values of democracy, freedom, and respect for human rights, but beyond that, we both have striven to contribute to regional peace and stability. I also want to thank the government of Japan for repeatedly emphasizing the importance of peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait at important international venues. Tomorrow you will all make a trip to Kaohsiung to visit a bronze statue of former Prime Minister Abe Shinzo, who once said, “If Taiwan has a problem, then Japan has a problem.” We will always remember the firm support and friendship he showed Taiwan. Since taking office last year, I have worked hard to improve Taiwan’s whole-of-society defense resilience and implement our Four Pillars of Peace action plan. By strengthening our national defense capabilities, building up economic security, demonstrating stable and principled cross-strait leadership, and deepening partnerships with democratic countries including Japan, we can together maintain peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region and across the Taiwan Strait. At the same time, in the face of China’s continually expanding red supply chains, we hope that Taiwan and Japan, as important economic and trade partners, can continue to cooperate closely in such fields as semiconductors, energy, and AI technology to create non-red supply chains that further enhance economic resilience and industrial competitiveness for both sides. Going forward, Taiwan will work hard to play an important role in the international community and contribute its key strengths. I hope that, with the support of our guests, Taiwan can soon accede to the Comprehensive and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific Partnership and sign an economic partnership agreement (EPA) with Japan so that we can jointly pave the way for further prosperity and growth in the Indo-Pacific region. Lastly, I thank each of you once again for taking concrete action to support Taiwan. I am confident that your visit will help deepen Taiwan-Japan ties and create even greater opportunities for cooperation. Let us all strive together to keep propelling Taiwan-Japan relations forward.  Representative Takaichi then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai and Taiwanese political leaders for the warm hospitality they extended to the delegation, and mentioning that the visiting delegation members are all like-minded partners carrying on the legacy of former Prime Minister Abe. July 8 this year will mark the third anniversary of the passing of former Prime Minister Abe, she said, and when the former prime minister unfortunately passed away, President Lai, then serving as vice president, was among the first to come offer condolences, for which she expressed sincere admiration and gratitude. Representative Takaichi stated that Taiwan and Japan are island nations that face the same circumstances and problems, and that Japan’s trade activities rely heavily on ocean transport, so once a problem arises nearby that threatens maritime shipping lanes, it will be a matter of life and death for Japan. Taiwan and Japan are similar, as once a problem arises, both will face food and energy security issues, and supply chains may even be threatened, she said. Regarding Taiwan-Japan cooperation, Representative Takaichi stated that both sides must first protect and strengthen supply chain resilience. President Lai has previously said that he wants to turn Taiwan into an AI island, she said, and in semiconductors, Taiwan has the world’s leading technology. Representative Takaichi went on to say that Taiwan and Japan can collaborate in the fields of AI and semiconductors, quantum computing, and dual-use industries, as well as in areas such as drones and new energy technologies to build more resilient supply chains, so that if problems arise, we can maintain our current standard of living with peace of mind. Representative Takaichi indicated that cooperation in the defense sector is also crucial, and that by uniting like-minded countries including Taiwan, the United States, Japan, the Philippines, and Australia, and even countries in Europe, we can build a stronger network to jointly maintain our security guarantees. Representative Takaichi expressed hope that Taiwan and Japan will continue to strengthen substantive non-governmental relations, including personnel exchange visits and information sharing, so that we can jointly face and respond to crises when they arise. Regarding the hope to sign a Taiwan-Japan EPA that President Lai had mentioned earlier, she also expressed support and said she looks forward to upcoming exchanges and talks. The visiting delegation also included Japan-Taiwan Exchange Association Taipei Office Chief Representative Katayama Kazuyuki.

    Details
    2025-04-23
    President Lai delivers remarks at International Holocaust Remembrance Day event
    On the afternoon of April 23, President Lai Ching-te attended an International Holocaust Remembrance Day event and delivered remarks, in which he emphasized that peace is priceless, and war has no winners, while morality, democracy, and respect for human rights are powerful forces against violence and tyranny. The president stated that Taiwan will continue to expand cooperation with democratic partners and safeguard regional and global peace and stability, defending democracy, freedom, and human rights. He said we must never forget history, and must overcome our differences and join in solidarity to ensure that the next generations live in a world that is more just and more peaceful. Upon arriving at the event, President Lai heard a testimony from the granddaughter of a Holocaust survivor, followed by a rabbi’s recitation of the prayer “El Maleh Rachamim.” He then joined other distinguished guests in lighting candles in memory of the victims. A transcript of President Lai’s remarks follows: To begin, I want to thank the Israel Economic and Cultural Office (ISECO) in Taipei, German Institute Taipei, Taiwan Foundation for Democracy, and Ministry of Foreign Affairs for co-organizing this deeply significant memorial ceremony again this year. I also want to thank everyone for attending. We are here today to remember the victims of the Holocaust, express sympathy for the survivors, honor the brave individuals who protected the victims, and acknowledge all who were impacted by this atrocity. It was deeply moving to hear Ms. [Orly] Sela share the story of how her grandmother, Yehudit Biksz, escaped the Nazi regime. I want to thank her specially for traveling so far to attend this event. From the 1930s through World War II, the Nazi regime sought to exclude Jewish people from society. In their campaign, they perpetrated systematic genocide driven by their ideology. Policies and directives under the authoritarian Nazi regime resulted in the deaths of approximately 6 million Jews. Millions of others were persecuted, including Romani people, persons with disabilities, the gay community, and anyone who disagreed with Nazi ideology. It is one of the darkest chapters in human history. Many countries, including Taiwan, have enacted anti-massacre legislation, and observe a remembrance day each year. Those occasions help us remember the victims, preserve historical memory, and most importantly, reinforce our resolve to fight against hatred and discrimination. Twenty-three years ago, Chelujan (車路墘) Church in Tainan founded the Taiwan Holocaust Memorial Museum. It is the first Jewish museum in Taiwan, and the second Holocaust museum in Asia. Its founding mission urges us to forget hatred and love one another; put an end to war and advocate peace. Many of the exhibition items come from Jewish people, connecting Taiwan closer with Israel and helping Taiwanese better understand the experiences of Jewish people. In this way, we grow to more deeply cherish peace. When I was mayor of Tainan, I took part in an exhibition event at Chelujan Church. I was also invited by the Israeli government to join the International Mayors Conference in Israel, where I visited the World Holocaust Remembrance Center. I will never forget how deeply that experience moved me, and as a result, peace and human rights became even more important issues for me. These issues are valued by Taiwan and our friends and allies. They are also important links connecting Taiwan with the world. Peace is priceless, and war has no winners. We will continue to expand cooperation with democratic partners and safeguard regional and global peace and stability. We will also continue to make greater contributions and work with the international community to defend democracy, freedom, and human rights. This year also marks the 80th anniversary of the end of World War II. However, we still see wars raging around the world. We see a resurgence of authoritarian powers, which could severely impact global democracy, peace, and prosperous development. Today’s event allows for more than reflection on the past; it also serves as a warning for the future. We are reminded of the threats that hatred, prejudice, and extremism pose to humanity. But we are also reminded that morality, democracy, and respect for human rights are powerful forces against violence and tyranny. We must never forget history. We must overcome our differences and join in solidarity for a better future. Let’s work together to ensure that the next generations live in a world that is more just and more peaceful. Also in attendance at the event were Member of the Israeli Knesset (parliament) and Taiwan friendship group Chair Boaz Toporovsky, ISECO Representative Maya Yaron, and German Institute Taipei Deputy Director General Andreas Hofem.

    Details
    2025-04-23
    President Lai pays respects to Pope Francis  
    On the morning of April 23, President Lai Ching-te visited the Taipei Archdiocesan Curia to pay respects in a memorial ceremony for His Holiness Pope Francis. As officiant of the ceremony, President Lai burned incense and presented flowers, fruits, and wine to pay his respects to Pope Francis. At the direction of the master of ceremonies, the president then bowed three times in front of Pope Francis’s memorial portrait, conveying his grief and deep respect for the late pope. After hearing of Pope Francis’s passing on April 21, President Lai promptly requested the Ministry of Foreign Affairs to express sincere condolences from the people and government of Taiwan to the Vatican. The president also instructed Minister of Foreign Affairs Lin Chia-lung (林佳龍) to convey condolences to the Holy See’s Apostolic Nunciature in Taiwan.  

    Details
    2025-04-23
    President Lai meets US CNAS NextGen fellows
    On the morning of April 23, President Lai Ching-te met with fellows from the Shawn Brimley Next Generation National Security Leaders Program (NextGen) run by the Center for a New American Security (CNAS). In remarks, President Lai thanked the government of the United States for continuing its arms sales to Taiwan over the years, supporting Taiwan’s efforts to enhance its national defense capabilities and jointly maintaining peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region. The president pointed out that we will promote our “Taiwan plus one” policy, that is, new arrangements for Taiwan plus the US, and form a “Taiwan investment in the US team” to expand investment and bring about even closer Taiwan-US trade cooperation, allowing us to reduce the trade deficit and generate development that benefits both sides. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: Ms. Michèle Flournoy, chair of the CNAS Board of Directors, is a good friend of Taiwan, and she has made major contributions to Taiwan-US relations through her long-time efforts on various aspects of our cooperation. I am happy to welcome Chair Flournoy, who is once again leading a NextGen Fellowship delegation to Taiwan. CNAS is a prominent think tank focusing on US national security and defense policy based in Washington, DC. Its NextGen Fellowship has fostered talented individuals in the fields of national security and foreign affairs. This year’s delegation is significantly larger than those of the past, demonstrating the increased importance that the next generation of US leaders attach to Taiwan. On behalf of the people of Taiwan, I extend my sincerest welcome to you all. The Taiwan Strait, an issue of importance for our guests, has become a global issue. There is a high degree of international consensus that peace and stability across the Taiwan Strait are indispensable elements in global security and prosperity. Facing military threats from China, Taiwan proposed the Four Pillars of Peace action plan. First, we are actively implementing military reforms, enhancing whole-of-society defense resilience, and working to increase our defense budget to more than 3 percent of GDP. Second, we are strengthening our economic resilience. As Taiwan’s economy must keep advancing, we can no longer put all our eggs in one basket. We are taking action to remain firmly rooted in Taiwan while expanding our global presence and marketing worldwide. In these efforts, we are already seeing results. Third, we are standing side-by-side with other democratic countries to demonstrate the strength of deterrence and achieve our goal of peace through strength. And fourth, Taiwan is willing, under the principles of parity and dignity, to conduct exchanges and cooperate with China towards achieving peace and stability in the Taiwan Strait. This April 10 marked the 46th anniversary of the enactment of the Taiwan Relations Act. We thank the US government for continuing its arms sales to Taiwan over the years, supporting Taiwan’s efforts to enhance its national defense capabilities and jointly maintaining peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region. We look forward to Taiwan and the US continuing to strengthen collaboration on the development of both our defense industries as well as the building of non-red supply chains. This will yield even more results and further deepen our economic and trade partnership. The US is now the main destination for outbound investment from Taiwan. Moving forward, we will promote our “Taiwan plus one” policy, that is, new arrangements for Taiwan plus the US. And our government will form a “Taiwan investment in the US team” to expand investment. We hope this will bring Taiwan-US economic and trade cooperation even closer and, through mutually beneficial assistance, allow us to generate development that benefits both our sides while reducing our trade deficit. In closing, thank you once again for visiting Taiwan. We hope your trip is fruitful and leaves you with a deep impression of Taiwan. We also hope that going forward you continue supporting Taiwan and advancing even greater development for Taiwan-US ties.  Chair Flournoy then delivered remarks, first thanking President Lai for making time to receive their delegation. Referring to President Lai’s earlier remarks, she said that it is quite an impressive group, as past members of this program have gone on to become members of the US Congress, leading government experts, and leaders in the think-tank world and in the private sector. She remarked that investing in this group is a wonderful privilege for her and that they appreciate President Lai’s agreeing to take the time to engage in exchange with them. Chair Flournoy emphasized that they are visiting Taiwan at a critical moment, when there is so much change and volatility in the geostrategic environment, a lot of uncertainty, and a lot of unpredictability. She stated that given our shared values, our shared passion for democracy and human rights, and our shared interests in peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region, this is an important time for dialogue, collaboration, and looking for additional opportunities where we can work together towards regional peace and stability.

    Details
    2025-04-06
    President Lai delivers remarks on US tariff policy response
    On April 6, President Lai Ching-te delivered recorded remarks regarding the impact of the 32 percent tariff that the United States government recently imposed on imports from Taiwan in the name of reciprocity. In his remarks, President Lai explained that the government will adopt five response strategies, including making every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations, adopting a support plan for affected domestic industries, adopting medium- and long-term economic development plans, forming new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements, and launching industry listening tours. The president emphasized that as we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and expressed hope that all parties, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. A translation of President Lai’s remarks follows: My fellow citizens, good evening. The US government recently announced higher tariffs on countries around the world in the name of reciprocity, including imposing a 32 percent tariff on imports from Taiwan. This is bound to have a major impact on our nation. Various countries have already responded, and some have even adopted retaliatory measures. Tremendous changes in the global economy are expected. Taiwan is an export-led economy, and in facing future challenges there will inevitably be difficulties, so we must proceed carefully to turn danger into safety. During this time, I want to express gratitude to all sectors of society for providing valuable opinions, which the government regards highly, and will use as a reference to make policy decisions.  However, if we calmly and carefully analyze Taiwan’s trade with the US, we find that last year Taiwan’s exports to the US were valued at US$111.4 billion, accounting for 23.4 percent of total export value, with the other 75-plus percent of products sold worldwide to countries other than the US. Of products sold to the US, competitive ICT products and electronic components accounted for 65.4 percent. This shows that Taiwan’s economy does still have considerable resilience. As long as our response strategies are appropriate, and the public and private sectors join forces, we can reduce impacts. Please do not panic. To address the reciprocal tariffs by the US, Taiwan has no plans to adopt retaliatory tariffs. There will be no change in corporate investment commitments to the US, as long as they are consistent with national interests. But we must ensure the US clearly understands Taiwan’s contributions to US economic development. More importantly, we must actively seek to understand changes in the global economic situation, strengthen Taiwan-US industry cooperation, elevate the status of Taiwan industries in global supply chains, and with safeguarding the continued development of Taiwan’s economy as our goal, adopt the following five strategies to respond. Strategy one: Make every effort to improve reciprocal tariff rates through negotiations using the following five methods:  1. Taiwan has already formed a negotiation team led by Vice Premier Cheng Li-chiun (鄭麗君). The team includes members from the National Security Council, the Office of Trade Negotiations, and relevant Executive Yuan ministries and agencies, as well as academia and industry. Like the US-Mexico-Canada free trade agreement, negotiations on tariffs can start from Taiwan-US bilateral zero-tariff treatment. 2. To expand purchases from the US and thereby reduce the trade deficit, the Executive Yuan has already completed an inventory regarding large-scale procurement plans for agricultural, industrial, petroleum, and natural gas products, and the Ministry of National Defense has also proposed a military procurement list. All procurement plans will be actively pursued. 3. Expand investments in the US. Taiwan’s cumulative investment in the US already exceeds US$100 billion, creating approximately 400,000 jobs. In the future, in addition to increased investment in the US by Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, other industries such as electronics, ICT, petrochemicals, and natural gas can all increase their US investments, deepening Taiwan-US industry cooperation. Taiwan’s government has helped form a “Taiwan investment in the US” team, and hopes that the US will reciprocate by forming a “US investment in Taiwan” team to bring about closer Taiwan-US trade cooperation, jointly creating a future economic golden age.  4. We must eliminate non-tariff barriers to trade. Non-tariff barriers are an indicator by which the US assesses whether a trading partner is trading fairly with the US. Therefore, we will proactively resolve longstanding non-tariff barriers so that negotiations can proceed more smoothly. 5. We must resolve two issues that have been matters of longstanding concern to the US. One regards high-tech export controls, and the other regards illegal transshipment of dumped goods, otherwise referred to as “origin washing.” Strategy two: We must adopt a plan for supporting our industries. For industries that will be affected by the tariffs, and especially traditional industries as well as micro-, small-, and medium-sized enterprises, we will provide timely and needed support and assistance. Premier Cho Jung-tai (卓榮泰) and his administrative team recently announced a package of 20 specific measures designed to address nine areas. Moving forward, the support we provide to different industries will depend on how they are affected by the tariffs, will take into account the particular features of each industry, and will help each industry innovate, upgrade, and transform. Strategy three: We must adopt medium- and long-term economic development plans. At this point in time, our government must simultaneously adopt new strategies for economic and industrial development. This is also the fundamental path to solutions for future economic challenges. The government will proactively cooperate with friends and allies, develop a diverse range of markets, and achieve closer integration of entities in the upper, middle, and lower reaches of industrial supply chains. This course of action will make Taiwan’s industrial ecosystem more complete, and will help Taiwanese industries upgrade and transform. We must also make good use of the competitive advantages we possess in such areas as semiconductor manufacturing, integrated chip design, ICT, and smart manufacturing to build Taiwan into an AI island, and promote relevant applications for food, clothing, housing, and transportation, as well as military, security and surveillance, next-generation communications, and the medical and health and wellness industries as we advance toward a smarter, more sustainable, and more prosperous new Taiwan. Strategy four: “Taiwan plus one,” i.e., new “Taiwan plus the US” arrangements: While staying firmly rooted in Taiwan, our enterprises are expanding their global presence and marketing worldwide. This has been our national economic development strategy, and the most important aspect is maintaining a solid base here in Taiwan. We absolutely must maintain a solid footing, and cannot allow the present strife to cause us to waver. Therefore, our government will incentivize investments, carry out deregulation, and continue to improve Taiwan’s investment climate by actively resolving problems involving access to water, electricity, land, human resources, and professional talent. This will enable corporations to stay in Taiwan and continue investing here. In addition, we must also help the overseas manufacturing facilities of offshore Taiwanese businesses to make necessary adjustments to support our “Taiwan plus one” policy, in that our national economic development strategy will be adjusted as follows: to stay firmly rooted in Taiwan while expanding our global presence, strengthening US ties, and marketing worldwide. We intend to make use of the new state of supply chains to strengthen cooperation between Taiwanese and US industries, and gain further access to US markets. Strategy five: Launch industry listening tours: All industrial firms, regardless of sector or size, will be affected to some degree once the US reciprocal tariffs go into effect. The administrative teams led by myself and Premier Cho will hear out industry concerns so that we can quickly resolve problems and make sure policies meet actual needs. My fellow citizens, over the past half-century and more, Taiwan has been through two energy crises, the Asian financial crisis, the global financial crisis, and pandemics. We have been able to not only withstand one test after another, but even turn crises into opportunities. The Taiwanese economy has emerged from these crises stronger and more resilient than ever. As we face this latest challenge, the government and civil society will work hand in hand, and I hope that all parties in the legislature, both ruling and opposition, will support the measures that the Executive Yuan will take to open up a broader path for Taiwan’s economy. Let us join together and give it our all. Thank you.

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI Australia: International visitors flock to Greater Bendigo

    Source: New South Wales Ministerial News

    International visitors are spending more money and staying longer in the Bendigo Loddon region, according to the latest figures from Tourism Australia.

    New data for the year ending 2024 shows the region is almost back to pre-pandemic international tourist numbers and smashing international visitor spend records.

    There were 27,000 overnight international visitors compared to 16,000 in 2023. This is a 68 per cent increase. International visitor spending has significantly increased to $37 million, compared to $14 million ten years ago.

    City of Greater Bendigo Manager Economy & Experience James Myatt said the Bendigo Loddon region was a key destination of choice for international tourists visiting Victoria.

    “It is fantastic to see more people from overseas coming to the region and spending a lot more time here,” Mr Myatt said.

    “We know that international visitors are drawn to our Gold Rush heritage, arts and cultural experiences, farm stays, beautiful natural landscapes, and food and wine offerings.

    “Popular attractions amongst international visitors include Bendigo Tramways, Central Deborah Gold Mine, The Great Stupa, Bendigo Art Gallery, Bendigo Pottery, Dumawul Tours, and the Golden Dragon Museum.

    “Greater Bendigo is also a key destination on the Sydney Melbourne Inland Discovery drive, a self-drive touring route promoted primarily in the United States, UK, Europe, and New Zealand tourism markets throughout the year.

    “Over the past ten years, the City has focused on attracting and marketing major events and developing highly engaging destination marketing and activation campaigns.

    “The figures show strong growth in the international market and people want to visit Greater Bendigo for the range of experiences we offer all year round.

    “The survey results prove our strategies are working. The passion and commitment from many tourism operators contribute to this very positive trend.”

    The City has hosted over 50 travel agents from across the world over the past nine months, giving them the opportunity to experience attractions firsthand. That knowledge is shared with their teams and potential visitors from their countries.

    The City held a training session with Visit Victoria earlier this year to guide local tourism and service operators on how to attract international visitors.

    Key destination campaigns, such as the tulip displays during Bloom and major events like the Bendigo Easter Festival are promoted to Melbourne’s Indian and Chinese communities, attracting families and their visiting friends and relatives from overseas.

    The Greater Bendigo region is being represented at the Australian Tourism Exchange (ATE) this week in Brisbane, the largest international trade show hosted by Tourism Australia. Over 100 meetings are organised with media and travel agents from around the world to promote Greater Bendigo’s unique visitor destination offerings. For the first time, representatives from Greater Bendigo have also been invited to showcase Agri-tourism experiences in the region.

    “We see some great opportunities to build business at ATE with key decision makers who promote Australia across the world. In particular, our focus is on attracting visitation from the UK, Europe, New Zealand, India, China and South East Asia markets,” Mr Myatt said.

    Tourism Research Australia is the country’s leading provider of quality tourism intelligence across both international and domestic markets. Their data underpins government tourism policy and helps improve the performance of the tourism industry for the benefit of the Australian community.

    MIL OSI News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Padilla Introduces Bill to Strengthen Reservation Systems for Public Lands as Trump Administration Announces Scaled-Back Yosemite Summer Reservation System

    US Senate News:

    Source: United States Senator Alex Padilla (D-Calif.)

    Padilla Introduces Bill to Strengthen Reservation Systems for Public Lands as Trump Administration Announces Scaled-Back Yosemite Summer Reservation System

    After push from Padilla, Yosemite will implement a 2025 seasonal reservation system to improve visitor access and experience; however, the system is significantly pared down from the plan Yosemite proposed

    WASHINGTON, D.C. — Today, U.S. Senator Alex Padilla (D-Calif.) introduced legislation to expand access to public lands, improve the visitor reservation process, and enhance transparency in how fees are collected for federal lands and national parks. The Review and Evaluation of Strategies for Equal Reservations for Visitor Experiences (RESERVE) Federal Land Act would direct the National Academy of Sciences (NAS) to study and recommend improvements to reservation systems across federal lands to ensure they are fair, user-friendly, and accessible to all Americans.

    The legislation comes after the Trump Administration, following significant delays, announced that Yosemite National Park will implement a 2025 seasonal reservation system. However, this year’s system is significantly scaled back from the plan Yosemite successfully piloted previously, which was carefully crafted based off public input and data. This year’s system requires reservations for fewer days and hours than what Yosemite proposed. Earlier this year, Padilla pushed Secretary of the Interior Doug Burgum to allow Yosemite to implement its preferred reservation system, emphasizing its importance in managing park visitation while preserving Yosemite for future generations.

    “For months, I’ve joined with park officials in calling on the Trump Administration to extend the use of Yosemite’s successful reservation system. While the decision to open reservations at Yosemite National Park for the summer is a win for outdoor lovers, the environment, and local businesses that rely on park visitors, it shouldn’t have taken this long,” said Senator Padilla. “The needless delays by the Trump Administration in approving a reservation system, and the Administration’s scaling back of Yosemite’s carefully crafted plan, will undermine the visitor experience for the millions who come to California to view this natural wonder. Congress must continue to invest in the staffing and resources needed to protect our national parks. We can start by passing my RESERVE Act, which will launch a national study on how to improve Recreation.gov and other public land reservation systems so they are accessible, transparent, and supportive of local communities’ needs.”

    Yosemite is California’s most visited National Park, with an average of 3.3 million visitors annually. Last year, that number surged to 4.2 million visitors as Yosemite again piloted reservations during peak summer months. For decades, overcrowding, vehicle congestion, limited parking, and long lines have diminished what should ordinarily be a world-class experience, particularly for first-time visitors. Thanks to the reservation system, however, Yosemite was able to accommodate pre-pandemic visitor levels but without the excessive congestion. The reservation system helped distribute visitors more evenly throughout the day, week, and peak summer season.

    Federal land management agencies have experimented with new visitor management methods such as online reservation systems for other public lands as well; however, there has been little national research on how these systems can be improved.

    The RESERVE Act would direct NAS to study reservation systems across federal lands, including campsites, hiking permits, climbing passes, and other outdoor recreation activities. The report would be due in 18 months and would cover reservation system design, system user demographics, and data availability and accessibility. The study would also investigate the fee structure and transparency of Recreation.gov, the government’s centralized travel planning platform and reservation system for 14 federal agencies.

    Senator Padilla is a strong advocate for ensuring equitable access to outdoor spaces. Last year, President Biden signed Padilla’s bipartisan, bicameral Outdoors for All Act into law as part of the Expanding Public Lands Outdoor Recreation Experiences (EXPLORE) Act. The Outdoors for All Act expands outdoor recreational opportunities in urban and low-income communities across the nation.

    Full text of the bill is available here.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Rep. Pfluger, Messmer Lead Push to Defund Universities Still Requiring the COVID-19 Vaccine

    Source: United States House of Representatives – Congressman August Pfluger (TX-11)

    WASHINGTON, D.C. — As first reported in Fox News, Congressman August Pfluger (TX-11) and Congressman Mark Messmer (IN-08) introduced legislation to ensure that no federal dollars go to any university across the country that still requires its students or staff to receive a COVID-19 vaccine as a condition of enrollment of employment, or receiving any benefit, service, or contract.

    The No Vaccine Mandates in Higher Education Act will codify a key piece of one of President Trump’s February executive orders that restricted federal funding to public schools, including colleges and universities, that mandate COVID-19 vaccines for attendance. It is unacceptable that any university still requires the COVID-19 vaccine. Taxpayers’ hard-earned money should not go to higher education institutions that require the COVID-19 vaccine for attendance.

    “The COVID-19 pandemic opened Pandora’s box to a lengthy list of overreaching policies and mandates from the government, institutions, and companies alike. As we work to restore common sense and liberties back to the American people, I am proud to co-lead this legislation to ensure universities can no longer force their students to have the COVID-19 vaccine,” said Rep. Pfluger.

    It is unbelievable that even today, two years after the COVID-19 emergency was officially declared dead and gone, there are still learning institutions across this country persecuting students and staff with unnecessary vaccine mandates,” said Rep. Messmer. “The No Vaccine Mandates in Higher Education Act assures the American people that Congress and President Trump recognize this continued injustice and will work together to restore the civil liberties and freedom from government overreach that all Americans richly deserve.

    To read the full text of the legislation, click here.

    Background:

    During the COVID-19 pandemic, many higher education institutions implemented vaccine mandates for their students and staff. These mandates affect the individual liberties of students and teachers around the country.

    Many institutions announced the end of their vaccine requirement after President Joe Biden ended the COVID-19 national and public health emergency last May. These institutions have either removed COVID-19 information from their websites or haven’t updated the content in a couple of years. 

    Even with the COVID-19 pandemic behind us, there are still higher education institutions around the country that still have vaccine requirements for their students and teachers.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: Transcript: Protecting Subway Riders and Transit Workers

    Source: US State of New York

    arlier today, Governor Kathy Hochul joined MTA officials and law enforcement to highlight a FY 2026 New York State Budget deal that delivers on the Governor’s public safety commitments to continue making our subways safer for all riders and transit workers. These major investments increase the presence of law enforcement, make crucial safety upgrades in protective barriers and LED lighting and continue cracking down on fare evasion. New York City’s Subways continue to experience the lowest levels of crime overall outside the pandemic since the 1990s — and as a result of the Governor’s continued efforts to prioritize public safety and make our subways safer, crime is down 11 percent since last year and down 16 percent compared to pre-pandemic levels.

    B-ROLL of the Governor taking the subway, meeting construction workers and subway riders is available to stream on YouTube here and TV quality video is available here (h.264, mp4).

    VIDEO: The event is available to stream on YouTube here and TV quality video is available here (h.264, mp4).

    AUDIO: The Governor’s remarks are available in audio form here.

    PHOTOS: The Governor’s Flickr page will post photos of the event here.

    A rush transcript of the Governor’s remarks is available below:

    It’s great to see all of you and you’re really making a profound difference here. Always happy to be back riding our subway system. Nothing like it in the world. I want to thank Janno Lieber for leading an organization that has been down and out and now it’s back. And I’m so proud to say that we’ve achieved so much together over my last three and a half years to empower the MTA to head on a path that they know is sustainable and delivers the highest quality of service to the people he cares the most about. And those are our commuters. Let’s give round applause to Janno Lieber here today.

    Michael Kemper, our chief of security. Thank you, Michael, for finding every possible way we can to protect our commuters, our riders, our visitors. Superintendent Steven James, thank you for responding whenever I need you. You’ve been asked to do the extraordinary, whether it’s helping with gun interdiction on the streets to calming down prison strikes and right here in our subway. So I thank you and all the members of our State Police team for the extraordinary work you do every day. Brigadier General Isabel Smith, the director of joint staff and commander of the National Guard. I want to thank the National Guard for their presence here, making people feel calmer and safer.

    And I’ve heard that from moms who literally come up to me and say, “I feel a lot better having my child go to the subway when I see more people in uniform. And you help make that happen.” So let’s hear it for our National Guard and our MTA police, our state police and to everyone who cares so deeply about the success of this subway system.

    It may be overstated, but this is the beating heart of this city. This is what sets us apart from all others. Getting people anywhere they want to go within minutes. It’s extraordinary. And beneath every day – underneath these towering skyscrapers in our busy streets – millions of people for every walk of life come together. They head off to work. They head off to school. They visit families and friends. They go to doctor’s appointments.

    And the experience, all the wonder that the city has to offer. But I’ll tell you this – when I first took office three and a half years ago, this system faced a triple threat. First of all, subway crime was raging, absolutely raging. I would say as an aftermath – an outgrowth – of the pandemic, of which we know we were the epicenter for the nation. Ridership was down, it was absolutely lagging. And the MTA faced a looming fiscal crisis that threatened to bring this system to a screeching halt. Those were real challenges, but we were undaunted.

    We knew we needed to lean hard into them and find solutions that would work. So we secured significant recurring funding to save the MTA from literally going off the fiscal cliff. We got it done a few years ago, and we took bold, decisive action to protect riders.

    And you see it, as I mentioned, with the presence of law enforcement on the platforms and in the trains. You see it in the National Guard presence and you see it in the new platform, barriers and cameras docked in every single subway car. And I want to say we had a goal to get it done in a few years, and I want to thank the MTA for rising to the challenge I put out and said, “No, we’re going to shave off a lot of time. I want a camera in every single train so people feel secure and our law enforcement can reach and find and prosecute the law breakers.”

    So we made some real progress there as well. Now, subway crime, now, is down 16 percent compared to 2019. Why do I go back to 2019? I subtract it out. The higher years of the pandemic, because otherwise this would be a lot bigger drop. But I want to deal in realities.

    What was the world like before the pandemic when people were not so anxious about going on the subway? We are now down 16 percent compared to 2019. And just from last year, we’d already started seeing dramatic downward trends. We’re still 11 percent lower than last year at this time. So ridership continues to rise. Ticking up seven percent year over year.

    But I’ll say this, I more than anyone know, there’s still more work to do. Just last week, a man was stabbed to death on the five train, right in the middle of rush hour – a galling attack that shocked so many riders. That’s proof. That’s proof we still have more work to do. I acknowledge that. And in January, I came here and up, I outlined a plan to ramp up our efforts.

    I vow to fund the state funding for the first time in history, not just MTA police, not just state police, but funding the MTA – picking up the costs of the MTA – so there’s two NYPD police officers on every overnight train. When you see the police officers, NYPD, on those overnight trains starting at nine o’clock at night till 6:00 a.m. that is the New York State taxpayers working hard to make sure that this lifeline of our economic heartbeat is still viable and thriving. So we did that.

    We also vowed to make more security upgrades and I vowed to end the insanity of violent criminals getting off with crimes because of technicalities, whether it happens on the subway or happens on our streets. And I vowed to keep people who have severe mental health problems who are in our subways, on our streets. I said, we vowed to get them off these city streets and subway stations and in our trains – and get them into a hospital bed where they can get some help.

    I thought it was cruel to abandon them. Yes, they have civil rights. Of course they do. But some people don’t have the mental capacity to make decisions for their own health and wellbeing. How do we abandon them? That’s not what a civilized society does. And we said no more.

    And I’m proud to say with our new budget, securely in place – almost done – we delivered on these promises. And when it comes to public safety, I refuse to back down. Absolutely refuse to back down. So let me break down what we accomplished.

    First, an additional $45 million for Joint Task Force Empire Shield. That’s our National Guard. We want to make sure they’re funded and can remain here. This is the elite unit that protects New York City, including our subways. The National Guard members you see are an important part of that. $77 million in this year’s budget to make sure we can continue funding those NYPD on the overnight trains. These officers really are the unsung heroes. Those late night rides have to be stressful. Sometimes you walk into a car and you don’t know the unknown. It’s a frightening dynamic, and I want to thank them. Because they’re protecting the nurses and doctors who are on the midnight shift. The cooks and bartenders who clock out late, and all the people who have to rise before the sun are construction workers, our bakers, our baristas.These are the people who keep our city running and we must keep them safe.

    We also, as I mentioned, are taking the steps to take care of those languishing with mental health problems. And I’ll say this, we’re going to make a difference in their lives. We’re going to make sure they get the help they need, but we couldn’t do it up until now. Here’s why. Because we didn’t have the system in place to care for them. Because of decades of disinvestment in our system, our health care system, our mental health system – that we didn’t have enough beds, we didn’t have enough practitioners, we didn’t have enough people with long-term strategies and supportive housing.

    And I’m so proud after the first billion dollars investment I made back when I was brand new Governor. We are now positioned to be able to give these people the help they need. That’s why we can welcome them in and take good care of them. We’re also strengthening Kendra’s Law to ensure those with serious mental illness receive consistent treatment in the community so they don’t fall between the cracks.

    Also, investing $30 million in our homeless outreach teams, these safe option support teams. My God, they’re doing God’s work every single day you see them. I’ve come to thank them. And they’re so compassionate, and they don’t give up on anybody. They believe that everybody has value and they want to help them retrieve their full potential despite how hard life has been for them. These are compassionate public servants who’ve helped over 1,000 New Yorkers escape lives on the street and find, get this permanent housing. 1,000 people who are long term chronically homeless right here — now have a home to call and make sure it’s a safe place for them to rest their heads at night. Because you know what? It’s not just about public safety for all of us. It’s about human dignity and giving people what they deserve.

    As I mentioned, we reformed our criminal justice laws because – while a lot of people aren’t quite sure what discovery laws are, and that’s okay – what happens under changes that were made back in 2019? I will say this, and I’ve said this from the beginning, there were many changes that were necessary. The system was absolutely skewed against the defendants, and that was unfair. But we also know that the pendulum has swung way too far, and now the defense lawyers are able to lie and wait literally the night before a case is supposed to be presented and raise objections that a judge must say, based on the law, you must have this case dismissed now because the clock has run out. Or if there’s minor technicalities and the cases are legendary, you hear the reasons that cases are thrown out, whether it’s a crime in the subway or domestic violence incidents. You want to make sure that people do not escape because of a senseless loophole that we have now fixed. That’s how you start making people safer. That’s how you hold people accountable.

    And if you wear a mask to hide your identity while you’re committing a crime, you’ll face an additional charge. That’s important because we’ve seen in the subway people masking themselves, trying to evade the cameras that we put in place. But if you’re hiding under a mask, how are our police supposed to identify you and make sure you don’t hurt somebody else the next day? This is another force for ensuring that we have public safety.

    But also here’s the music to Janno’s ears – we are fully funding the $68 billion Capital Plan, and I want to thank the leaders in the Legislature for working hard with me. It’s been an interesting, always, always interesting process, but we’re also making sure through that we’re also upgrading $1 billion more in crucial physical security upgrades. So what we’re going to do, we’ll have platform barriers at 100 additional stations. LED lighting. I want them brighter. I want people to see. We’ll also continue swapping out the aging turnstiles. Guess what? Ones that are hard to evade, ones you can’t hurdle over or crawl under. So we’re going to be getting those out there. So those shameless fare invaders and everybody’s doing this who create unnecessary stress and chaos for the other riders who are actually doing what they’re supposed to do.So we’re going to stop them as well.

    We’re also going to make sure the MTA – we fully fund their repairs. And something that’s near and dear to my heart since I proposed it a few years ago, is to do the Interborough Express once and for all the money is there because as much as we love Manhattan, people who are trying to go from Brooklyn to Queen should not have to make us stop here first, let’s inject some common sense into our residents lives and let them have the quality of life they deserve, and less time traveling from one borough to another.

    Making ADA stations ADA accessible and enhancing, enhancing service to and from the Hudson Valley. So we’re going to continue with these goals and I’m always looking forward to partnering with the MTA as we go forth for the years ahead to make good on all these financial commitments.

    But mark my words. I’ll do everything in my power to ensure that the people of this city and this state are safe. And I’ll put the investments where they need to go. I’ll make the changes in the law where necessary because we won’t stop until every single person has what they deserve – the right to be safe in their homes and their communities, and in our subways.

    Thank you very much. Let me hand this now over to Janno Lieber, the Chairman and CEO of the MTA.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI USA: 05.01.2025 Sen. Cruz, Rep. Harshbarger Introduce USA Act

    US Senate News:

    Source: United States Senator for Texas Ted Cruz
    WASHINGTON, D.C. – U.S. Sen. Ted Cruz (R-Texas) introduced the Universal Savings Account Act, a bill that allows American families to save without the restrictions and penalties associated with traditional tax advantaged accounts.
    Sen. Cruz said, “A simple and accessible incentive savings plan will provide families with a way to establish financial security and prosperity. This bill provides a straightforward solution to those challenges. I strongly urge my colleagues to pass this bill for the future generations of Americans.”
    Companion legislation was introduced in the House by Rep. Diana Harshbarger (R-Tenn.-1).
    Rep. Harshbarger said, “It’s an honor to partner with Senator Cruz on this commonsense legislation to empower Americans to take control of their financial futures. The Universal Savings Account Act cuts through red tape and gives every American a flexible, tax-free way to save, invest, and spend — without government interference or penalties. Washington shouldn’t be in the business of micromanaging how people use their own money. This bill is a win for working families, a win for personal freedom, and a win for financial independence.”
    Read the full text of the bill here.
    BACKGROUND
    Universal saving accounts (USAs) are tax-advantaged savings vehicles with unrestricted use of funds, allowing participants to save, invest, and withdraw funds for any reason.
    This bill would allow the following:
    Distributions from Universal Savings Accounts are not subject to income tax, nor included in gross income.
    An initial contribution limit of $10,000, which increases by $500 every year, before capping at $25,000.
    No contribution limits based on income.
    Experts have found Universal Savings Accounts would boost savings for low-income households, allowing them to better withstand economic shocks, such as pandemics and recessions, and plan for major expenses, such as an expanded family, education, and housing needs.

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI: Trisura Group Reports First Quarter 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    TORONTO, May 01, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Trisura Group Ltd. (“Trisura” or “Trisura Group”) (TSX: TSU), a leading specialty insurance provider, today announced financial results for the first quarter of 2025.

    David Clare, President and CEO of Trisura, stated,

    “In Q1 Trisura reported a strong Operating ROE of 18.4% driven by Operating net income of $34.2 million or $0.70 per share. Growth, profitable underwriting, and higher Net investment income demonstrates consistent execution of our strategy.

    Profitable underwriting resulted in a quarterly Combined ratio of 82.7%, alongside strong growth of 28.1% in our Primary lines. We continued expanding US Surety, reaching 33 state licenses in our Treasury-listed entity while broadening rate filings and building relationships with key distribution partners.

    Growth and strong earnings lifted book value to a new record of $820 million, with a conservative 10.7% debt-to-capital underscoring flexibility and capacity for growth.

    Highlights

    • Operating ROE(1) of 18.4% was strong, reflecting profitability from core operations, while ROE(1) was 15.0% in the quarter.
    • BVPS(2) of $17.16 increased 23.5% over Q1 2024 demonstrating consistent expansion in book value.
    • Operating net income(3) was $34.2 million in the quarter, which increased over the prior year as a result of growth in the business. Net income of $29.0 million was lower than Q1 2024 primarily as a result of higher Net gains on the investment portfolio in Q1 2024 and the impact of movements in the yield curve in the quarter.
    • Operating EPS(1) of $0.70 in the quarter increased by 2.9% demonstrating the strength of core operations(4) through continued growth and profitability. EPS of $0.60 in the quarter decreased from Q1 2024 primarily as a result of higher Net gains on the investment portfolio in Q1 2024 and the impact of movements in the yield curve in the quarter.
    • Combined ratio(1) for the quarter was 82.7%, reflecting a strong underwriting performance across the portfolio.
    • GPW(2) of $711.7 million, decreased by 1.6% compared to Q1 2024, primarily as a result of non-renewed programs in US Programs during 2024, offset by growth in our Primary lines(5). Trisura’s Primary lines grew by 28.1% in the quarter, which are the lines of business that contribute most meaningfully to Underwriting income(3).
    • Net investment income growth of 8.6% in the quarter was driven by a larger investment portfolio.
      Q1 2025 Q1 2024 $ variance % variance
    GPW 711,671   723,130   (11,458 ) (1.6% )
    Net insurance revenue(3) 172,711   153,054   19,657   12.8%  
             
    Underwriting income 29,862   29,359   503   1.7%  
    Net investment income 18,197   16,753   1,444   8.6%  
             
    Operating net income 34,170   33,188   982   3.0%  
    Net income 28,990   36,433   (7,443 ) (20.4% )
             
    Loss ratio(1) 31.5%   31.6%   n/a (0.1pts)
    Expense ratio(1) 51.2%   49.2%   n/a 2.0pts
    Combined ratio 82.7%   80.8%   n/a 1.9pts
             
    OEPS – diluted – in dollars 0.70   0.68   0.02   2.9%  
    EPS – diluted – in dollars 0.60   0.75   (0.15 ) (20.0% )
    BVPS – in dollars 17.16   13.89   3.27   23.5%  
    Debt-to-capital ratio(2) 10.7%   10.2%   n/a 0.5pts
    Operating ROE 18.4%   20.0%   n/a (1.6pts)
    ROE 15.0%   15.3%   n/a (0.3pts)

    Insurance Operations

    • Net insurance revenue of $172.7 million, increased by 12.8% compared to Q1 2024, reflecting growth in the business, driven by growth in our Primary Lines.
    • Underwriting income of $29.9 million, increased by 1.7% compared to Q1 2024 due to growth in the business and foreign exchange movement, offset by a higher Combined ratio.
    • The consolidated Combined ratio was 82.7% for the quarter reflecting a higher Loss ratio at Trisura Specialty offset by a shift in the business mix to Trisura Specialty which typically has a higher Expense ratio but a lower Loss ratio.

    Investments

    • Net investment income rose 8.6% in the quarter compared to Q1 2024. The portfolio benefited from growth in the business.

    Capital

    • The Minimum Capital Test ratio(6) of our regulated Canadian subsidiary was 273% as at March 31, 2025 (276% as at December 31, 2024), which comfortably exceeded regulatory requirements(7) of 150%.
    • As at December 31, 2024, the Risk-Based Capital(8) of the regulated US insurance companies were in excess of the various company action levels of the states in which they are licensed.
    • Consolidated debt-to-capital ratio of 10.7% as at March 31, 2025 is below our long-term target of 20.0%.

    Earnings Conference Call

    Trisura will host its First Quarter Earnings Conference Call to review financial results at 9:00a.m. ET on Friday, May 2nd, 2025.

    To listen to the call via live audio webcast, please follow the link below:

    https://edge.media-server.com/mmc/p/tzhsg4ir

    A replay of the call will be available through the link above.

    About Trisura Group

    Trisura Group Ltd. is a specialty insurance provider operating in the Surety, Warranty, Corporate Insurance, Program and Fronting business lines of the market. Trisura has investments in wholly owned subsidiaries through which it conducts insurance operations. Those operations are primarily in Canada and the United States. Trisura Group Ltd. is listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol “TSU”.

    Further information is available at http://www.trisura.com. Important information may be disseminated exclusively via the website. Investors should consult the site to access this information. Details regarding the operations of Trisura Group Ltd. are also set forth in regulatory filings. A copy of the filings may be obtained on Trisura Group’s SEDAR+ profile at www.sedarplus.ca.

    For more information, please contact:

    Name: Bryan Sinclair

    Tel: 416 607 2135

    Email: bryan.sinclair@trisura.com

    Non-IFRS Financial Measures and other Financial Measures

    We report certain financial information using non-IFRS financial measures, non-IFRS ratios and supplementary financial measures that we use to measure and evaluate the performance of our business. Non-IFRS financial measures do not have standardized meanings prescribed by IFRS and may not be comparable to similar measures used by other companies in our industry. They are used by management and financial analysts to assess our performance.

    Further, they provide users with an enhanced understanding of our results and related trends and increase transparency and clarity into the core results of the business.

    These metrics are operating performance measures that highlight trends in our core business or are required ratios used to measure compliance with OSFI and other regulatory standards. Our Company also believes that securities analysts, investors and other interested parties use these operating metrics to compare our Company’s performance against others in the specialty insurance industry. Our Company’s management also uses these operating metrics and other financial measures in order to facilitate operating performance comparisons from period to period. Such operating metrics and other financial measures should not be considered as the sole indicators of our performance and should not be considered in isolation from, or as a substitute for, analysis of our financial statements prepared in accordance with IFRS. For more information about these supplementary financial measures, Non-IFRS financial measures, and Non-IFRS ratios, including definitions and explanations of how these measures provide useful information, refer to Section 8 – Accounting and Disclosure matters in our Q1 2025 MD&A , which is available on our website at http://www.trisura.com and on SEDAR+ at www.sedarplus.ca.

    Table 1 – Reconciliation of Operating net income to reported Net income and OEPS: reflect Net income, adjusted for certain items to normalize earnings to core operations in order to reflect our North American specialty operations.

      Q1 2025 Q1 2024
    Operating net income 34,170   33,188  
    Impact of Exited lines 111    
    Loss from run-off program   (3,714 )
    Impact of movement in yield curve in Net insurance finance income (expenses) (3,569 ) 437  
    Impact of SBC 1,199   (2,923 )
    Net (gains) losses (4,547 ) 10,446  
    Tax impact of above items 1,626   (1,001 )
    Non-operating results, net of tax (5,180 ) 3,245  
    Net income 28,990   36,433  
         
    Operating net income 34,170   33,188  
    Weighted-average number of common shares outstanding – diluted
    (in thousands of shares)
    48,472   48,456  
    Operating EPS – diluted (in dollars) 0.70   0.68  


    Table 2 – Reconciliation of Insurance service result to Underwriting income – Consolidated

    Financial statements line item 1   2 3   4   5   6   7 MD&A line item
    For the three months ended March 31, 2025
    Insurance revenue 779,606   (601,048 )     (5,847 )   172,711   Net insurance revenue
    Insurance service expenses (585,213 ) 444,725   5,461 (10,649 ) (6,478 ) 5,736   3,569   (142,849 ) Sum of Net claims ($54,345) and Net expenses ($88,504)
    Net income (expenses) from reinsurance contracts assets (156,323 ) 156,323             n/a
    Insurance service result 38,070     5,461 (10,649 ) (6,478 ) (111 ) 3,569   29,862   Underwriting income
    For the three months ended March 31, 2024
    Insurance revenue 744,266   (594,773 )         3,561 153,054   Net insurance revenue
    Insurance service expenses (580,940 ) 466,895   5,345 (10,853 ) (3,858 )   (437 ) 153 (123,695 ) Sum of Net claims ($48,406) and Net expenses ($75,289)
    Net income (expenses) from reinsurance contracts assets (127,878 ) 127,878             n/a
    Insurance service result 35,448     5,345 (10,853 ) (3,858 )   (437 ) 3,714 29,359   Underwriting income
    Reconciling items in the table above:
    1 Net of reinsurance impact
    2 Other income
    3 Other operating expenses related to Trisura Specialty and Trisura US Programs
    4 Net insurance finance income (expenses)
    5 Impact of Exited lines
    6 Movement in yield curve in Net insurance finance income (expenses)
    7 Loss from run-off program


    Table 3 – ROE and Operating LTM ROE
    : a measure of the Company’s use of equity.

      Q1 2025 Q1 2024
    LTM net income 111,472   89,398  
    LTM average equity 742,056   583,798  
    ROE 15.0%   15.3%  
    Operating LTM net income 136,831   116,819  
    Operating LTM ROE 18.4%   20.0%  


    Table 4 – Reconciliation of Average equity
    (9)to LTM average equity: LTM average equity is used in calculating Operating ROE.

      Q1 2025
    Q1 2024
    Average equity 741,016   587,336  
    Adjustments: days in quarter proration 1,040   (3,538 )
    LTM average equity 742,056   583,798  


    Table 5 – Combined ratio – Consolidated:
    Combined ratio is used to evaluate underlying profitability relative to Net insurance revenue in a given period.

       Q1 2025 Q1 2024
    Net insurance revenue, as presented in Table 2 172,711   153,054  
    Net claims, as presented in Table 2 (54,345 ) (48,406 )
    Net expenses, as presented in Table 2 (88,504 ) (75,289 )
    Underwriting income 29,862   29,359  
         
    Loss ratio 31.5%   31.6%  
    Expense ratio 51.2%   49.2%  
    Combined ratio 82.7%   80.8%  


    Footnotes

    (1) These are non-IFRS ratios. Non-IFRS ratios are not standardized under the financial reporting framework used to prepare the financial statements of the Company to which the ratio relates and might not be comparable to similar ratios disclosed by other companies. See Section 8, Accounting and Disclosure matters in our Q1 2025 MD&A for details on composition, as well as each non-IFRS financial measure used as a component of the ratio, and an explanation of how it provides useful information to an investor.

    (2) This is a supplementary financial measure. See Section 8, Accounting and Disclosure matters in our Q1 2025 MD&A for details on composition and an explanation of how it provides useful information to an investor.

    (3) These are non-IFRS financial measures. Non-IFRS financial measures are not standardized financial measures under the financial reporting framework used to prepare the financial statements of the Company to which the measure relates and might not be comparable to similar financial measures disclosed by other companies. See Section 8, Accounting and Disclosure matters in our Q1 2025 MD&A for details on composition and an explanation of how it provides useful information to an investor.

    (4) See Section 8, Accounting and Disclosure matters in our Q1 2025 MD&A for the definition of Operating Net Income, and for further explanation of “core operations”.

    (5) Primary lines are lines of insurance business such as Surety, Corporate Insurance, and Warranty.

    (6) This measure is calculated in accordance with the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions Canada’s (OSFI’s) Guideline A, Minimum Capital Test.

    (7) This target is in accordance with OSFI’s Guideline A-4, Regulatory Capital and Internal Capital Targets.

    (8) This measure is calculated in accordance with the National Association of Insurance Commissioners, Risk Based Capital for Insurers Model Act.

    (9) Average equity is calculated as the sum of opening equity and closing equity over the last twelve months, divided by two.

    Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements and Information

    Note: This news release contains “forward-looking information” within the meaning of Canadian provincial securities laws and “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of applicable Canadian securities legislation. Forward-looking statements include statements that are predictive in nature, depend upon or refer to future events or conditions, include statements regarding operations, business, financial condition, expected financial results, performance, prospects, opportunities, priorities, targets, goals, ongoing objectives, strategies and outlook of our Company and its subsidiaries, as well as the outlook for North American and international economies for the current fiscal year and subsequent periods, and include words such as “expects,” “likely,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “believes,” “estimates,” “seeks,” “intends,” “targets,” “projects,” “forecasts”, “potential” or negative versions thereof and other similar expressions, or future or conditional verbs such as “may,” “will,” “should,” “would” and “could”.

    Although we believe that our anticipated future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements and information are based upon reasonable assumptions and expectations, the reader should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements and information because they involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, many of which are beyond our control, which may cause the actual results, performance or achievements of our Company to differ materially from anticipated future results, performance or achievement expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements and information.

    Factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those contemplated or implied by forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to: the impact or unanticipated impact of general economic, political and market factors in the countries in which we do business; the behaviour of financial markets, including fluctuations in interest and foreign exchange rates; global equity and capital markets and the availability of equity and debt financing and refinancing within these markets; insurance risks including pricing risk, concentration risk and exposure to large losses, and risks associated with estimates of loss reserves; strategic actions including dispositions; the ability to complete and effectively integrate acquisitions into existing operations and the ability to attain expected benefits; changes in accounting policies and methods used to report financial condition (including uncertainties associated with critical accounting assumptions and estimates); the ability to appropriately manage human capital; the effect of applying future accounting changes; business competition; operational and reputational risks; technological change; changes in government regulation and legislation within the countries in which we operate; governmental investigations; litigation; changes in tax laws; changes in capital requirements; changes in reinsurance arrangements and availability and cost of reinsurance; ability to collect amounts owed; catastrophic events, such as earthquakes, hurricanes or pandemics; the possible impact of international conflicts and other developments including terrorist acts and cyberterrorism; risks associated with reliance on distribution partners, capacity providers and program administrators; third party risks; risk that models used to manage the business do not function as expected; climate change risk; risk of economic downturn; risk of inflation; risks relating to cyber-security; risks relating to credit ratings; and other risks and factors detailed from time to time in our documents filed with securities regulators in Canada.

    We caution that the foregoing list of important factors that may affect future results is not exhaustive. When relying on our forward-looking statements and information, investors and others should carefully consider the foregoing factors and other uncertainties and potential events. Except as required by law, our Company undertakes no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements or information, whether written or oral, that may be as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

    Cautionary Non-IFRS and Other Financial Measures

    Reported results conform to generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), in accordance with IFRS. In addition to reported results, our Company also presents certain financial measures, including non-IFRS financial measures that are historical, non-IFRS ratios, and supplementary financial measures, to assess results. Non-IFRS financial measures, such as operating net income, are utilized to assess the Company’s overall performance. To arrive at operating results, our Company adjusts for certain items to normalize earnings to core operations, in order to reflect our North American specialty operations. Non-IFRS ratios include a non-IFRS financial measure as one or more of its components. Examples of non-IFRS ratios include operating diluted earnings per share and operating ROE. The Company believes that non-IFRS financial measures and non-IFRS ratios provide the reader with an enhanced understanding of our results and related trends and increase transparency and clarity into the core results of the business. Non-IFRS financial measures and non-IFRS ratios are not standardized terms under IFRS and, therefore, may not be comparable to similar terms used by other companies. Supplementary financial measures depict the Company’s financial performance and position, and are explained in this document where they first appear, and incorporates information by reference to our Company’s current MD&A, for the three months ended March 31, 2025. To access MD&A, see Trisura’s website or SEDAR+ at www.sedarplus.ca. These measures are pursuant to National Instrument 52-112 Non-GAAP and Other Financial Measures Disclosure.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Asure Announces First Quarter 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Reports First Quarter 2025 Total Revenues of $34.9 million

    Recurring Revenues Grew 10% from Prior Year

    AUSTIN, Texas, May 01, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Asure Software, Inc. (“we”, “us”, “our”, “Asure” or the “Company”) (Nasdaq: ASUR), a leading provider of cloud-based Human Capital Management (“HCM”) software solutions, today reported results for the first quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    First Quarter 2025 Financial Highlights

    • Revenue of $34.9 million, up 10% year over year, excluding ERTC revenue up 13% from the prior year first quarter
    • Recurring revenue of $33.2 million versus $30.3 million during the prior year first quarter
    • Net loss of $2.4 million versus a net loss of $0.3 million during the prior year first quarter
    • EBITDA(1) of $4.1 million versus $4.4 million during the prior year first quarter
    • Adjusted EBITDA(1) of $7.3 million versus $6.8 million during the prior year first quarter
    • Gross profit of $24.6 million versus $22.6 million during the prior year first quarter
    • Non-GAAP gross profit(1) of $26.3 million (Non-GAAP gross margin(1) of 75%) versus $23.8 million (and 75% in prior year first quarter)

    Recent Business Highlights

    • New Payroll Tax Management solution launched which is designed specifically for large Canadian companies and global enterprises with employees in Canada. Our ability to serve enterprise clients with international workforces with this innovative solution creates further opportunities to grow our business and the seamless integration of payroll tax services into major platforms such as Workday, Oracle, and SAP is a key benefit. The Canadian payroll tax solution addresses critical compliance needs for organizations managing cross-border payroll processes, reducing complexity and ensuring accurate, timely filing.
    • In April 2025 we entered into a credit agreement primarily with MidCap Financial Trust, whereby the Company may borrow up to $60 million. At closing, which occurred on April 10, we received $20 million of gross proceeds.

    (1)This financial measure is not calculated in accordance with GAAP and is defined on page 3 of this press release. A reconciliation of this non-GAAP measure to the most applicable GAAP measure begins on page 11 of this release.

    Management Commentary

    “We are excited to be off to a great start to 2025 with healthy results for our first quarter of 2025 with our revenues increasing 10% from the prior year first quarter. Our results were driven by strong performance coming from our Payroll Tax Management and initial contribution from our recently acquired product offerings,” said Asure Chairman and CEO Pat Goepel.

    “Our team is focused on continuing to execute our growth strategy. Our revenues are now more than 95% recurring, our contracted revenue backlog sits at an all-time high, and we believe that the investments we have made in the business will continue to drive greater adoption of our broadened product suite for the remainder of 2025.”

    Second Quarter 2025 and Full Year 2025 Revenue Guidance Ranges

    The Company is providing the following guidance for the second quarter of 2025 and the full year 2025 based on the Company’s year-to-date results and recent business trends. The guidance for our second quarter of 2025 and the full year 2025 excludes any contribution from future potential acquisitions.

    Guidance for 2025

    Guidance Range   Q2-2025   FY-2025
    Revenue $ 30.0 M – 32.0 M $ 134.0 M -138.0 M
    Adjusted EBITDA(1) $ 5.0 M -6.0 M   23% -24%
             

    Management uses GAAP, non-GAAP and adjusted measures when planning, monitoring, and evaluating the Company’s performance. The primary purpose of using non-GAAP and adjusted measures is to provide supplemental information that may prove useful to investors and to enable investors to evaluate the Company’s results in the same way management does.

    Management believes that supplementing GAAP disclosures with non-GAAP and adjusted disclosures provides investors with a more complete view of the Company’s operational performance and allows for meaningful period-to-period comparisons and analysis of trends in the Company’s business. Further, to the extent that other companies use similar methods in calculating adjusted financial measures, the provision of supplemental non-GAAP and adjusted information can allow for a comparison of the Company’s relative performance against other companies that also report non-GAAP and adjusted operating results.

    Management has not provided a reconciliation of guidance of GAAP to non-GAAP or adjusted disclosures because management is unable to predict the nature and materiality of non-recurring expenses without unreasonable effort.

    Management’s projections are based on management’s current beliefs and assumptions about the Company’s business, and the industry and the markets in which it operates; there are known and unknown risks and uncertainties associated with these projections. There can be no assurance that our actual results will not differ from the guidance set forth above. The Company assumes no obligation to update publicly any forward-looking statements, including its 2025 earnings guidance, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. Please refer to the “Use of Forward-Looking Statements” disclosures on page 5 of this press release as well as the risk factors in our quarterly and annual reports on file with the Securities and Exchange Commission for more information about risk that affect our business and industry.

    Conference Call Details

    Asure management will host a conference call on Thursday, May 1, 2025, at 3:30 pm Central (4:30 pm Eastern). Asure Chairman and CEO Pat Goepel and CFO John Pence will participate in the conference call followed by a question-and-answer session. The conference call will be broadcast live and available for replay via the investor relations section of the Company’s website. Analysts may participate on the conference call by dialing 877-407-9219 or 201-689-8852.

    About Asure Software, Inc.

    Asure (Nasdaq: ASUR) provides cloud-based Human Capital Management (HCM) software solutions that assist organizations of all sizes in streamlining their HCM processes. Asure’s suite of HCM solutions includes HR, payroll, time and attendance, benefits administration, payroll tax management, and talent management. The company’s approach to HR compliance services incorporates AI technology to enhance scalability and efficiency while prioritizing client interactions. For more information, please visit www.asuresoftware.com

    Non-GAAP and Adjusted Financial Measures

    This press release includes information about non-GAAP gross profit, non-GAAP sales and marketing expense, non-GAAP general and administrative expense, non-GAAP research and development expense, EBITDA, EBITDA margin, adjusted EBITDA, and adjusted EBITDA margin. These non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are measurements of financial performance that are not prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles and computational methods may differ from those used by other companies. Non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are not meant to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for comparable GAAP measures and should be read only in conjunction with the Company’s Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. Non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are reconciled to GAAP in the tables set forth in this release and are subject to reclassifications to conform to current period presentations.

    Non-GAAP gross profit differs from gross profit in that it excludes amortization, share-based compensation, and one-time items.

    Non-GAAP sales and marketing expense differs from sales and marketing expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

    Non-GAAP general and administrative expense differs from general and administrative expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

    Non-GAAP research and development expense differs from research and development expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

    EBITDA differs from net income (loss) in that it excludes items such as interest, income taxes, depreciation, and amortization. Asure is unable to predict with reasonable certainty the ultimate outcome of these exclusions without unreasonable effort.

    Adjusted EBITDA differs from EBITDA in that it excludes share-based compensation, other income (expense), net and one-time expenses. Asure is unable to predict with reasonable certainty the ultimate outcome of these exclusions without unreasonable effort.

    All adjusted and non-GAAP measures presented as “margin” are computed by dividing the applicable adjusted financial measure by total revenue.

    Specifically, as applicable to the respective financial measure, management is adjusting for the following items when calculating non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures as applicable for the periods presented. No additional adjustments have been made for potential income tax effects of the adjustments based on the Company’s current and anticipated de minimis effective federal tax rate, resulting from the Company’s continued losses for federal tax purposes and its tax net operating loss balances.

    Share-Based Compensation Expenses. The Company’s compensation strategy includes the use of share-based compensation to attract and retain employees and executives. It is principally aimed at aligning their interests with those of our stockholders and at long-term employee retention, rather than to motivate or reward operational performance for any particular period. Thus, share-based compensation expense varies for reasons that are generally unrelated to operational decisions and performance in any particular period.

    Depreciation. The Company excludes depreciation of fixed assets. Also included in the expense is the depreciation of capitalized software costs.

    Amortization of Purchased Intangibles. The Company views amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, such as the amortization of the cost associated with an acquired company’s research and development efforts, trade names, customer lists and customer relationships, and acquired lease intangibles, as items arising from pre-acquisition activities determined at the time of an acquisition. While these intangible assets are continually evaluated for impairment, amortization of the cost of purchased intangibles is a static expense, one that is not typically affected by operations during any particular period.

    Interest Expense, Net. The Company excludes accrued interest expense, the amortization of debt discounts and deferred financing costs.

    Income Taxes. The Company excludes income taxes, both at the federal and state levels.

    One-Time Expenses. The Company’s adjusted financial measures exclude the following costs to normalize comparable reporting periods, as these are generally non-recurring expenses that do not reflect the ongoing operational results. These items are typically not budgeted and are infrequent and unusual in nature.

    Settlements, Penalties and Interest. The Company excludes legal settlements, including separation agreements, penalties and interest that are generally one-time in nature and not reflective of the operational results of the business.

    Acquisition and Transaction Related Costs. The Company excludes these expenses as they are transaction costs and expenses that are generally one-time in nature and not reflective of the underlying operational results of our business. Examples of these types of expenses include legal, accounting, regulatory, other consulting services, severance and other employee costs.

    Other non-recurring Expenses. The Company excludes these as they are generally non-recurring items that are not reflective of the underlying operational results of the business and are generally not anticipated to recur. Some examples of these types of expenses, historically, have included write-offs or impairments of assets, demolition of office space and cybersecurity consultants.

    Other (Expense) Income, Net. The Company’s adjusted financial measures exclude Other (Expense) Income, Net because it includes items that are not reflective of the underlying operational results of the business, such as loan forgiveness, adjustments to contingent liabilities and credits earned as part of the CARES Act, passed by Congress in the wake of the coronavirus pandemic.

    Use of Forward-Looking Statements

    This press release contains certain statements made by management that may constitute “forward- looking” statements within the meaning of the safe harbor provisions of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These forward-looking statements about our financial results may include expected or projected U.S GAAP and other operating and non-operating results. The words “believe,” “may,” “will,” “estimate,” “projects,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “expect,” “should,” “plan,” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. Examples of “forward-looking statements” include statements we make regarding our operating performance, future results of operations and financial position, revenue growth, earnings or other projections. We have based these forward-looking statements largely on our current expectations and projections about future events and trends that we believe may affect our financial condition, results of operations, business strategy, short-term and long-term business operations and objectives, and financial needs. The achievement or success of the matters covered by such forward-looking statements involves risks, uncertainties and assumptions, over many of which we have no control. If any such risks or uncertainties materialize or if any of the assumptions prove incorrect, our results could differ materially from the results expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements we make.

    The risks and uncertainties referred to above include—but are not limited to—risks associated with breaches of the Company’s security measures; risks related to material weaknesses; possible fluctuations in the Company’s financial and operating results; privacy concerns and laws and other regulations may limit the effectiveness of our applications; the financial and other impact of any previous and future acquisitions; domestic and international regulatory developments, including changes to or applicability to our business of privacy and data securities laws, money transmitter laws and anti-money laundering laws; regulatory pressures on economic relief enacted as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic that change or cause different interpretations with respect to eligibility for such programs; risk of our software and solutions not functioning adequately; interruptions, delays or changes in the Company’s services or the Company’s Web hosting; may incur debt to meet future capital requirements; volatility and weakness in bank and capital markets; access to additional capital; significant costs as a result of operating as a public company; the expiration of Employee Retention Tax Credits (“ERTC”) and the impact of the Internal Revenue Service recent measures regarding ERTC claims and the corresponding cash collections of existing receivables; the inability to continue to release timely updates for changes in laws; the inability to develop new and improved versions of the Company’s services and technological developments; customer’s nonrenewal of their agreements and other similar changes could negatively impact revenue, operating results and financial conditions; the exposure of market, interest, credit and liquidity risk on client funds held int rust; the Company’s operation in highlight competitive markets; risk that our clients could have insufficient funds that could result in limitations in the ability to transmit ACH transactions; impairment of intangible assets; litigation and any related claims, negotiations and settlements, including with respect to intellectual property matters or industry-specific regulations; various financial aspects of the Company’s Software-as-a-Service model; adverse effects to our business a result of claims, lawsuits, and other proceedings; issues in the use of artificial intelligence in our HCM products and services; adverse changes to financial accounting standards to the Company; inability to maintain third-party licensed software; evolving regulation of the Internet, changes in the infrastructure underlying the Internet or interruptions in Internet; factors affecting the Company’s deferred tax assets and ability to value and utilize them; the nature of the Company’s business model; inability to adopt new or correctly interpret existing money service and money transmitter business status; the Company’s ability to hire, retain and motivate employees and manage the Company’s growth; interruptions to supply chains and extended shut down of businesses; potential enactment of adverse tax laws, regulation, political, economic and social factors; potential sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock along with its volatility; risks associate with potential equity-related transactions including dividends, rights under the stockholder plan to discourage certain actions and other impacts as a result of actions of our stockholders.

    Please review the Company’s risk factors in its annual report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) on March 6, 2025.

    The forward-looking statements, including the financial guidance and 2025 outlook, contained in this press release represent the judgment of the Company as of the date of this press release, and the Company expressly disclaims any intent, obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements to reflect any change in the Company’s expectations with regard to these forward looking statements or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statements are based. © 2025 Asure Software, Inc. All rights reserved

     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
    (in thousands, except per share amounts)
           
      March 31, 2025   December 31, 2024
           
    ASSETS      
    Current assets:      
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 14,076     $ 21,425  
    Accounts receivable, net of allowance for credit losses of $6,545 and $6,328 at March 31, 2025 and December 31, 2024, respectively   15,800       18,154  
    Inventory   220       195  
    Prepaid expenses and other current assets   5,970       4,888  
    Total current assets before funds held for clients   36,066       44,662  
    Funds held for clients   257,019       192,615  
    Total current assets   293,085       237,277  
    Property and equipment, net   20,999       19,669  
    Goodwill   94,724       94,724  
    Intangible assets, net   73,003       69,114  
    Operating lease assets, net   4,403       4,041  
    Other assets, net   12,727       11,813  
    Total assets $ 498,941     $ 436,638  
    LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERSEQUITY      
    Current liabilities:      
    Current portion of notes payable $ 7,948     $ 7,008  
    Accounts payable   2,475       1,364  
    Accrued compensation and benefits   2,911       4,485  
    Operating lease liabilities, current   1,432       1,438  
    Other accrued liabilities   6,071       6,600  
    Deferred revenue   4,662       8,363  
    Total current liabilities before client fund obligations   25,499       29,258  
    Client fund obligations   258,586       194,378  
    Total current liabilities   284,085       223,636  
    Long-term liabilities:      
    Deferred revenue   3,321       3,430  
    Deferred tax liability   2,903       2,612  
    Notes payable, net of current portion   6,172       5,709  
    Operating lease liabilities, noncurrent   3,892       3,578  
    Other liabilities   905       358  
    Total long-term liabilities   17,193       15,687  
    Total liabilities   301,278       239,323  
    Stockholders’ equity:      
    Preferred stock, $0.01 par value; 1,500 shares authorized; none issued or outstanding          
    Common stock, $0.01 par value; 44,000 shares authorized; 27,122 and 26,671 shares issued, 27,122 and 26,671 shares outstanding at December 31, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively   271       267  
    Treasury stock at cost, zero(1)at March 31, 2025 and December 31, 2024          
    Additional paid-in capital   507,149       504,849  
    Accumulated deficit   (309,624 )     (307,226 )
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (133 )     (575 )
    Total stockholders’ equity   197,663       197,315  
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 498,941     $ 436,638  
    (1) The aggregate Treasury stock of prior repurchases of the Company’s own common stock was retired and subsequently issued effective January 1, 2024. See the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the impact of this transaction.
     
     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE LOSS
    (in thousands, except per share amounts)
     
      Three Months Ended
    March 31,
      2025   2024
           
    Revenue:      
    Recurring $ 33,187     $ 30,273  
    Professional services, hardware and other   1,667       1,379  
    Total revenue   34,854       31,652  
    Cost of sales   10,246       9,045  
    Gross profit   24,608       22,607  
    Operating expenses:      
    Sales and marketing   8,386       7,767  
    General and administrative   11,900       10,063  
    Research and development   2,029       1,769  
    Amortization of intangible assets   4,308       3,449  
    Total operating expenses   26,623       23,048  
    Loss from operations   (2,015 )     (441 )
    Interest income   171       336  
    Interest expense   (451 )     (180 )
    Other income, net   188       10  
    Loss from operations before income taxes   (2,107 )     (275 )
    Income tax expense   291       33  
    Net loss   (2,398 )     (308 )
    Other comprehensive income (loss):      
    Unrealized gain (loss) on marketable securities   442       (244 )
    Comprehensive loss $ (1,956 )   $ (552 )
           
    Basic and diluted loss per share      
    Basic $ (0.09 )   $ (0.01 )
    Diluted $ (0.09 )   $ (0.01 )
           
    Weighted average basic and diluted shares      
    Basic   26,961       25,334  
    Diluted   26,961       25,334  
                   
     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
    (in thousands)
       
      Three Months Ended March 31,
      2025   2024
           
    Cash flows from operating activities:      
    Net loss $ (2,398 )   $ (308 )
    Adjustments to reconcile loss to net cash provided by (used in) operations:      
    Depreciation and amortization   5,972       4,860  
    Amortization of operating lease assets   374       335  
    Amortization of debt financing costs and discount   253       142  
    Non-cash interest expense   197        
    Net accretion of discounts and amortization of premiums on available-for-sale securities   (110 )     (78 )
    Provision for expected losses   93       46  
    Provision for deferred income taxes   291       24  
    Net realized gains on sales of available-for-sale securities   (656 )     (652 )
    Share-based compensation   1,863       1,902  
    Changes in operating assets and liabilities:      
    Accounts receivable   2,261       (919 )
    Inventory   (24 )     (50 )
    Prepaid expenses and other assets   (1,049 )     (473 )
    Operating lease right-of-use assets         30  
    Accounts payable   903       (960 )
    Accrued expenses and other long-term obligations   (1,737 )     (2,665 )
    Operating lease liabilities   (427 )     (141 )
    Deferred revenue   (3,810 )     (5,040 )
    Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities   1,996       (3,947 )
    Cash flows from investing activities:      
    Acquisition of intangible assets   (6,346 )     (710 )
    Purchases of property and equipment   (192 )     (240 )
    Software capitalization costs   (2,769 )     (2,435 )
    Purchases of available-for-sale securities   (6,589 )     (3,516 )
    Proceeds from sales and maturities of available-for-sale securities   3,266       2,406  
    Net cash used in investing activities   (12,630 )     (4,495 )
    Cash flows from financing activities:      
    Payments made on amounts due for the acquisition of intangibles   (723 )     (236 )
    Net proceeds from issuance of common stock   441       176  
    Net change in client fund obligations   64,207       21,122  
    Net cash provided by financing activities   63,925       21,062  
    Net increase in cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash, and restricted cash equivalents   53,291       12,620  
    Cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash and restricted cash equivalents, beginning of period   145,712       177,622  
    Cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash and restricted cash equivalents, end of period $ 199,003     $ 190,242  
                   
     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (continued)
    (in thousands)
       
      Three Months Ended March 31,
      2025
      2024
           
    Reconciliation of cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash, and restricted cash equivalents to the Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 14,076     $ 23,166  
    Restricted cash and restricted cash equivalents included in funds held for clients   184,927       167,076  
    Total cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash, and restricted cash equivalents $ 199,003     $ 190,242  
           
    Supplemental information:      
    Cash paid for interest $ 125     $  
           
    Non-cash investing and financing activities:      
    Acquisition of intangible assets $ 750     $ 6,345  
    Notes payable issued for acquisitions $ 1,150     $ 827  
    Shares issued for acquisitions $     $ 4,494  
                   
     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP AND ADJUSTED FINANCIAL MEASURES
    (unaudited)
                     
    (in thousands) Q1-25 Q4-24 Q3-24 Q2-24 Q1-24 Q4-23 Q3-23 Q2-23
    Revenue(1) $ 34,854   $ 30,792   $ 29,304   $ 28,044   $ 31,652   $ 26,264   $ 29,334   $ 30,420  
                     
    Gross Profit to non-GAAP Gross Profit                
    Gross Profit $ 24,608   $ 20,928   $ 19,704   $ 18,868   $ 22,607   $ 17,839   $ 21,280   $ 22,018  
    Gross Margin   70.6 %   68.0 %   67.2 %   67.3 %   71.4 %   67.9 %   72.5 %   72.4 %
                     
    Share-based Compensation   44     44     44     43     40     32     28     46  
    Depreciation   1,369     1,190     1,232     1,145     1,110     921     984     1,309  
    Amortization – intangibles   50     50     50     50     50     50     50     50  
    One-time expenses                
    Settlements, penalties & interest   29     25     2     3         (6 )   8      
    Acquisition and transaction costs   167     221     367     264     39              
    Other non-recurring expenses       84                          
    Non-GAAP Gross Profit $ 26,267   $ 22,542   $ 21,399   $ 20,373   $ 23,846   $ 18,836   $ 22,350   $ 23,423  
    Non-GAAP Gross Margin   75.4 %   73.2 %   73.0 %   72.6 %   75.3 %   71.7 %   76.2 %   77.0 %
                     
    Sales and Marketing Expense to non-GAAP Sales and Marketing Expense
    Sales and Marketing Expense $ 8,386   $ 6,945   $ 6,680   $ 6,924   $ 7,767   $ 6,422   $ 6,597   $ 8,515  
                     
    Share-based Compensation   322     251     269     237     243     180     210     149  
    Depreciation   1         1         1     1          
    One-time expenses                
    Settlements, penalties & interest   51     78     (5 )   5     18     6     30     4  
    Acquisition and transaction costs   30     9     68     37     11              
    Other non-recurring expenses       52                         180  
    Non-GAAP Sales and Marketing Expense $ 7,982   $ 6,555   $ 6,347   $ 6,645   $ 7,494   $ 6,235   $ 6,357   $ 8,182  
                     
    General and Administrative Expense to non-GAAP General and Administrative Expense
    General and Administrative Expense $ 11,900   $ 9,940   $ 10,378   $ 10,118   $ 10,063   $ 9,747   $ 9,294   $ 10,336  
                     
    Share-based Compensation   1,407     1,081     1,187     1,122     1,535     980     936     1,298  
    Depreciation   244     269     264     256     251     225     200     234  
    One-time expenses                
    Settlements, penalties & interest   492     142     377     304     98     284     101     432  
    Acquisition and transaction costs   491     282     371     245     57     51          
    Other non-recurring expenses   136     220     253         86     53         453  
    Non-GAAP General and Administrative Expense $ 9,130   $ 7,946   $ 7,926   $ 8,191   $ 8,036   $ 8,154   $ 8,057   $ 7,919  
                     
    Research and Development Expense to non-GAAP Research and Development Expense
    Research and Development Expense $ 2,029   $ 2,103   $ 1,973   $ 1,962   $ 1,769   $ 1,739   $ 1,803   $ 1,325  
                     
    Share-based Compensation   90     87     90     86     85     69     76     89  
    Depreciation   1       $   $   $   $   $   $  
    One-time expenses                
    Settlements, penalties & interest   9     21         27     31              
    Acquisition and transaction costs   91     153     195     369     147              
    Other non-recurring expenses       29                          
    Non-GAAP Research and Development Expense $ 1,838   $ 1,813   $ 1,688   $ 1,480   $ 1,506   $ 1,670   $ 1,727   $ 1,236  
                     

    (1)Note that first quarters are seasonally strong as recurring year-end W2/ACA revenue is recognized in this period.

     
    ASURE SOFTWARE, INC.
    RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP AND ADJUSTED FINANCIAL MEASURES (cont.)
    (unaudited)
                     
    (in thousands) Q1-25 Q4-24 Q3-24 Q2-24 Q1-24 Q4-23 Q3-23 Q2-23
    Revenue(1) $ 34,854   $ 30,792   $ 29,304   $ 28,044   $ 31,652   $ 26,264   $ 29,334   $ 30,420  
                     
    GAAP Net Loss to Adjusted EBITDA
    GAAP Net Loss $ (2,398 ) $ (3,204 ) $ (3,901 ) $ (4,360 ) $ (308 ) $ (3,582 ) $ (2,206 ) $ (3,765 )
                     
    Interest expense, net   280     211     109     (53 )   (156 )   (24 )   782     1,593  
    Income taxes   291     499     170     231     33     (158 )   (123 )   627  
    Depreciation   1,614     1,460     1,497     1,402     1,361     1,148     1,185     1,542  
    Amortization – intangibles   4,358     4,482     4,345     4,096     3,499     3,743     3,384     3,343  
    EBITDA $ 4,145   $ 3,448   $ 2,220   $ 1,316   $ 4,429   $ 1,127   $ 3,022   $ 3,340  
    EBITDA Margin   11.9 %   11.2 %   7.6 %   4.7 %   14.0 %   4.3 %   10.3 %   11.0 %
                     
    Share-based Compensation   1,863     1,463     1,591     1,488     1,902     1,260     1,251     1,582  
    One Time Expenses                
    Settlements, penalties & interest   581     266     375     339     147     283     140     436  
    Acquisition and transaction costs   779     665     1,001     914     254     51          
    Other non-recurring expenses   136     385     253         86     53         633  
    Other expense (income), net   (188 )   2             (10 )   1     1,800     93  
    Adjusted EBITDA $ 7,316   $ 6,229   $ 5,440   $ 4,057   $ 6,808   $ 2,775   $ 6,213   $ 6,084  
    Adjusted EBITDA Margin   21.0 %   20.2 %   18.6 %   14.5 %   21.5 %   10.6 %   21.2 %   20.0 %
                                                     

    (1)Note that first quarters are seasonally strong as recurring year-end W2/ACA revenue is recognized in this period.

    Investor Relations Contact
    Patrick McKillop
    Vice President, Investor Relations
    617-335-5058
    patrick.mckillop@asuresoftware.com 

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Monolithic Power Systems Earnings Commentary for the Quarter Ended March 31, 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    KIRKLAND, Wash., May 01, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — MPS will report its results after the market closes on May 1, 2025 and host a question-and-answer webinar at 2:00 p.m. PT / 5:00 p.m. ET. The live event will be held via a Zoom webcast, which can be accessed at https://mpsic.zoom.us/j/92570889542.

    Q1 2025 Financial Summary  (Unaudited)
      GAAP
      Q1’25
      Q4’24
      Q1’24
        QoQ Change YoY Change
    Revenue ($k) $ 637,554   $ 621,665   457,885     Up 2.6% Up 39.2%
    Gross Margin 55.4%   55.4%   55.1%     Flat Up 0.3 pts
    Opex ($k) $ 184,471   $ 181,101   156,954     Up 1.9% Up 17.5%
    Operating Margin 26.5%   26.3%   20.9%     Up 0.2 pts Up 5.6 pts
    Net income ($k) $ 133,791   $ 1,449,363   92,541     Down 90.8% Up 44.6%
    Diluted EPS $ 2.79   $ 29.88   1.89     Down 90.7% Up 47.6%
      Non-GAAP
      Q1’25
      Q4’24
      Q1’24
        QoQ Change YoY Change
    Revenue ($k) $ 637,554   $ 621,665   $ 457,885     Up 2.6% Up 39.2%
    Gross Margin 55.7%   55.8%   55.7%     Down 0.1 pts Flat
    Opex ($k) $ 133,526   $ 126,117   $ 103,426     Up 5.9% Up 29.1%
    Operating Margin 34.7%   35.5%   33.1%     Down 0.8 pts Up 1.6 pts
    Net income ($k) $ 193,813   $ 198,401   $ 137,492     Down 2.3% Up 41.0%
    Diluted EPS $ 4.04   $ 4.09   $ 2.81     Down 1.2% Up 43.8%
    Tax Rate 15.0%   12.5%   12.5%     Up 2.5 pts Up 2.5 pts
    Revenue by End Market
     
        Revenue   YoY Change   % of Revenue
    End Market ($M)   Q1’25
    Q1’24   $   %     Q1’25   Q1’24  
    Storage & Computing   $ 188.5 $ 106.1   $ 82.4   77.7%     29.6 23.2
    Automotive   144.9 87.1   57.8   66.4%     22.7   19.0  
    Enterprise Data   132.9 149.7   (16.8 (11.2%   20.8   32.7  
    Communications   71.8 46.7   25.1   53.7%     11.3   10.2  
    Consumer   56.9 38.1   18.8   49.3%     8.9   8.3  
    Industrial   42.6 30.2   12.4   41.1%     6.7   6.6  
    Total   $ 637.6 $ 457.9   $ 179.7   39.2%     100 100
                               

    Ongoing Business Conditions

    In Q1 2025, MPS achieved record quarterly revenue of $637.6 million, slightly higher than revenue in the fourth quarter of 2024 and 39.2% higher than revenue in the first quarter of 2024.

    Our performance during the quarter reflected the continued strength of our diversified market strategy and a continued trend of the ordering patterns we saw at the end of 2024.

    Q1 2025 highlights include:

    • At our March 20th investor day, we showcased MPS innovation across a range of areas including new opportunities in Robotics, Automotive, Data Center, Building Automation, Medical, and Audio.
    • In Q1, Storage and Computing segment revenue increased 38% quarter-over-quarter on strong demand for both memory and notebook solutions.
    • We continue to win designs across all major Enterprise Data customers with revenue ramps expected in the second half of this year.
    • Finally, Q1 ’25 Automotive revenue increased 13% from Q4’24, the third consecutive quarter of sequential double-digit growth.

    MPS continues to focus on innovation, solving our customers’ most challenging problems, and maintaining the highest level of quality. We continue to invest in new technology, expand into new markets, and to diversify our end-market applications and global supply chain. This will allow us to capture future growth opportunities, maintain supply stability, and swiftly adapt to market changes as they occur.

    “Our proven, long-term growth strategy remains intact as we continue our transformation from being a chip-only, semiconductor supplier to a full service, silicon-based solutions provider,” said Michael Hsing, CEO and founder of MPS.

    Q1’25 Revenue Results

    MPS reported first quarter revenue of $637.6 million, slightly higher than the fourth quarter of 2024 and 39.2% higher than the first quarter of 2024. Compared with the fourth quarter of 2024, sales in Storage & Computing, Automotive, Communication and Industrial improved sequentially.

    First quarter 2025 Storage and Computing revenue of $188.5 million increased 38.1% from the fourth quarter of 2024. The sequential increase was primarily driven by higher sales of power solutions for storage and notebooks. First quarter 2025 Storage and Computing revenue was up 77.7% year over year. Storage and Computing revenue represented 29.6% of MPS’s first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 22.0% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    First quarter Automotive revenue of $144.9 million increased 12.9% from the fourth quarter of 2024 primarily from higher sales in ADAS, body electronics, and infotainment power solutions. First quarter 2025 Automotive revenue was up 66.4% year over year. Automotive revenue represented 22.7% of MPS’s first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 20.6% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    First quarter 2025 Communications revenue of $71.8 million was up 12.3% from the fourth quarter of 2025 primarily on higher sales into networking and optical solutions. First quarter 2025 Communications revenue was up 53.7% year over year. Communications sales represented 11.3% of our total first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 10.3% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    First quarter 2025 Industrial revenue of $42.6 million increased 4.3% from the fourth quarter of 2024 primarily due to higher sales for industrial meters. First quarter 2025 Industrial revenue was up 41.1% year over year. Industrial revenue represented 6.7% of our total first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 6.6% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    First quarter Consumer revenue of $56.9 million decreased 0.6% from the fourth quarter of 2024 primarily from lower sales in gaming partially offset by higher sales for TV solutions. First quarter 2025 Consumer revenue was up 49.3% year over year. Consumer revenue represented 8.9% of MPS’s first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 9.2% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    In our Enterprise Data market, first quarter 2025 revenue of $132.9 million decreased 31.8% from the fourth quarter of 2024. First quarter 2025 Enterprise Data revenue was down 11.2% year over year. Enterprise Data revenue represented 20.8% of MPS’s first quarter 2025 revenue compared with 31.3% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Q1’25 Gross Margin & Operating Income

    GAAP gross margin was 55.4%, flat to the fourth quarter of 2024. Our GAAP operating income was $168.8 million compared to $163.3 million reported in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Non-GAAP gross margin for the first quarter of 2025 was 55.7%, down 0.1 percentage points compared to the fourth quarter of 2024. Our non-GAAP operating income was $221.5 million compared to $220.7 million reported in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Q1’25 Operating Expenses

    Our GAAP operating expenses were $184.5 million in the first quarter of 2025 compared with $181.1 million in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Our Non-GAAP operating expenses were $133.5 million, up from $126.1 million in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    The differences between non-GAAP operating expenses and GAAP operating expenses for the quarters discussed here are primarily stock-based compensation and related expenses and deferred compensation plan income.

    Total stock-based compensation and related expenses, including approximately $1.7 million charged to cost of goods sold, was $53.8 million compared with $56.3 million recorded in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    The Bottom Line

    First quarter 2025 GAAP net income was $133.8 million or $2.79 per fully diluted share, compared with $1.4 billion or $29.88 per share in the fourth quarter of 2024. Fourth quarter 2024 GAAP net income and EPS included the recognition of a tax benefit granted to a foreign subsidiary.

    First quarter 2025 non-GAAP net income was $193.8 million or $4.04 per fully diluted share, compared with $198.4 million or $4.09 per fully diluted share in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    The first quarter 2025 non-GAAP tax rate increased to 15% from 12.5% in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    There were 48.0 million fully diluted shares outstanding at the end of the first quarter of 2025.

    Balance Sheet and Cash Flow

    Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments were $1,026.7 million at the end of the first quarter of 2025 compared to $862.9 million at the end of the fourth quarter of 2024. For the first quarter of 2025, MPS generated operating cash flow of $256.4 million compared with the fourth quarter of 2024 operating cash flow of $167.7 million.

    Accounts receivable at the end of the first quarter of 2025 were $214.9 million, representing 31 days of sales outstanding, which was 6 days higher than the 25 days reported at the end of the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Our internal inventories at the end of the first quarter of 2025 were $454.8 million, up from $419.6 million at the end of the fourth quarter of 2024. Days of inventory of 146 days at the end of the first quarter of 2025 was 8 days higher than at the end of the fourth quarter of 2024.

    We have carefully managed our internal inventories throughout the year, balancing the uncertainty in the market with being prepared to capture market upturns when they occur. Comparing current inventory levels using next quarter’s projected revenue, days of inventory at the end of the first quarter of 143 days was 9 days higher than at the end of the fourth quarter of 2024.

    Selected Balance Sheet and Inventory Data (Unaudited)
           
      Q1’25 Q4’24 Q1’24
    Cash, Cash Equivalents, and Short-Term Investments $ 1,026.7 M $ 862.9 M $ 1,286.4 M
    Operating Cash Flow $ 256.4 M $ 167.7 M $ 248.0 M
    Accounts Receivable $ 214.9 M $ 172.5 M $ 194.4 M
    Days of Sales Outstanding 31 Days 25 Days 39 Days
    Internal Inventories $ 454.8 M $ 419.6 M $ 396.0 M
    Days of Inventory (current quarter revenue) 146 Days 138 Days 175 Days
    Days of Inventory (next quarter revenue) 143 Days 134 Days 159 Days
           

    Q2’25 Business Outlook

    For the second quarter of 2025 ending June 30, we are forecasting:

    • Revenue in the range of $640 million to $660 million.
    • GAAP gross margin in the range of 54.9% to 55.5%.
    • Non-GAAP gross margin in the range of 55.2% to 55.8%, which excludes the impact from stock-based compensation and related expenses as well as the impact from amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.
    • Total stock-based compensation and related expenses in the range of $58.3 million to $60.3 million including approximately $1.9 million that would be charged to cost of goods sold.
    • GAAP operating expenses between $189 million and $195 million.
    • Non-GAAP operating expenses in the range of $132.6 million to $136.6 million. This estimate excludes stock-based compensation and related expenses in the range of $56.4 million to $58.4 million.
    • Interest and other income in the range from $6.2 million to $6.6 million before foreign exchange gains or losses.
    • Non-GAAP tax rate of 15% for 2025.
    • Fully diluted shares outstanding in the range of 47.9 to 48.3 million shares.

    For further information, contact:

    Bernie Blegen
    Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
    Monolithic Power Systems, Inc.
    408-826-0777
    MPSInvestor.Relations@monolithicpower.com 

    Safe Harbor Statement

    This earnings commentary contains, and statements that will be made during the accompanying webinar will contain, forward-looking statements, as that term is defined in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, including under the “Q2’25 Business Outlook” section herein, our statement regarding our business focus, our statement regarding the expansion and diversification of our global supply chain and the quote from our CEO and founder, including, among other things, (i) projected revenue, GAAP and non-GAAP gross margin, GAAP and non-GAAP operating expenses, stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, other income before foreign exchange gains or losses, and fully diluted shares outstanding, (ii) our outlook for the second quarter of fiscal year 2025 and the near-term, medium-term and long-term prospects of MPS, including our ability to adapt to changing market conditions, performance against our business plan, our ability to grow despite the various challenges facing our business, our industry and the global economic environment, revenue growth in certain of our market segments, potential new business segments, our continued investment in research and development (“R&D”), expected revenue growth, customers’ acceptance of our new product offerings, the prospects of our new product development, our expectations regarding market and industry segment trends and prospects, and our projected expansion of capacity and the impact it may have on our business, (iii) our ability to penetrate new markets and expand our market share, (iv) the seasonality of our business, (v) our ability to reduce our expenses, and (vi) statements regarding the assumptions underlying or relating to any statement described in (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), or (v). These forward-looking statements are not historical facts or guarantees of future performance or events, are based on current expectations, estimates, beliefs, assumptions, goals, and objectives, and involve significant known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause actual results to be materially different from the results expressed by these statements. Readers of this earnings commentary and listeners to the accompanying conference call are cautioned not to place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date hereof. Factors that could cause actual results to differ include, but are not limited to, continued uncertainties in the global economy, including due to the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts, global tariffs and retaliatory measures, inflation, consumer sentiment and other factors; adverse events arising from orders or regulations of governmental entities, including such orders or regulations that impact our customers or suppliers, and adoption of new or amended accounting standards; adverse changes in laws and government regulations such as tariffs on imports of foreign goods, export regulations and export classifications, and tax laws or the interpretation of same, including in foreign countries where MPS has offices or operations; the effect of export controls, trade and economic sanctions regulations and other regulatory or contractual limitations on our ability to sell or develop our products in certain foreign markets, particularly in China; our ability to obtain governmental licenses and approvals for international trading activities or technology transfers, including export licenses; acceptance of, or demand for, our products, in particular the new products launched recently, being different than expected; our ability to increase market share in our targeted markets; difficulty in predicting or budgeting for future customer demand and channel inventories, expenses and financial contingencies (including as a result of any continuing impact from the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts); our ability to efficiently and effectively develop new products and receive a return on our R&D expense investment; our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers; our ability to meet customer demand for our products due to constraints on our third-party suppliers’ ability to manufacture sufficient quantities of our products or otherwise; our ability to expand manufacturing capacity to support future growth; adverse changes in production and testing efficiency of our products; any political, cultural, military, regulatory, economic, foreign exchange and operational changes in China, where a significant portion of our manufacturing capacity comes from; any market disruptions or interruptions in our schedule of new product development releases; our ability to manage our inventory levels; adequate supply of our products from our third-party manufacturing partners; adverse changes or developments in the semiconductor industry generally, which is cyclical in nature, and our ability to adjust our operations to address such changes or developments; the ongoing consolidation of companies in the semiconductor industry; competition generally and the increasingly competitive nature of our industry; our ability to realize the anticipated benefits of companies and products that MPS acquires, and our ability to effectively and efficiently integrate these acquired companies and products into our operations; the risks, uncertainties and costs of litigation in which MPS is involved; the outcome of any upcoming trials, hearings, motions and appeals; the adverse impact on our financial performance if its tax and litigation provisions are inadequate; our ability to effectively manage our growth and attract and retain qualified personnel; the effect of epidemics and pandemics on the global economy and on our business; the risks associated with the financial market, economy, global tariffs and retaliatory measures, and geopolitical uncertainties, including the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts; and other important risk factors identified under the caption “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in our Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) filings, including, but not limited to, our Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the SEC on March 3, 2025. MPS assumes no obligation to update the information in this earnings commentary or in the accompanying webinar.

    Non-GAAP Financial Measures

    This CFO Commentary contains references to certain non-GAAP financial measures. Non-GAAP net income, non-GAAP net income per share, non-GAAP gross margin, non-GAAP operating expenses, non-GAAP other income, net, non-GAAP operating income and non-GAAP income before income taxes differ from net income, net income per share, gross margin, operating expenses, other income, net, operating income and income before income taxes determined in accordance with U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”). Non-GAAP net income and non-GAAP net income per share exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, which include stock-based compensation expense and employer payroll taxes in relation to the stock-based compensation, net deferred compensation plan expense (income), amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and related tax effects. Non-GAAP gross margin excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP operating expenses exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan income (expense). Non-GAAP operating income excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP other income, net excludes the effect of deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP income before income taxes excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and net deferred compensation plan expense (income). Projected non-GAAP gross margin excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, and amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets. Projected non-GAAP operating expenses exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses. These non-GAAP financial measures are not prepared in accordance with GAAP and should not be considered as a substitute for, or superior to, measures of financial performance prepared in accordance with GAAP. A schedule reconciling non-GAAP financial measures is included at the end of this press release. MPS utilizes both GAAP and non-GAAP financial measures to assess what it believes to be its core operating performance and to evaluate and manage its internal business and assist in making financial operating decisions. MPS believes that the inclusion of non-GAAP financial measures, together with GAAP measures, provides investors with an alternative presentation useful to investors’ understanding of MPS’s core operating results and trends. Additionally, MPS believes that the inclusion of non-GAAP measures, together with GAAP measures, provides investors with an additional dimension of comparability to similar companies. However, investors should be aware that non-GAAP financial measures utilized by other companies are not likely to be comparable in most cases to the non-GAAP financial measures used by MPS. See the GAAP to Non-GAAP reconciliations in the tables set forth below.

    RECONCILIATION OF NET INCOME TO NON-GAAP NET INCOME
    (Unaudited, in thousands, except per share amounts)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Net income   $ 133,791     $ 92,541  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile net income to non-GAAP net income:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income), net     (6 )     47  
    Tax effect     5,897       (7,156 )
    Non-GAAP net income   $ 193,813     $ 137,492  
                     
    Non-GAAP net income per share:                
    Basic   $ 4.05     $ 2.83  
    Diluted   $ 4.04     $ 2.81  
                     
    Shares used in the calculation of non-GAAP net income per share:                
    Basic     47,851       48,635  
    Diluted     48,006       48,928  
    RECONCILIATION OF GROSS MARGIN TO NON-GAAP GROSS MARGIN
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Gross profit   $ 353,230     $ 252,441  
    Gross margin     55.4 %     55.1 %
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile gross profit to non-GAAP gross profit:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     1,706       1,900  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     287       258  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     (163 )     440  
    Non-GAAP gross profit   $ 355,060     $ 255,039  
    Non-GAAP gross margin     55.7 %     55.7 %
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES TO NON-GAAP OPERATING EXPENSES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total operating expenses   $ 184,471     $ 156,954  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile total operating expenses to non-GAAP total operating expenses:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     (52,105 )     (49,869 )
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     (33 )     (33 )
    Deferred compensation plan income (expense)     1,193       (3,626 )
    Non-GAAP operating expenses   $ 133,526     $ 103,426  
                     
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING INCOME TO NON-GAAP OPERATING INCOME
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total operating income   $ 168,759     $ 95,487  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile total operating income to non-GAAP total operating income:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     (1,356 )     4,066  
    Non-GAAP operating income   $ 221,534     $ 151,613  
                     
    RECONCILIATION OF OTHER INCOME, NET, TO NON-GAAP OTHER INCOME, NET
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024  
    Total other income, net   $ 5,131     $ 9,540  
                   
    Adjustments to reconcile other income, net to non-GAAP other income, net:              
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     1,350       (4,019 )
    Non-GAAP other income, net   $ 6,481     $ 5,521  
                     
    RECONCILIATION OF INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES TO NON-GAAP INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total income before income taxes   $ 173,890     $ 105,027
                   
    Adjustments to reconcile income before income taxes to non-GAAP income before income taxes:              
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income), net     (6 )     47
    Non-GAAP income before income taxes   $ 228,015     $ 157,134
                   
    2025 SECOND QUARTER OUTLOOK
    RECONCILIATION OF GROSS MARGIN TO NON-GAAP GROSS MARGIN
    (Unaudited)
        Three Months Ending
    March 31, 2025
                     
        Low   High
    Gross margin     54.9 %     55.5 %
    Adjustment to reconcile gross margin to non-GAAP gross margin:                
    Stock-based compensation and other expenses     0.3 %     0.3 %
    Non-GAAP gross margin     55.2 %     55.8 %
                     
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES TO NON-GAAP OPERATING EXPENSES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ending
    March 31, 2025
                     
        Low   High
    Operating expenses   $ 189,000     $ 195,000  
    Adjustments to reconcile operating expenses to non-GAAP operating expenses:                
    Stock-based compensation and other expenses     (56,400 )     (58,400 )
    Non-GAAP operating expenses   $ 132,600     $ 136,600  
                     

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Viper Energy, Inc. Announces Closing of Drop Down Transaction

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    MIDLAND, Texas, May 01, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Viper Energy, Inc. (NASDAQ: VNOM) (“Viper” or the “Company”), a subsidiary of Diamondback Energy, Inc. (NASDAQ: FANG) (“Diamondback”), today announced that it and its operating subsidiary, Viper Energy Partners LLC (the “Operating Company”), have closed their previously announced acquisition of all of the equity interests in certain mineral and royalty interest-owning subsidiaries of Diamondback (the “Drop Down”). The total consideration for the Drop Down consisted of (i) $1.0 billion in cash and (ii) the issuance (the “Equity Issuance”) of 69,626,640 units representing limited liability company interests in the Operating Company and an equivalent number of shares of Viper’s Class B Common Stock, in each case, subject to transaction costs and certain customary post-closing adjustments.

    The mineral and royalty interests acquired by the Operating Company in the Drop Down represent approximately 22,847 net royalty acres in the Permian Basin, approximately 69% of which are currently operated by Diamondback. Viper funded the cash consideration for the Drop Down with (i) proceeds from its previously announced underwritten public offering of shares of its Class A Common Stock, completed on February 3, 2025, and (ii) borrowings under the Operating Company’s revolving credit facility. Immediately following the completion of the Drop Down, Diamondback beneficially owned approximately 53.7% of Viper’s outstanding voting common stock.

    The Drop Down was approved by Viper’s audit committee comprised of all independent directors and the full board of directors, in each case, on January 30, 2025, and by the majority of the Company’s stockholders, other than Diamondback and its subsidiaries, at the special meeting of the Company’s stockholders held on May 1, 2025 (the “Special Meeting”). At the Special Meeting, Viper’s stockholders also approved the Equity Issuance, as required under the rules of The Nasdaq Stock Market LLC.

    About Viper Energy, Inc.

    Viper is a corporation formed by Diamondback to own, acquire and exploit oil and natural gas properties in North America, with a focus on owning and acquiring mineral and royalty interests in oil-weighted basins, primarily the Permian Basin. For more information, please visit www.viperenergy.com.

    About Diamondback Energy, Inc.

    Diamondback is an independent oil and natural gas company headquartered in Midland, Texas focused on the acquisition, development, exploration and exploitation of unconventional, onshore oil and natural gas reserves primarily in the Permian Basin in West Texas. For more information, please visit www.diamondbackenergy.com.

    Forward-Looking Statements

    This news release contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, which involve risks, uncertainties, and assumptions. All statements, other than statements of historical fact, including statements regarding Viper’s: future performance; business strategy; future operations; estimates and projections of operating income, losses, costs and expenses, returns, cash flow, and financial position; production levels on properties in which Viper has mineral and royalty interests, developmental activity by other operators; reserve estimates and Viper’s ability to replace or increase reserves; anticipated benefits or other effects of strategic transactions (including the Drop Down and other acquisitions or divestitures); and plans and objectives (including Diamondback’s plans for developing Viper’s acreage and Viper’s cash dividend policy and common stock repurchase program) are forward-looking statements. When used in this news release, the words “aim,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “continue,” “could,” “estimate,” “expect,” “forecast,” “future,” “guidance,” “intend,” “may,” “model,” “outlook,” “plan,” “positioned,” “potential,” “predict,” “project,” “seek,” “should,” “target,” “will,” “would,” and similar expressions (including the negative of such terms) as they relate to Viper are intended to identify forward-looking statements, although not all forward-looking statements contain such identifying words. Although Viper believes that the expectations and assumptions reflected in its forward-looking statements are reasonable as and when made, they involve risks and uncertainties that are difficult to predict and, in many cases, beyond its control. Accordingly, forward-looking statements are not guarantees of Viper’s future performance and the actual outcomes could differ materially from what Viper expressed in its forward-looking statements.

    Factors that could cause the outcomes to differ materially include (but are not limited to) the following: changes in supply and demand levels for oil, natural gas, and natural gas liquids, and the resulting impact on the price for those commodities; the impact of public health crises, including epidemic or pandemic diseases, and any related company or government policies or actions; changes in U.S. energy, environmental, monetary and trade policies, including with respect to tariffs or other trade barriers, and any resulting trade tensions; actions taken by the members of OPEC and Russia affecting the production and pricing of oil, as well as other domestic and global political, economic, or diplomatic developments, including any impact of the ongoing war in Ukraine and the Israel-Hamas war on the global energy markets and geopolitical stability; instability in the financial sector; higher interest rates and their impact on the cost of capital; regional supply and demand factors, including delays, curtailment delays or interruptions of production on Viper’s mineral and royalty acreage, or governmental orders, rules or regulations that impose production limits on such acreage; federal and state legislative and regulatory initiatives relating to hydraulic fracturing, including the effect of existing and future laws and governmental regulations; physical and transition risks relating to climate change and the risks and other factors disclosed in Viper’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including its Forms 10-K, 10-Q and 8-K, which can be obtained free of charge on the Securities and Exchange Commission’s web site at http://www.sec.gov.

    In light of these factors, the events anticipated by Viper’s forward-looking statements may not occur at the time anticipated or at all. Moreover, new risks emerge from time to time. Viper cannot predict all risks, nor can it assess the impact of all factors on its business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those anticipated by any forward-looking statements it may make. Accordingly, you should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements made in this news release. All forward-looking statements speak only as of the date of this news release or, if earlier, as of the date they were made. Viper does not intend to, and disclaims any obligation to, update or revise any forward-looking statements unless required by applicable law.

    Investor Contact:
    Chip Seale
    +1 432.247.6218
    cseale@viperenergy.com

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: Monolithic Power Systems Announces Results for the First Quarter Ended March 31, 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    KIRKLAND, Wash., May 01, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Monolithic Power Systems, Inc. (“MPS”) (Nasdaq: MPWR), a fabless global company that provides high-performance, semiconductor-based power electronics solutions, today announced financial results for the quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    The financial results for the quarter ended March 31, 2025 were as follows:

    • Revenue was $637.6 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, a 2.6% increase from $621.7 million for the quarter ended December 31, 2024 and a 39.2% increase from $457.9 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • GAAP gross margin was 55.4% for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, compared with 55.1% for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP gross margin (1) was 55.7% for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding the impact of $1.7 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and $0.2 million for deferred compensation plan income, compared with 55.7% for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding the impact of $1.9 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $0.4 million for deferred compensation plan expense and $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.
    • GAAP operating expenses were $184.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, compared with $157.0 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP operating expenses (1) were $133.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding $52.1 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses and $1.2 million for deferred compensation plan income, compared with $103.4 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding $49.9 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses and $3.6 million for deferred compensation plan expense.
    • GAAP operating income was $168.8 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, compared with $95.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP operating income (1) was $221.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding $53.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $1.4 million for deferred compensation plan income and $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, compared with $151.6 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding $51.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $4.1 million for deferred compensation plan expense and $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.
    • GAAP other income, net was $5.1 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, compared with $9.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP other income, net (1) was $6.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding $1.4 million for deferred compensation plan expense, compared with $5.5 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding $4.0 million for deferred compensation plan income.
    • GAAP income before income taxes was $173.9 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, compared with $105.0 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP income before income taxes (1) was $228.0 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding $53.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses and $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, compared with $157.1 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding $51.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses and $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.
    • GAAP net income was $133.8 million and $2.79 per diluted share for the quarter ended March 31, 2025. Comparatively, GAAP net income was $92.5 million and $1.89 per diluted share for the quarter ended March 31, 2024.
    • Non-GAAP net income (1) was $193.8 million and $4.04 per diluted share for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, excluding $53.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and $5.9 million for related tax effects, compared with $137.5 million and $2.81 per diluted share for the quarter ended March 31, 2024, excluding $51.8 million for stock-based compensation and related expenses, $0.3 million for amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and $7.2 million for related tax effects.

    The following is a summary of revenue by end market (in thousands):

        Three Months Ended March 31,
    End Market   2025   2024
    Storage and Computing   $ 188,511   $ 106,121
    Automotive     144,904     87,092
    Enterprise Data     132,924     149,727
    Communications     71,671     46,645
    Consumer     56,947     38,074
    Industrial     42,597     30,226
    Total   $ 637,554   $ 457,885

    “Our proven, long-term growth strategy remains intact as we continue our transformation from being a chip-only, semiconductor supplier to a full service, silicon-based solutions provider,” said Michael Hsing, CEO and founder of MPS. 

    Business Outlook

    The following are MPS’s financial targets for the second quarter ending June 30, 2025:

    • Revenue in the range of $640.0 million to $660.0 million.
    • GAAP gross margin between 54.9% and 55.5%. Non-GAAP gross margin (1) between 55.2% and 55.8%, which excludes the impact from stock-based compensation and related expenses as well as the impact from amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets.
    • GAAP operating expenses between $189.0 million and $195.0 million. Non-GAAP operating expenses (1) between $132.6 million and $136.6 million, which excludes estimated stock-based compensation and related expenses in the range of $56.4 million to $58.4 million.
    • Total stock-based compensation and related expenses of $58.3 million to $60.3 million including approximately $1.9 million that would be charged to cost of goods sold.
    • Interest and other income in the range of $6.2 million to $6.6 million before foreign exchange gains or losses.
    • Non-GAAP tax rate of 15% for 2025.
    • Fully diluted shares outstanding between 47.9 million and 48.3 million.

    (1) Non-GAAP net income, non-GAAP net income per share, non-GAAP gross margin, non-GAAP operating expenses, non-GAAP operating income, non-GAAP other income, net and non-GAAP income before income taxes differ from net income, net income per share, gross margin, operating expenses, operating income, other income, net and income before income taxes determined in accordance with U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”). Non-GAAP net income and non-GAAP net income per share exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, which include stock-based compensation expense and employer payroll taxes in relation to the stock-based compensation, net deferred compensation plan expense (income), amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and related tax effects. Non-GAAP gross margin excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP operating expenses exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan income (expense). Non-GAAP operating income excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP other income, net excludes the effect of deferred compensation plan expense (income). Non-GAAP income before income taxes excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets and net deferred compensation plan expense (income). Projected non-GAAP gross margin excludes the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses, and amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets. Projected non-GAAP operating expenses exclude the effect of stock-based compensation and related expenses. These non-GAAP financial measures are not prepared in accordance with GAAP and should not be considered as a substitute for, or superior to, measures of financial performance prepared in accordance with GAAP. A schedule reconciling non-GAAP financial measures is included at the end of this press release. MPS utilizes both GAAP and non-GAAP financial measures to assess what it believes to be its core operating performance and to evaluate and manage its internal business and assist in making financial operating decisions. MPS believes that the inclusion of non-GAAP financial measures, together with GAAP measures, provides investors with an alternative presentation useful to investors’ understanding of MPS’s core operating results and trends. Additionally, MPS believes that the inclusion of non-GAAP measures, together with GAAP measures, provides investors with an additional dimension of comparability to similar companies. However, investors should be aware that non-GAAP financial measures utilized by other companies are not likely to be comparable in most cases to the non-GAAP financial measures used by MPS. See the GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliations in the tables set forth below.

    Earnings Commentary
    Earnings commentary on the results of operations for the quarter ended March 31, 2025 is available under the Investor Relations page on the MPS website.

    Earnings Webinar
    MPS plans to host a question-and-answer webinar covering its financial results at 2:00 p.m. PT / 5:00 p.m. ET, May 1, 2025. The live event will be held via a Zoom webcast, which can be accessed at: https://mpsic.zoom.us/j/92570889542. The Zoom webcast can also be accessed live over the phone by dialing (669) 444-9171; the webcast ID is 92570889542. A replay of the event will be archived and available for replay for one year under the Investor Relations page on the MPS website.

    Safe Harbor Statement
    This press release contains, and statements that will be made during the accompanying earnings webinar will contain, forward-looking statements, as that term is defined in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, including under the “Business Outlook” section and the quote from our CEO herein, including, among other things, (i) projected revenue, GAAP and non-GAAP gross margin, GAAP and non-GAAP operating expenses, stock-based compensation and related expenses, amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, other income before foreign exchange gains or losses, and fully diluted shares outstanding, (ii) our outlook for the second quarter of fiscal year 2025 and the near-term, medium-term and long-term prospects of MPS, including our ability to adapt to changing market conditions, performance against our business plan, our ability to grow despite the various challenges facing our business, our industry and the global economic environment, revenue growth in certain of our market segments, potential new business segments, our continued investment in research and development (“R&D”), expected revenue growth, customers’ acceptance of our new product offerings, the prospects of our new product development, our expectations regarding market and industry segment trends and prospects, and our projected expansion of capacity and the impact it may have on our business, (iii) our ability to penetrate new markets and expand our market share, (iv) the seasonality of our business, (v) our ability to reduce our expenses, and (vi) statements regarding the assumptions underlying or relating to any statement described in (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), or (v). These forward-looking statements are not historical facts or guarantees of future performance or events, are based on current expectations, estimates, beliefs, assumptions, goals, and objectives, and involve significant known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause actual results to be materially different from the results expressed by these statements. Readers of this press release and listeners to the accompanying earnings webinar are cautioned not to place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date hereof. Factors that could cause actual results to differ include, but are not limited to, continued uncertainties in the global economy, including due to the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts, global tariffs and retaliatory measures, inflation, consumer sentiment and other factors; adverse events arising from orders or regulations of governmental entities, including such orders or regulations that impact our customers or suppliers, and adoption of new or amended accounting standards; adverse changes in laws and government regulations such as tariffs on imports of foreign goods, export regulations and export classifications, and tax laws or the interpretation of same, including in foreign countries where MPS has offices or operations; the effect of export controls, trade and economic sanctions regulations and other regulatory or contractual limitations on our ability to sell or develop our products in certain foreign markets, particularly in China; our ability to obtain governmental licenses and approvals for international trading activities or technology transfers, including export licenses; acceptance of, or demand for, our products, in particular the new products launched recently, being different than expected; our ability to increase market share in our targeted markets; difficulty in predicting or budgeting for future customer demand and channel inventories, expenses and financial contingencies (including as a result of any continuing impact from the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts); our ability to efficiently and effectively develop new products and receive a return on our R&D expense investment; our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers; our ability to meet customer demand for our products due to constraints on our third-party suppliers’ ability to manufacture sufficient quantities of our products or otherwise; our ability to expand manufacturing capacity to support future growth; adverse changes in production and testing efficiency of our products; any political, cultural, military, regulatory, economic, foreign exchange and operational changes in China, where a significant portion of our manufacturing capacity comes from; any market disruptions or interruptions in our schedule of new product development releases; our ability to manage our inventory levels; adequate supply of our products from our third-party manufacturing partners; adverse changes or developments in the semiconductor industry generally, which is cyclical in nature, and our ability to adjust our operations to address such changes or developments; the ongoing consolidation of companies in the semiconductor industry; competition generally and the increasingly competitive nature of our industry; our ability to realize the anticipated benefits of companies and products that MPS acquires, and our ability to effectively and efficiently integrate these acquired companies and products into our operations; the risks, uncertainties and costs of litigation in which MPS is involved; the outcome of any upcoming trials, hearings, motions and appeals; the adverse impact on our financial performance if its tax and litigation provisions are inadequate; our ability to effectively manage our growth and attract and retain qualified personnel; the effect of epidemics and pandemics on the global economy and on our business; the risks associated with the financial market, economy, global tariffs and retaliatory measures, and geopolitical uncertainties, including the Russia-Ukraine and Middle East conflicts; and other important risk factors identified under the caption “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in our Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) filings, including, but not limited to, our Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the SEC on March 3, 2025. MPS assumes no obligation to update the information in this press release or in the accompanying earnings webinar.

    About Monolithic Power Systems
    Monolithic Power Systems, Inc. (“MPS”) is a fabless global company that provides high-performance, semiconductor-based power electronics solutions. MPS’s mission is to reduce energy and material consumption to improve all aspects of quality of life. Founded in 1997 by our CEO Michael Hsing, MPS has three core strengths: deep system-level knowledge, strong semiconductor expertise, and innovative proprietary technologies in the areas of semiconductor processes, system integration, and packaging. These combined advantages enable MPS to deliver reliable, compact, and monolithic solutions that are highly energy-efficient, cost-effective, and environmentally responsible while providing a consistent return on investment to our stockholders. MPS can be contacted through its website at www.monolithicpower.com or its support offices around the world.

    Monolithic Power Systems, MPS, and the MPS logo are registered trademarks of Monolithic Power Systems, Inc. in the U.S. and trademarked in certain other countries. 

    Contact:
    Bernie Blegen
    Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
    Monolithic Power Systems, Inc.
    408-826-0777
    MPSInvestor.Relations@monolithicpower.com

    Monolithic Power Systems, Inc.
    Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets
    (Unaudited, in thousands, except par value)
        March 31,   December 31,
        2025   2024
    ASSETS                
    Current assets:                
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 637,354     $ 691,816  
    Short-term investments     389,310       171,130  
    Accounts receivable, net     214,866       172,518  
    Inventories     454,793       419,611  
    Other current assets     92,063       109,978  
    Total current assets     1,788,386       1,565,053  
    Property and equipment, net     527,348       494,945  
    Acquisition-related intangible assets, net     9,651       9,938  
    Goodwill     25,944       25,944  
    Deferred tax assets, net     1,318,457       1,326,840  
    Other long-term assets     135,974       194,377  
    Total assets   $ 3,805,760     $ 3,617,097  
                     
    LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY                
    Current liabilities:                
    Accounts payable   $ 127,310     $ 102,526  
    Accrued compensation and related benefits     74,785       63,918  
    Other accrued liabilities     161,306       128,123  
    Total current liabilities     363,401       294,567  
    Income tax liabilities     69,535       65,193  
    Other long-term liabilities     105,814       111,570  
    Total liabilities     538,750       471,330  
    Commitments and contingencies                
    Stockholders’ equity:                
    Common stock and additional paid-in capital: $0.001 par value; shares authorized: 150,000; shares issued and outstanding: 47,877 and 47,823, respectively     764,959       706,817  
    Retained earnings     2,545,375       2,487,461  
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss     (43,324 )     (48,511 )
    Total stockholders’ equity     3,267,010       3,145,767  
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $ 3,805,760     $ 3,617,097  
    Monolithic Power Systems, Inc.
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations

    (Unaudited, in thousands, except per share amounts)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Revenue   $ 637,554     $ 457,885  
    Cost of revenue     284,324       205,444  
    Gross profit     353,230       252,441  
    Operating expenses:                
    Research and development     92,227       75,990  
    Selling, general and administrative     92,244       80,964  
    Total operating expenses     184,471       156,954  
    Operating income     168,759       95,487  
    Other income, net     5,131       9,540  
    Income before income taxes     173,890       105,027  
    Income tax expense     40,099       12,486  
    Net income   $ 133,791     $ 92,541  
                     
    Net income per share:                
    Basic   $ 2.80     $ 1.90  
    Diluted   $ 2.79     $ 1.89  
    Weighted-average shares outstanding:                
    Basic     47,851       48,635  
    Diluted     48,006       48,928  
    RECONCILIATION OF NET INCOME TO NON-GAAP NET INCOME
    (Unaudited, in thousands, except per share amounts)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Net income   $ 133,791     $ 92,541  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile net income to non-GAAP net income:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income), net     (6 )     47  
    Tax effect     5,897       (7,156 )
    Non-GAAP net income   $ 193,813     $ 137,492  
                     
    Non-GAAP net income per share:                
    Basic   $ 4.05     $ 2.83  
    Diluted   $ 4.04     $ 2.81  
                     
    Shares used in the calculation of non-GAAP net income per share:                
    Basic     47,851       48,635  
    Diluted     48,006       48,928  
    RECONCILIATION OF GROSS MARGIN TO NON-GAAP GROSS MARGIN
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Gross profit   $ 353,230     $ 252,441  
    Gross margin     55.4 %     55.1 %
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile gross profit to non-GAAP gross profit:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     1,706       1,900  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     287       258  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     (163 )     440  
    Non-GAAP gross profit   $ 355,060     $ 255,039  
    Non-GAAP gross margin     55.7 %     55.7 %
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES TO NON-GAAP OPERATING EXPENSES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total operating expenses   $ 184,471     $ 156,954  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile total operating expenses to non-GAAP total operating expenses:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     (52,105 )     (49,869 )
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     (33 )     (33 )
    Deferred compensation plan income (expense)     1,193       (3,626 )
    Non-GAAP operating expenses   $ 133,526     $ 103,426  
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING INCOME TO NON-GAAP OPERATING INCOME
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total operating income   $ 168,759     $ 95,487  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile total operating income to non-GAAP total operating income:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     (1,356 )     4,066  
    Non-GAAP operating income   $ 221,534     $ 151,613  
    RECONCILIATION OF OTHER INCOME, NET, TO NON-GAAP OTHER INCOME, NET
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total other income, net   $ 5,131     $ 9,540  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile other income, net to non-GAAP other income, net:                
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income)     1,350       (4,019 )
    Non-GAAP other income, net   $ 6,481     $ 5,521  
    RECONCILIATION OF INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES TO NON-GAAP INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAXES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025   2024
    Total income before income taxes   $ 173,890     $ 105,027  
                     
    Adjustments to reconcile income before income taxes to non-GAAP income before income taxes:                
    Stock-based compensation and related expenses     53,811       51,769  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets     320       291  
    Deferred compensation plan expense (income), net     (6 )     47  
    Non-GAAP income before income taxes   $ 228,015     $ 157,134  
    2025 SECOND QUARTER OUTLOOK
    RECONCILIATION OF GROSS MARGIN TO NON-GAAP GROSS MARGIN
    (Unaudited)
        Three Months Ending
        June 30, 2025
        Low   High
    Gross margin     54.9 %     55.5 %
    Adjustment to reconcile gross margin to non-GAAP gross margin:                
    Stock-based compensation and other expenses     0.3 %     0.3 %
    Non-GAAP gross margin     55.2 %     55.8 %
    RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES TO NON-GAAP OPERATING EXPENSES
    (Unaudited, in thousands)
        Three Months Ending
        June 30, 2025
        Low   High
    Operating expenses   $ 189,000     $ 195,000  
    Adjustments to reconcile operating expenses to non-GAAP operating expenses:                
    Stock-based compensation and other expenses     (56,400 )     (58,400 )
    Non-GAAP operating expenses   $ 132,600     $ 136,600  

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Nations: Experts of the Committee on the Elimination of Racial Discrimination Commend Gabon on Special Contingent Composed of Indigenous Persons, Ask Questions on Treatment of Hausa Gabonese Population and Human Trafficking

    Source: United Nations – Geneva

    The Committee on the Elimination of Racial Discrimination today concluded its consideration of the tenth periodic report of Gabon, with Committee Experts commending the State on the establishment of a special contingent in the National Guard made up of indigenous persons, while asking questions on the treatment of the Hausa Gabonese population and steps taken to combat human trafficking.

    Régine Esseneme, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, said the Committee was informed that the President of the Transition, the current Head of State, had set up a special contingent in the National Guard composed of members of the indigenous peoples’ communities, with a view to protecting the environment, which was a commendable action.

    Ms. Esseneme asked about the situation of the Hausa Gabonese since their naturalisation as Gabonese citizens in 2015, in terms of facilitating their national integration? What measures were being taken to ensure effective access to birth registration for members of ethnic minorities and indigenous peoples and to ensure the issuance of official identity documents and passports, especially in remote areas?

    Bakri Sidiki Diaby, Committee Expert and Country Co-Rapporteur, asked what was the proportion of Gabonese nationals who were victims of trafficking? What were the main forms of trafficking found in Gabon? What was the profile of the perpetrators of human trafficking, their gender and their nationality? What were the measures for reparation and rehabilitation of victims of trafficking? What was being done by the State to prevent and combat trafficking in persons, including for the purpose of labour exploitation, sexual exploitation and domestic servitude, including of non-citizens, especially children?

    The delegation said the Hausa Gabonese benefitted the same as any other citizen who held Gabonese nationality. A naturalisation decree had been implemented which granted Gabonese nationality to all Hausa people living in the country at the time; this was around 1,000 people. Some people had tried to fall through the cracks and benefit from this decree without actually meeting the requirements, which had a negative impact on the administrative situation. The Ministry of Justice was currently verifying the validity of these documents.

    The delegation said in 2023, Gabon completed the procedure required for the State to be in a position to proactively identify cases of human trafficking by identifying irregular movements. The country was also collecting data in this regard, to identify trends and receive up to date information on this phenomenon in Gabon. Underground networks operated the trafficking of women and children, and irregular migration was the driving force behind this phenomenon. Gabon was working with Benin to find a solution to this issue. The State was fully committed to rolling out the project to have practical solutions to these issues, including police investigations into these cases.

    Introducing the report, Paul-Marie Gondjout, Minister of Justice, Keeper of the Seals of Gabon and head of the delegation, apologised for the late submission of the report, which should have been submitted more than 20 years ago. Since the “ coup of liberation” of 30 August 2023, the country had been engaged in a democratic transition process under the aegis of the President of the Transition. Structured around profound institutional reforms, this inclusive process had laid the foundations for more transparent and democratic governance. A new Constitution was adopted in December 2024, which brought substantial innovations in governance; and the Electoral Code adopted in January 2025 introduced greater involvement of electoral observers, two seats of deputies for the Gabonese diaspora, and the guarantee of the right to vote for incarcerated citizens.

    In concluding remarks, Ms. Esseneme congratulated Gabon for the multi-sectoral approach taken to the dialogue, which had been productive and fruitful. Gabon was urged to do its utmost to implement the recommendations contained in the concluding observations, to ensure ongoing collaboration with the Committee.

    Mr. Gondjout, in his concluding remarks, thanked the Committee for the constructive and respectful exchange which had taken place. Gabon would continue engaging with the Committee and looked forward to the concluding observations and follow-up. It would respond within the timeframes indicated.

    The delegation of Gabon consisted of representatives of the Transitional National Assembly; Ministry of the Interior; Ministry of Health; Ministry of Energy and Water Resources; Ministry of Women and Child Protection; Ministry of National Education; Directorate of Human Rights Protection; Directorate of Criminal Affairs; Directorate of Equal Opportunities; Labour Inspectorate; Central Directorate of Financial Affairs; Directorate of Documentation and Immigration; Immigration Task Force; and the Permanent Mission of Gabon to the United Nations Office at Geneva.

    The Committee will issue its concluding observations on the report of Gabon after the conclusion of its one hundred and fifteenth session on 9 May. The programme of work and other documents related to the session can be found here . Summaries of the public meetings of the Committee can be found here , while webcasts of the public meetings can be found here .

    The Committee will next meet in public on Thursday, 1 May at 3 p.m. to consider the combined eleventh and twelfth periodic reports of Kyrgyzstan (CERD/C/KGZ/11-12).

    Report

    The Committee has before it the tenth periodic report of Gabon (CERD/C/GAB/10).

    Presentation of Report

    PAUL-MARIE GONDJOUT, Minister of Justice, Keeper of the Seals of Gabon and head of the delegation , apologised for the late submission of the report, which should have been submitted more than 20 years ago. It covered the period from 1999 to 2021 and was drafted in an inclusive, participatory process. Since gaining sovereignty, Gabon had promoted equal dignity among all citizens by prohibiting any distinction of race, origin or religion. The country had made the fight against all forms of discrimination one of the priorities in its resolute commitment to building a State governed by the rule of law that respected and protected human rights and guaranteed access to rights for all.

    Since the “ coup of liberation” of 30 August 2023, the country had been engaged in a democratic transition process under the aegis of the President of the Transition. Structured around profound institutional reforms, this inclusive process had laid the foundations for more transparent and democratic governance. A new Constitution was adopted in December 2024, which brought substantial innovations in governance; and the Electoral Code adopted in January 2025 introduced greater involvement of electoral observers, two seats of deputies for the Gabonese diaspora, and the guarantee of the right to vote for incarcerated citizens. The presidential election was held on 12 April, which would be followed on 3 May by the inauguration of the President of the Republic, thus putting an end to the transition. Transitional authorities had taken determined action to periodically update the legislative arsenal to bring it into line with ratified international treaties.

    Statistical data was a major challenge for Gabon. To address this, the Directorate General of Statistics had set up a technical body to carry out the seventh national census, which would provide data on age, gender, ethnicity, nationality and language spoken for the total population, indigenous peoples, ethnic minorities and migrants, as well as information on employment, income level and social protection. The project for the harmonisation and improvement of statistics in West and Central Africa was providing financing of statistical activities between 2025 and 2029, ensuring the production of reliable and regularly updated statistics.

    The Convention was directly applicable in Gabon and took precedence over national laws. To raise awareness of the Convention, several initiatives were implemented during the reporting period, from capacity-building workshops to the dissemination of multilingual communications. In various training schools, the Convention was presented in the module on human rights.

    No Gabonese text defined racial discrimination in the same terms as those in article one of the Convention. However, the Constitutions of 1991 and 2024 had adopted and enshrined the main principles of article one, targeting discrimination based on race, colour, national or ethnic origin and covering several sectors of the population. The Constitution also enshrined the equality of citizens before the law and the courts and the presumption of innocence for accused persons. The Government envisaged developing a national plan of action to combat racial discrimination and related intolerance in the coming year. Training sessions on the issue had been organised and a committee had been set up to develop a draft.

    A law on the reorganisation of the National Human Rights Commission was promulgated in November 2024. The process of re-establishing the institution would be completed in the coming weeks after the selection of the commissioners by the Bureau of the National Assembly. Premises for the Commission were made available in 2014, and it had recruited staff since 2012. Its budget has increased from 12,000,000 CFA francs in 2016 to 592,000,000 in 2025.

    During the period under review, measures were taken to ensure that the Criminal Code and other legislation complied with the Convention. State laws prohibited and penalised acts of racial, religious and ethnic discrimination and regionalist propaganda; secular or religious associations that provoked hatred between ethnic groups; and the dissemination, including online, of racist hate speech, which constituted an aggravating circumstance.

    The High Authority for Communication had imposed sanctions on media outlets on several occasions, but no decision condemning hate speech had been handed down by courts to date. A digital campaign entitled “Gabon against hate” was launched in December 2023 to educate citizens on the dangers of hate speech and disinformation, and in December 2024, the Government organised a workshop on the Central African strategy and action plan for the prevention and response to hate speech and incitement to violence, which led to the drafting of a national action plan.

    The new Constitution recognised civil society organizations as a part of pluralist and participatory democracy. A bill was also submitted in September 2024 on the protection of human rights defenders. Civil society organizations, including the network of human rights defenders, were strongly involved in the transition process, both in the Government and in Parliament.

    To align legislation on migrants with international standards, Gabon prepared a draft law establishing rules governing the admission and residence of foreigners in the Republic. The Government planned to integrate the issue of migrants into the curricula of training schools, particularly at the National School of the Judiciary and the National Police Academy, which also had a module on trafficking in persons.

    Gabon had made commitments at international, regional and national levels to combat trafficking in persons through local initiatives and partnerships with international actors. In 2023, the State party created a commission that was mandated to strengthen the capacities of actors addressing trafficking and establish coordinated mechanisms for the identification, care and protection of victims in each province. In addition, a proposed strategy and action plan on trafficking for the period 2025-2029 would implement actions to prevent the phenomenon, protect victims and prosecute perpetrators.

    Questions by Committee Experts

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur , extended warm congratulations to the elected President of the Republic, Brice Oligui Nguema. She said the Committee had considered Gabon’s last report in 1998 in the absence of a delegation. The State submitted its next report 26 years late in 2024. The report did not provide sufficient information on the implementation of the Committee’s previous concluding observations. However, Ms. Esseneme congratulated the State party on significant developments that had been made in the legal and institutional framework, particularly the prohibition of hate speech.

    Gabon’s new Constitution of 2024 did not contain all the grounds of discrimination provided for in article one of the Convention, including skin colour, national origin and ancestry. Was this Constitution currently in effect? By what mechanism could the Convention be invoked before national courts? Could the delegation give examples of court cases in which Convention provisions had been applied? Were there plans to adopt comprehensive anti-discrimination legislation in line with the Convention? Gabon’s Common Core Document dated from 1998 and did not contain precise information on equality and non-discrimination. Were there plans to update it?

    Was there any legislation in the State party explicitly prohibiting racial profiling by police? Gabonese police reportedly carried out racial profiling checks and extorted foreigners staying in Gabon, demanding sums of money from them that varied depending on whether they held a residence permit. What measures were envisaged to prevent, prohibit and expressly punish racial profiling?

    Was the Government drafting a new Criminal Code that incorporated all the provisions of article four of the Convention? Since the events of 30 August 2023, there had reportedly been a rise in racist hate speech against Gabonese of foreign origin, including the Hausa Gabonese group, and foreigners. What measures had the State party taken to counter this hate speech? Had the Prosecutor’s Office received cases of discriminatory acts against Hausa Gabonese?

    The situation seemed to have deteriorated since the presidential election. Some 500 vehicles belonging to non-nationals employed in a private scheme for disadvantaged people had been seized and impounded. Could the State party provide an update on this case, which appeared to amount to racially motivated violence?

    Did Gabon’s law hold persons from a dominant group to account when they destroyed the property of or committed violence against a member of a minority group? What measures were in place to improve the reporting and monitoring of racist hate crimes and hate speech? What progress had been made through the “Gabon against hate” campaign?

    BAKRI SIDIKI DIABY, Committee Expert and Country Co-Rapporteur, called for data on the demographic composition of the population based on self-identification, disaggregated by ethnic origin; data on migrants, refugees, asylum seekers and stateless people; and disaggregated economic and social indicators on the different groups living in the territory, in particular minority groups? The Committee was concerned about the State’s general lack of disaggregated data, including on ethnicity, needed to monitor progress on human rights and inform policymaking. How was the State addressing this? Did it plan to establish a comprehensive data collection and reporting system that would provide insight into racial discrimination, socio-economic inequalities and implementation of the Convention?

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation apologised for Gabon’s lateness in submitting the report. The State party was fully committed to working with the Committee. The transitional authorities sought to fulfil the country’s international obligations.

    The Constitution reflected the principles of the Convention, even though it did not reproduce its provisions word for word. There had been no complaints submitted to courts on racial discrimination. The President would take office in three days’ time, when the new Constitution would enter into force.

    The Convention had supremacy over all domestic laws, and when there were Convention provisions that were contrary to the Constitution, the Constitutional Court could recommend amendments to the Constitution. The Criminal Code was last revised in 2020 and Gabon was engaging in work to further revise the Code to formalise within it all elements of article one of the Convention.

    Police officers apprehended persons based on the acts that they conducted. They did not consider persons’ racial or ethnic identity; State law prohibited racial profiling. The Government worked to promote unity between different ethnic groups and ensure that hate speech did not gain ground.

    Data on ethnic origin was not collected in the previous census of 2013, though data on nationality was. The next census would collect data on age, gender, ethnic origin and languages spoken. The Government had undertaken a project to reform the national statistics system, which aimed to provide more resources to the national statistics institute and to establish officers on statistics in each ministerial department, who would collect data on the implementation of the Convention.

    Last year, a leader of a political party made a statement against an ethnic group; investigations into this incident were ongoing. The State party embraced the Hausa Gabonese and other populations of foreign origin, promoting their integration into society. It sought to resolve institutional friction to ensure such integration. It was not aware of reports of seizing of non-nationals’ vehicles.

    Follow-Up Questions by Committee Experts

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, asked whether the President would need to approve legislation to bring the new Constitution into force. What happened when constitutional or domestic legal provisions ran counter to international norms? Did victims need to lodge complaints related to hate speech for criminal investigations to start? Did the law on the protection of personal data include measures to prevent racial profiling?

    A Committee Expert said the Committee was very pleased to see the delegation of Gabon after nearly a quarter-century and looked forward to continued dialogue with the State. In 2011, a law was implemented that addressed ritualistic crimes against children. What measures had the State party taken to protect children from these crimes? How many children were affected by such crimes?

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation said the new Constitution was in force, but its content on ceasing the transitional process was not applicable immediately. The Constitutional Court assessed new laws to ensure that they were aligned with the Convention and the Constitution. It informed the Government when laws contained provisions that did not align with the Convention and called for their revision.

    The Higher Authority on Communication could suggest administrative sanctions against media agencies that disseminated hate speech.

    There were no legal provisions that specifically referred to “ritualistic crimes”, but there were provisions punishing related acts, such as murder and removal of vital organs, as aggravated crimes.

    Questions by Committee Experts

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, said Gabon had not adopted a plan of action to combat racial discrimination. What measures had the State party taken to develop such a plan and implement the Durban Programme of Action, and what results had it obtained?

    The National Human Rights Commission was reorganised in November 2024. Had the State party applied for accreditation from the Global Alliance of National Human Rights Institutions? The Commission received and examined complaints from individuals and victims. What was the procedure for this, and how many complaints had it examined, including related to racial discrimination? How was the Commission raising awareness about human rights protections? The Commission’s financial resources had been significantly increased; the Committee hoped that this would strengthen the Commission’s ability to combat racial discrimination.

    The registration procedure for non-governmental organizations was reportedly very expensive and inconsistent, which discouraged organizations from carrying out their activities. The Committee had not received any alternative report from civil society. How was the State party encouraging this? What progress had been made in establishing a consultation framework between the State and civil society, and in developing a law on human rights defenders? Human and environmental rights defenders in the country were highly vulnerable to abuses and reprisals, including women, farmers and indigenous peoples fighting against deforestation. What measures were being taken to ensure the protection of human rights defenders who fought against racial discrimination and defended indigenous peoples and migrants?

    The Committee welcomed that the State automatically appointed a lawyer to accused persons who could not afford one, and that such persons benefitted from the presumption of innocence. How many persons had benefitted from legal aid in the last two years, including persons from ethnic minorities?

    What continuous training or awareness raising activities were being carried out for the judiciary, law enforcement officials and the public on human rights, international human rights treaties, non-discrimination and minority rights? Did training on human rights for security and defence forces address the Convention? What measures had been implemented to support the filing of complaints and claims for redress in cases of racial discrimination, particularly for ethnic minorities, indigenous peoples and non-citizens? Victims often struggled to prove that they had been discriminated against when perpetrators held positions of authority. Did the State party intend to introduce a reversal of the burden of proof in favour of victims of discrimination? How would the State bring the administration of justice closer to rural areas inhabited by indigenous peoples, and remove obstacles related to linguistic diversity?

    What progress had been made on introducing human rights education into school curricula and higher education? Did curricula address the Convention, combatting racial discrimination, and the history, culture and traditions of the different ethnic groups and indigenous peoples? What difficulties did the State party encounter in promoting education on national languages? Were there any community radio stations in the State party where information was disseminated in local languages and indigenous languages such as Baka? What programmes were in place to promote ethnic cultures and traditions and social cohesion?

    BAKRI SIDIKI DIABY, Committee Expert and Country Co-Rapporteur, said the new Constitution stipulated that citizens’ gatherings, demonstrations or parades in public spaces needed to be authorised under the conditions provided for by law. This seemed to restrict freedom of assembly and contradict 2017 legislation calling only for a declaration of planned gatherings. Why had this regressive change been made? How would the State party bring its rules on freedom of assembly in line with international standards? Were remedies available for persons whose demonstrations had been banned?

    In February 2021, tear gas and grenades were used in Libreville and Port Gentil to disperse a crowd demonstrating in opposition to the restrictions imposed during the COVID-19 pandemic. What justified this use of public force? Had investigations been carried out to establish responsibility? Could legislation on assembly be used to restrict private meetings? What measures had the State party adopted to ensure that indigenous peoples, ethnic minorities and non-citizens could exercise their right to freedom of assembly without discrimination, including at demonstrations in opposition to infrastructure projects or calling for protection of the environment and natural resources?

    FAITH DIKELEDI PANSY TLAKULA, Committee Expert and Follow-Up Rapporteur , said she was encouraged by the State’s desire to strengthen its institutions. How were the members of the National Human Rights Commission appointed and to whom were they accountable? The State party had not ratified the African Charter on Democracy, Elections and Governance. Did it plan to do so?

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation said that the National Human Rights Commission would apply for accreditation with the Global Alliance of National Human Rights Institutions. Funding for the Commission had increased exponentially. Legislation on the re-establishment of the Commission was in line with the Paris Principles; it had been developed with the Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights. There had not been any complaints of racial discrimination submitted to the Commission yet. The State party would work to raise awareness of the Commission’s complaints mechanism.

    The Commission and civil society were involved in drafting the State party’s reports to treaty bodies. Civil society had submitted alternative reports to the Human Rights Committee, and training had been provided to civil society on preparing such reports. Reports that the procedure for creating non-governmental organizations was onerous were false. There were no costs associated with creating such organizations in Gabon.

    Gabon sought to rebuild its institutions based on justice. It had set up a legal aid office, which provided legal aid to vulnerable persons, and sought to strengthen this system and make it accessible throughout the country. There was no discrimination in the provision of legal aid. All plaintiffs appearing before a criminal court needed to be represented by a lawyer. The State party would consider revising the Criminal Code to reverse the burden of proof for cases involving racial discrimination.

    The new Constitution enshrined the principles of freedom of expression and assembly for all citizens. Legislation set up a system of declaration for public demonstrations; there was no authorisation system. Individuals who had been banned from holding demonstrations could file administrative appeals and appeals with the courts. There were no barriers to the freedom of expression in Gabon.

    Human rights education was part of the Gabonese civic education programme from primary level onwards. There had been an initiative to bolster this programme and to provide human rights education in vocational training institutions. Teaching on national languages was provided in religious establishments, and there were plans to include national language education in the general primary and secondary curricula.

    The new members of the National Human Rights Commission would be appointed by an ad-hoc committee within the National Assembly through a transparent process that ensured appropriate geographic balance. These members would be standing, independent members. Members’ reports would be sent to relevant institutions for follow-up.

    Initial training for members of the magistracy included a module on human rights, and ongoing training was provided on certain issues, for example concerning migrants and trafficking.

    Questions by a Committee Expert

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, asked which groups in Gabon self-determined as national minorities, even though the State declared it did not grant them legal status? What was the situation of the Hausa Gabonese since their naturalisation as Gabonese citizens in 2015, in terms of facilitating their national integration? According to information received by the Committee, the State was struggling to issue birth certificates and national identity cards to ethnic and indigenous minorities. What measures were being taken to ensure effective access to birth registration for members of ethnic minorities and indigenous peoples and to ensure the issuance of official identity documents and passports, especially in remote areas?

    It was reported that in 2022, people returning from holidays, whose surnames sounded foreign, had had their passports taken away by border police officers, and they had to go and collect them and justify their Gabonese nationality. What was at the origin of this search for the original “Gabonness” that seemed to be coming back in force since the events of August 2023? What was the State party doing to ensure social cohesion in these circumstances?

    How many members of the indigenous peoples’ communities held positions of responsibility in the central and local State administration? What measures were being taken to strengthen the political and administrative capacities of the members of these communities for better representation? What was the proportion of women, and particularly women from indigenous peoples and the Hausa Gabonese minority, in elective and decision-making positions in the civil service? Did it mean the State would prefer to appoint a less qualified man to a senior job in the State rather than a highly qualified woman, if the 30 per cent quota for women was reached? What measures had the State party taken to prevent and combat racial discrimination in the workplace, as well as abusive practices and labour exploitation, in particular against indigenous peoples and other minorities?

    From the report, it appeared the State party was made up of the Baka, Babongo, Bakoya, Baghame, Barimba, Akoula and Akwoa ethnic groups that were settled in different regions of Gabonese territory. What were the legal and institutional frameworks, as well as policies and programmes established for the promotion and protection of the specific rights of these indigenous peoples? What measures had been taken to enable indigenous peoples to enjoy genuine equality of opportunity and treatment with other members of the population? How many indigenous peoples were there in Gabon?

    What mechanism had been implemented to conduct prior consultations to obtain the free and informed consent of the indigenous peoples concerned by projects, including the deployment of fibre optics, and to involve them in their implementation? Was there a permanent framework for cooperation with community leaders or associations that represented these populations? Who were the ethnic groups of the indigenous inhabitants of the 26 villages concerned by the development project, being conducted with the United Nations Children’s Fund?

    The Committee was informed that the President of the Transition, the current Head of State, had set up a special contingent in the National Guard composed of members of the indigenous peoples’ communities, with a view to protecting the environment, which was a commendable action. It was hoped this would not be an isolated act.

    According to available information, entire villages populated by indigenous communities had been displaced without prior consent for mining projects in Bakoumba, and had been relocated to undesirable and polluted areas, with no action taken by the authorities to follow up on the complaints of those affected by the pollution. Could information on this situation be provided? What measures were being taken to ensure the right of indigenous peoples to own, develop, control and use the lands, resources and community territories that they traditionally occupied or used? What tools did the Government use to promote equal opportunities in education and training? How were the specific needs of indigenous peoples taken into account? Did pre-primary and primary education include the teaching of mother tongue languages?

    The Gabonese Government had adopted a commendable housing policy with the home savings plan put in place since March 2019. However, a World Bank report from 2020 revealed that more than one in two households did not have access to decent housing. What was the real situation in terms of housing? Could information be provided on the poverty rate among indigenous peoples and other minorities and their access to basic services?

    The education system had specialised facilities for children with hearing impairments, including those belonging to indigenous peoples and other minorities. What was the situation of the education of other children with special needs, such as autistic children, considered in some societies to be evil or sorcerous children? Given that some 50 national languages were spoken in Gabon, what languages were used within the media and what methodology was used to choose these languages? Were there programmes in the Baka and Koya languages that were spoken by indigenous peoples? What measures had been taken to promote the dissemination of and respect for the traditions and culture of the different ethnic groups in Gabon, and to protect indigenous languages, such as Baka and Koya?

    Responses by the Delegation

    Regarding the Hausa whose passports were removed if their names sounded foreign, the delegation said there were people who had not been careful to keep up with the administrative situation in the country in which they lived. They may not see the importance of having birth and identity documents. This meant today, when the State was focused on restoring its institutions, these matters came to the surface. There had been some confusing situations which arose because many people had held fake documents for a long time before. The Government was looking into this issue as a matter of national security.

    Members of the Hausa population benefitted the same as any other citizen who held Gabonese nationality. A naturalisation decree had been implemented which granted Gabonese nationality to all Hausa people living in the country at the time; this was around 1,000 people. Some people had tried to fall through the cracks and benefit from this decree without actually meeting the requirements, which had a negative impact on the administrative situation. The Ministry of Justice was currently verifying the validity of these documents.

    It was true that there were more women than men in Gabon. However, when it came to elections, not many women wanted to participate in political life, and the State wanted to change this. This was why legislation had been developed which established quotas; this aimed to be positive discrimination for women. The quotas intended to encourage more women to become involved in political life at the local and national level. The 30 per cent minimum quota was in place for all political parties, with the requirement that 30 per cent of all candidates should be women. The State also aimed to encourage more young people and persons with disabilities to become involved in political life.

    Indigenous peoples were included in Gabon’s social protection coverage. They were covered by the social protection system and received unemployment and health benefits. The 26 villages covered by the support programme were villages with people from Baka, Bango and other groups. Work was done with pregnant women to ensure neonatal services were provided, especially in remote parts of the country where many indigenous groups lived. The State had set up a centre for autistic children and aimed to roll this out to other parts of the country.

    In 2016, a programme was launched to combat all forms of discrimination in employment, healthcare and education, and other areas of public life. The State sought to support all levels of society in Gabon through this programme, which covered indigenous peoples, women and other vulnerable groups. All programmes were intended to promote equality of opportunity for all. Indigenous peoples, regardless of where they were located in the country, could benefit from State programmes.

    In Gabon, there was an observatory which focused on the issue of equality and undertook various studies, including a recent one on the equality of opportunity for indigenous peoples in Gabon. On the basis of this study, an action plan had been developed, with policies to be rolled out to address the situation of indigenous peoples in the country. The most recent census had enabled the State to identify 15,000 persons with disabilities who needed additional support, and actions relating to education and health were carried out in this regard. Gabon was on the right track in terms of indigenous peoples, as the State was pursuing inclusive policies, taking into account all persons on the territory of the country.

    Questions by Committee Experts

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, said several questions had not been answered, namely on the languages used in the media; the use of land by indigenous peoples; and the medicinal practices of indigenous peoples. There had been a case where indigenous peoples were forcibly removed from their village and transported to polluted areas; could this be addressed? Was it correct that the 30 per cent quota was a minimum? If there was a list of candidates which did not reach the minimum threshold, was it then rejected? Was the State considering an individualised approach to the Hausa Gabonese?

    A Committee Expert asked if the State looked at issues which might be particularly harmful to indigenous peoples, and then adopted policies and programmes to address these issues?

    Another Committee Expert asked what members of the delegation meant when they said they did not recognise minorities as a legal concept? Did this mean these minorities did not qualify for legal protection?

    An Expert asked if the State had investigated what held women back from applying for election posts?

    A Committee Expert said Gabon had last reviewed the Constitution in 2011. How had Gabon addressed the issues of discrimination in education?

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation clarified that Gabon had a brand-new Constitution. The law on data protection stated that it was prohibited to collect or process any data which revealed the racial or ethnic background of an individual, their political or religious views, and data related to their sex life or health, among other points. The profiling of children was strictly prohibited, except when strictly necessary. Personal data could be accessed on the grounds of State security defence. When the police were carrying out controls or checks, they treated all passengers in stopped vehicles the same; everyone was asked to show their identity documents.

    When the 30 per cent quotas were not achieved, steps were taken to encourage favourable treatment for women, by ensuring a male and female alternance for candidates in electoral lists, to achieve the 30 per cent representation. This was a “carrot rather than stick” approach. Women were being encouraged to overcome cultural blocks and stand for leadership roles. A workshop had been held last week which sought to address the grassroot social issues, including that women were typically viewed as homemakers and housewives. The quota law aimed to break these traditional mindsets.

    Gabon had enacted specific measures, including the law on persons with disabilities, which mandated that education was compulsory for all children with disabilities. Education was compulsory by law for all children between ages three and 16 in Gabon. A forum was organised in 2019 on the implementation of inclusive education. New schools being built were required to meet accessibility standards, to ensure free and easy access for children with motor disabilities.

    The relocation of individuals in certain areas had been required, but the fact that they were relocated to polluted areas was refuted. Some people had to accustom themselves to living in a new location, but it was the sovereign right of the State to ensure they could tap their resources for the overall benefit of the country. More information about the claims would be appreciated. There were community radio stations which broadcast programmes in local indigenous languages.

    Questions by Committee Experts

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, said there had been no shadow report received from Gabonese civil society. The information regarding the relocation of indigenous peoples had been received by the Committee members which was why they asked the question. State sovereignty should not be used against the population, but rather for their wellbeing.

    What measures had been adopted, including special measures or affirmative action measures, with a view to combatting inequalities and multiple forms of discrimination, including racial discrimination, with regard to ethnic minorities and indigenous peoples, such as the Baka, Babongo, Bakoya, Baghame, Barimba, Akoula and Akwoa? To what extent did the 2018 national strategy to combat gender-based violence and the law on the elimination of violence against women take into account the specific needs of indigenous girls and women? What other measures had been adopted to address the multiple and intersecting forms of discrimination faced by women belonging to ethnic minorities, indigenous peoples, and other vulnerable groups?

    BAKRI SIDIKI DIABY, Committee Expert and Country Co-Rapporteur, said law no. 5/86, establishing the regime for the admission and residence of foreigners in the Gabonese Republic, provided for severe fines and imprisonment for foreigners in an irregular situation, which considerably reduced the scope of protection for persons who arrived in Gabon irregularly or those already in Gabon in need of international protection. What measures had been taken by the State party to harmonise its national legislation, including this law, with international obligations, in particular to decriminalise irregular migration? What measures had been adopted to prevent and combat racial discrimination and xenophobia against migrants, asylum seekers, refugees and stateless persons, and to facilitate the integration of non-citizens?

    What measures had been adopted by the State party to ensure that the practical application of the policy of “Gabonisation” of employment did not lead to cases of discrimination in hiring and dismissal on the basis of race, colour, descent or national or ethnic origin? According to a provision within the refugee act, the majority of refugees in Gabon lived with families. What was the profile of these families? How was the legal integration of refugees carried out? What were the socio-demographic, spatial and legal-administrative characteristics of the descendants of refugees in Libreville? Clear procedures were needed to ensure the prompt identification of persons seeking international protection at land borders and arrivals by sea; what measures were being taken in this regard? What had been done to strengthen the National Commission for Refugees?

    The Committee had been told that asylum seekers remained excluded from the national medical insurance scheme and did not have access to medical services pending a decision on their refugee status. What steps had been taken to extend primary health care to asylum seekers who were awaiting a final decision on their refugee status? What efforts had the Gabonese Government made to develop and implement a statelessness determination procedure? The Committee had been informed that many foreigners were forced by the administrative services to add so-called “Gabonese” surnames to their surnames, which discouraged some parents of children born in Gabon from finalising the procedures for obtaining Gabonese nationality or identity documents; what measures had been taken to address these situations?

    What was the proportion of Gabonese nationals who were victims of trafficking? What were the main forms of trafficking found in Gabon? Did forced labour include domestic servitude, commercial exploitation and sexual exploitation? What was the profile of the perpetrators of human trafficking, their gender, and their nationality? How many cases had been prosecuted and convicted? What were the measures for reparation and rehabilitation of victims of trafficking? What was being done by the State to prevent and combat trafficking in persons, including for the purpose of labour exploitation, sexual exploitation and domestic servitude, including of non-citizens, especially children? Had appropriate resources been allocated to the National Commission for the Prevention and Combatting of Trafficking in Persons to enable it to carry out its mandate?

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation said a guide had been produced to inform people on how to tackle different forms of violence, including sexual violence, and how to support victims. A specific programme had been developed for indigenous children with nomadic lifestyles. Gabon provided support to refugees and asylum seekers as required. The right to health was recognised as a universal human right. Those in an irregular situation received healthcare regardless of their status.

    There was a small number of cases of irregular migration in Gabon today. In recent years, it was ensured that migrants in an irregular situation had been provided with documents and put into a regular situation.

    In 2023, Gabon completed the procedure required for the State to be in a position to proactively identify cases of human trafficking by identifying irregular movements. The country was also collecting data in this regard, to identify trends and receive up to date information on this phenomenon in Gabon. Transnational networks existed, operating by both land and sea. Underground networks operated trafficking of women and children, and irregular migration was the driving force behind this phenomenon. Gabon was working with Benin to find a solution to this issue. The State was fully committed to rolling out the project to have practical solutions to these issues, including police investigations into these cases. Trafficking was a transnational problem, and it was important to go back to the country of origin.

    Everyone in Gabon enjoyed the right to freedom of assembly. Indigenous peoples were dealt with on an equal footing, the same way as other citizens in Gabon. They were appropriately supported if they wished to establish associations. If the laws on equal treatment were not respected, appropriate penalties would be handed down.

    Legislation established the National Commission for the Prevention of Human Trafficking in Gabon. The Commission spearheaded a national strategy to counter trafficking. Gabon was a party to the 1951 Geneva Convention on Refugees. An appeals mechanism existed for those who were not satisfied with their asylum decision. There were no refugee camps in Gabon; refugees and asylum seekers shared the same schools and hospitals as Gabonese citizens. A refugee held the same rights as a Gabonese citizen. A refugee card was issued and gave access to many of the same rights as an identity card.

    BAKRI SIDIKI DIABY, Committee Expert and Country Co-Rapporteur, congratulated Gabon on the mechanism adopted to tackle human trafficking. Could statistics on the number of stateless people be provided? 

    A Committee Expert asked what steps had been taken by the Gabonese Government to push back against hate speech and xenophobia? Would Gabon ratify the Convention on the Rights of Migrants and Members of their Families?

    Another Expert asked if history education was compulsory in the State party at all levels of the education system? Given the colonial legacy of the State party, to what extent did the educational curricula cover this issue? Was Gabon supportive of the concept of reparations for colonial wrongs?

    A Committee Expert asked if any measures had been taken to eradicate malaria, particularly among migrants and asylum seekers?

    Another Expert asked how refugees were cared for in Gabon, including accommodation needs, in light of the fact that there were no camps?

    An Expert said Gabon had made good progress in regard to the education of children with disabilities. Had Gabon ratified the Convention on the Protection of Persons with Disabilities, and instruments on displaced persons.

    One Expert paid tribute to the father of the Gabonese nation.

    Responses by the Delegation

    The delegation said in history classes in public schools, there was no political link with colonialism. The curriculum was based on the programme drafted by a national pedological institution.

    Closing Remarks

    FAITH DIKELEDI PANSY TLAKULA, Committee Expert and Follow-up Rapporteur , said it would be the first time that Gabon would receive recommendations with a follow-up. Several recommendations would be highlighted for follow-up within one year.

    RÉGINE ESSENEME, Committee Expert and Country Rapporteur, congratulated Gabon for the multi-sectoral approach taken to the dialogue, which had been productive and fruitful. Ms. Esseneme thanked all those who had made the dialogue possible, especially in the hybrid format. Gabon was urged to do its utmost to implement the recommendations contained in the concluding observations, to ensure ongoing collaboration with the Committee.

    PAUL-MARIE GONDJOUT, Minister of Justice, Keeper of the Seals of Gabon and head of the delegation , thanked the Committee for the constructive and respectful exchange which had taken place. The Committee’s questions had provided an opportunity to share more information about the situation in Gabon. Gabon would continue engaging with the Committee and looked forward to the concluding observations and follow-up. Gabon would respond within the timeframes indicated. Gabon would take steps to ensure the optimal implementation of the provisions enshrined within the Convention, working with all stakeholders involved in human rights.

    _______________

    CERD25.007E

    Produced by the United Nations Information Service in Geneva for use of the media; 
    not an official record. English and French versions of our releases are different as they are the product of two separate coverage teams that work independently.

    MIL OSI United Nations News

  • MIL-OSI USA: California’s population increases — again

    Source: US State of California 2

    May 1, 2025

    What you need to know: For the second year in a row, California’s Department of Finance released data showing the Golden State’s population grew. In 2024, the state added more than 100,000 residents.

    SACRAMENTO — Today, Governor Gavin Newsom announced that California’s population grew by 108,000 people in calendar year 2024, reaching 39,529,000 people as of January 1st, 2025 — according to new data from the California Department of Finance.

    “People from across the nation and the globe are coming to the Golden State to pursue the California Dream, where rights are protected and people are respected. As the fourth largest economy in the world — from the Inland Empire to the Bay Area — regions throughout California are growing, strengthening local communities and boosting our state’s future. We’ll continue to cut tape, invest in people, and seek real results from government to ensure we build on this momentum – all of which are at risk with the extreme and uncertain tariffs.”

    Governor Gavin Newsom

    This increase marks the second consecutive calendar year of population growth. Additionally, this report reflects an upward revision of California’s January 2024 population, which saw a growth of 192,219 people (year over year) — up from the previously estimated increase of 67,104 people. And an upward revision of California’s January 2023 population, which saw a growth of 48,764 people (year over year) — up from the previously estimated decrease of 53,727 people.

    Factors for growth

    • Higher 2024 K-8 enrollment by 13,890 compared to 2023.

    • An increase in the 65-and-older population of 25,298 people in 2024, up from 6,622,031 people reported last year.

    • Natural increase — the net result of births minus deaths — contributed 114,805 to overall population growth in 2024, largely in line with the growth of 105,550 in 2023.

    • More data sources to better estimate California’s share of recent increases in legal immigration to the U.S. from 2021 to 2024, showing 277,468 more immigrants to the state during this period than in the 2023 estimate. This data only includes legal immigration.

    A look at city and county data

    The report contains preliminary year-over-year January 2025 and revised January 2021 through January 2024 population data for California cities, counties, and the state. It’s important to note that these estimates are based on information as of January 1, 2025, and therefore do not include data for the Los Angeles County wildfires later that month.

    • California’s 58 counties range in size from Alpine County, with just over 1,170 residents, to Los Angeles County with 9.9 million residents. The population increased in 35 counties, with most growth in the Central Valley, the Inland Empire, and coastal counties. Population gains reflect natural increase exceeding losses in net total migration.

    • The state’s ten largest counties remain Los Angeles, San Diego, Orange, Riverside, San Bernardino, Santa Clara, Alameda, Sacramento, Contra Costa, and Fresno, with each having more than one million residents. These ten counties represent 72 percent of California’s population. 

    • Nine of the ten counties with one million or more people have positive population growth, leaving Contra Costa as the only county with a very small population loss of 24 people. Los Angeles led with an increase of 28,000 persons. 

    • Population growth rates ranged from a high of 2.88 percent in Lassen County to a low of -1.58 percent in Mono County. The next five largest in percentage growth were Glenn (1.35 percent), Fresno (0.87 percent), Sutter (0.83 percent), Imperial (0.81 percent), and Tulare (0.73 percent).

    Recent Census Bureau revisions

    In addition to the report released by the Department of Finance, the U.S. Census Bureau (which measures on a fiscal calendar year versus DOF’s calendar year) released updated information showing California’s population increasing as well  — with several key revisions upwards:

    • July 1, 2023 to June 30, 2024, California’s population increased by more than 225,000 people.

    • July 1, 2022 to June 30, 2023: California’s population increased by more than 50,000 people. NOTE: This was revised up from the originally reported 75,000+ decrease.

    • July 1, 2021 to June 30, 2022: California’s population decreased by just 151 people. NOTE: This was revised up from the originally reported 100,000+ decrease.

    Busting myths

    Despite the common myth of a continually declining population, California has only saw a short period of population loss in its 174 year history — during the peak of the COVID pandemic, when it decreased by 379,544 people (which represents about 1% decrease over those two years), according to the U.S. Census Bureau.

    During the same period, from July 1, 2021 to June 30, 2022, 10 states saw larger population decreases, with Louisiana — led by a Republican Governor and legislature — seeing the largest percent decrease. And 13 states also saw population decreases from July 1, 2020 to June 30, 2021.

    California leads the way

    Building on the second year of population growth, California leads the way in tourism spending, and was just announced as the fourth largest economy, moving up from fifth, in the world by the International Monetary Fund. California is also home to the most Fortune 500 companies and most Inc. 5000 companies. And, California leads the way nationally as the #1 state for new business starts, access to venture capital funding, manufacturing, high-tech, and agriculture.

    Recent news

    News What you need to know: House Republicans used an illegal tactic to attempt to overrule California’s clean cars and trucks program that has decreased smog and protected Californians’ health. SACRAMENTO — Governor Gavin Newsom issued the following statement today…

    News Sacramento, California – Governor Gavin Newsom today issued a proclamation declaring April 30, 2025, as “Apprenticeship Day.”The text of the proclamation and a copy can be found below. PROCLAMATIONNational Apprenticeship Day is a nationwide celebration…

    News What you need to know: The state of California is providing LA City and County a new AI-powered e-check software free of charge to speed the pace at which local governments are approving building permits. LOS ANGELES – Leveraging the power of private sector…

    MIL OSI USA News